Spec - Seashore Builders, Inc.

Spec - Seashore Builders, Inc.
DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY
UNITED STATES COAST GUARD
SHORE INFASTRUCTURE LOGISTICS COMMAND
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
REPLACE PUBLIC WORKS SHOP
AT
U.S. COAST GUARD
SECTOR NORTH CAROLINA
ATLANTIC BEACH, NC
MARCH 2010
COMMANDING OFFICER
UNITED STATES COAST GUARD
CIVIL ENGINEERING UNIT, RM 2179
1240 EAST NINTH STREET
CLEVELAND, OHIO 44199-2060
P/N 05-C05124
File: C7648X
AUTHOR: JERRY MARTIN, A.I.A.
P/N 05-C05124
Page 1 of 367
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 01 00
01 01 20
01 01 30
01 01 50
01 02 80
01 03 00
01 04 00
01 04 10
01 06 30
01 06 70
01 20 00
01 30 00
01 31 00
01 37 00
01 42 00
01 51 00
01 52 00
01 54 00
01 54 10
01 54 20
01 54 40
01 55 00
01 56 60
01 56 90
01 62 00
01 65 00
01 72 00
01 73 00
Scope Of Work
Work by Others
Project Phasing
Contractor Work Hours
Pre-Bid Site Visits
Pre-Construction Site Conditions
Coordination
Field Adjustments
Building Permits
Environmental Permits
Project Meetings
Submittals
Construction Schedule, Schedule of Values, and Progress Schedule
Construction Daily Reports
Sources for Reference Publications
Temporary Utilities
Protection from Weather and Construction Operations
Safety Program
Equipment/Utility Lockout and Tag-Out Requirements
Material Safety Data Sheets and Material Handling Procedures
Temporary Fire Protection
Access Roads and Parking
General Cleanup & Site Restoration of Work Areas
Hazardous Waste
Staging Areas and Access
Recovered Materials Notice
As Built Drawings
Operating Instructions and Training
List of Submittals
Contract Item Acceptance Request
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00
Demolition
51
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00
Cast-In-Place Concrete
57
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 21 19
Open Web Steel Joist Framing
P/N 05-C05124
Page 2 of 367
91
05 30 00
05 50 00
Steel Decks
Metal: Miscellaneous and Fabrications
94
100
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 21 16
07 84 00
07 92 00
Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation
Firestopping
Joint Sealants
106
108
111
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13
08 11 16
08 33 23
08 71 00
Steel Doors and Frames
Aluminum Windows
Overhead Coiling Doors
Door Hardware
117
121
127
137
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 00
09 29 00
09 65 00
09 90 00
Supports for Gypsum Board
Gypsum Board
Resilient Flooring
Paints and Coatings
145
147
151
154
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 21 13
10 28 13
10 44 16
Toilet Compartments
Toilet Accessories
Fire Extinguishers
165
170
174
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 34 19
Metal Building Systems
177
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 00 00
Plumbing, General Purpose
202
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 03 00
23 05 93
23 07 00
23 31 13
23 37 13
23 82 02
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
Thermal Insulation for Mechanical Systems
Metal Ducts
Diffusers, Registers, and Grills
Unitary Heating and Cooling Equipment
P/N 05-C05124
Page 3 of 367
228
232
235
247
261
264
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00
26 20 00
26 51 00
Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Interior Distribution System
Interior Lighting
276
280
295
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 63
Analog/Addressable Interior Fire Alarm System
304
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
31 11 00
31 23 00
31 31 16
Clearing and Grubbing
Excavation and Fill
Soil Treatment for Subterranean Termite Control
322
324
336
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 92 19
Seeding
343
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
33 11 00
33 30 00
33 32 16
Water Distribution
Sanitary Sewers
Grinder Pump Lift Station
350
358
367
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
P/N 05-C05124
Page 4 of 367
SECTION 01 01 00
SCOPE OF WORK
1.
WORK INCLUDED: Major items of work shall include the following:
1.1
Work associated with these items is described in the following specification sections and/or
are shown on the contract drawings. Incidental work items not listed above and necessary for
completing the project shall be included. The general project scope is to design and construct a
building to replace the Public Works Shop building that was torn down. Unless noted otherwise,
work is generally confined to the existing Sector North Carolina site.
2.
DRAWINGS: Drawings and the accompanying specifications are the property of the
Government and comprise legal documentation that pertains exclusively to this project. Drawings
can only be obtained electronically by downloading the files identified with this solicitation at
https://www.fbo.gov. CEU Cleveland will not provide hard copies of drawings.
2.1 Construction Drawings:
7648-D Sheets 1 thru 28 of 28
2.2 Reference Drawings:
NONE
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 01 00 Page 5 of 367
SECTION 01 01 20
WORK BY OTHERS
1.
WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT: Non-contractor personnel will
accomplish the following work items necessary for completion of the project. However, the
contractor must coordinate accomplishment of these work items with the appropriate parties noted
below in accordance with SECTION 01 04 00, “Coordination”.
1.1
Work by Coast Guard Personnel: Coast Guard personnel (or other parties acting on the
behalf of the Coast Guard) will install and connect communications, security and electronic
equipment, radios, telephone and antennas, and pull wiring for these systems. Additionally Coast
Guard personnel shall be responsible for disconnecting and moving, storing Coast Guard owned
tools and equipment that will be in the areas where contract work is to be performed. Coast Guard
personnel shall also be responsible for the removal and security of their personal items.
1.2
Work by other Contractors or Service Companies: Contractor personnel and equipment
associated with another construction contract in progress may require access to the site during
execution of this contract. The contractor shall coordinate work and ensure that work operations do
not interfere with the contract currently in progress. The contractor shall allow service contract
personnel access to the site for trash removal, snow removal, grounds maintenance, or the
performance of other related service contracts. The Coast Guard will advise the contractor of the,
trash removal, grounds maintenance, or other recurring maintenance schedules.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 01 20 Page 6 of 367
SECTION 01 01 30
PROJECT PHASING
1.
To minimize interference with Coast Guard operations, utilize a predetermined phasing
sequence to accomplish contract work. Coordinate timing between successive phases with Coast
Guard personnel to allow for necessary relocations. Some of the work will be performed after
normal hours and on weekends to accommodate Coast Guard Operations.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 01 30 Page 7 of 367
SECTION 01 01 50
CONTRACTOR WORK HOURS
1.
WORK HOURS: Accomplish work during normal unit operational hours of 7:30 a.m. to
4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday unless otherwise approved by the Coast Guard. Note any
departures from these work hours on the Daily Reports.
2.
SATURDAY, SUNDAY AND HOLIDAYS: The contractor shall provide the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative at least forty-eight hours advance notice prior to working on
weekends or Federal holidays. The Government may reject any such request without impacting the
completion time of the contract.
3.
CONTRACT COMPLETION: The contractor shall complete work within the time frame
indicated upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Limitations imposed by these work hours will not
entitle the Contractor additional time to complete the project. Refer to FAR Clause 52.211-10
"Commencement, Prosecution and Completion of Work".
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 01 50 Page 8 of 367
SECTION 01 02 80
PRE-BID SITE VISITS
1.
GENERAL: Bidders are responsible for visiting the site to field verify existing conditions
and determine actual dimensions and the nature of the work required. Failure to visit the site does
not relinquish the bidder from determining the extent and scope of the work required and
estimating the difficulty and cost to complete the project. Requests for equitable adjustments, in
either time or money, arising from failing to field verify site conditions may be denied. Provisions
regarding the site visit requirements are outlined in FAR Clause 52.236-3 “Site Investigation and
Conditions Affecting the Work”
2.
SITE VISIT: Arrange pre-bid site visits to Sector North Carolina to verify existing
conditions with CWO Scott Romero, Facilities Engineering, (252)-240-8486, or SCPO Don
Beckler, Facilities Engineering, (252)-240-8487, between the hours of 0800 and 1500, Monday
thru Friday.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 02 80 Page 9 of 367
SECTION 01 03 00
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SITE CONDITIONS
1.
SITE CONDITION VERIFICATION: The Contractor shall verify the conditions of the
existing site, equipment and facilities potentially affected by the work under this contract and
photograph and/or videotape the conditions in order to document their pre-construction condition.
Copies of the photos and videos shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to starting
work.
2.
UTILITIES: The contractor shall use proactive measures such as digging, metering,
testing, underground utility location devices, and utility company location services to locate all
underground utilities identified in the area of work at no additional expense to the Government.
Additional cost of unplanned outages and repair of damaged utilities, including emergency repairs
by others, not properly identified by the Contractor shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 03 00 Page 10 of 367
SECTION 01 04 00
COORDINATION
1.
INTERFERENCE WITH COAST GUARD OPERATIONS: Accomplish work in a manner
that causes minimal impact on normal operations. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting
Officer’s Technical Representative at least five working days in advance of any planned outages of
water, electrical, telephone, or sanitary facilities. Notify the Contracting Officer’s Technical
Representative at least one week prior to beginning construction.
2.
MILITARY STATION REGULATIONS:
2.1
The Contractor, his employees, and subcontractors shall become familiar with and obey all
station regulations. All personnel employed on the project shall keep within the limits of the work
and avenues of ingress and egress, and shall not enter any other areas outside of the site of the work
unless required to do so in the performance of their duties. The Contractor's equipment shall be
conspicuously marked for identification.
2.2
There shall be NO SMOKING in any Coast Guard building.
2.3
Storage Areas: The Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative will determine exact
location and boundaries of staging areas. Under no circumstances shall materials be stored in areas
that will interfere with aircraft operations.
2.4
Storm Protection: If a gale force wind warning or higher is issued, take precautions to
minimize any danger to persons and protect the work and nearby Government property.
Precautions shall include, but not be limited to, closings, removing loose materials, tools and
equipment, from exposed locations. Remove and secure scaffolding and temporary work. Close
openings in the work area if storms of lesser intensity are imminent.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 04 00 Page 11 of 367
SECTION 01 04 10
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
1.
The Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative may authorize field adjustments. Field
adjustments are those alterations that do not affect time, price, or intent of the contract documents.
All field adjustments shall be documented in the Daily Reports and on the As-Built Drawings.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 04 10 Page 12 of 367
SECTION 01 06 30
BUILDING PERMITS
1.
NO BUILDING PERMITS from state or local governments are required for work
performed on federal property. Courtesy permits may be obtained at the Contractor's option. No
payment will be made to the Contractor for any permit cost. Design changes to obtain courtesy
permits, even at no cost, will not be allowed without written approval of the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 06 30 Page 13 of 367
SECTION 01 06 70
ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS
1.
Unless directed by other sections of this specification, the Contractor will not be responsible
for obtaining environmental permits.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 06 70 Page 14 of 367
SECTION 01 20 00
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.
LOCATION: Project meetings will be conducted either on-site or with a conference call.
The following meetings may be held:
1.1
Pre-Construction Conference: After award of a contract, the Coast Guard will arrange a
conference with the contractor, and necessary Coast Guard personnel. The purpose of this
conference is to orient the Contractor to Government procedures for wage rates, contractual and
administrative matters, and to discuss specific issues regarding actual construction.
1.2
Progress and Technical Review Meetings: These meetings generally take place at the
project site. Either party may request a meeting to review the progress of the project and/or review
or clarify the technical requirements of the specifications.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 20 00 Page 15 of 367
SECTION 01 30 00
SUBMITTALS
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Officer (4) copies of submittals
required by this specification and/or itemized on the "List of Submittals" found at the end of this
division.
2.
REQUEST: A "CONTRACT ITEM ACCEPTANCE REQUEST" shall accompany all
submittals. All items shall be individually listed and clearly identified, referencing the applicable
Section and Paragraph. A copy of this form is located at the end of this division and may be
reproduced as needed.
2.1
Up to eight (8) items may be listed on an individual acceptance request. Number each
Contract Item Acceptance Request consecutively (Submittals # 1, 2, etc.) and re-submittals with
letters (Submittal #1A is the first re-submittal of Submittal #1).
2.2
Submittals shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer. The contractor shall allow 14
calendar days, excluding mailing time, for the review process in the Construction Schedule and all
project planning. In instances where submittal review must be expedited, the Contractor may
annotate the Contract Item Acceptance Request as "Urgent" and provide a FAX number for prompt
return. The Coast Guard will make every effort to accelerate the review of each urgent submittal;
however, the Contractor should not anticipate a reduced time schedule and shall plan project
progress accordingly.
3.
ACCEPTANCE: Submittals will be stamped "Accepted," "Accepted with Comments," or
"Resubmit". Acceptance, Acceptance with comments or Resubmit for each item will be indicated
on the Contract Item Acceptance Request form and one copy returned to the Contractor.
3.1
Prompt re-submittal of items is required. The Contractor shall furnish a new Contract Item
Acceptance Request numbered in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 2.1.
4.
DEFECTIVE WORK: Acceptance of Submittals does not restrict the Government's right to
reject departures from contract requirements, use of damaged or improperly installed
items/materials, or latent defects, nor does it prejudice the Government's rights of rejecting any
work found defective at Final Inspection and Acceptance.
4.1
Work started or completed prior to submittal acceptance is solely at Contractor's risk and
may jeopardize contract performance.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 30 00 Page 16 of 367
SECTION 01 31 00
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, SCHEDULE OF VALUES, AND PROGRESS SCHEDULE
1.
In accordance with the Notice to Proceed letter, the Contractor shall submit the following:
a.
Construction Schedule: This schedule shall be prepared using a
horizontal bar graph with time scale. It shall be in an industry accepted Project Management
format and shall accurately display:
b.
1.
All major categories of work to be performed within the required contract
completion date broken out in sufficient detail to track progress throughout
the life of the contract. Major work categories should include but are not
limited to mobilization, carpentry, plumbing, mechanical, electrical, roofing,
concrete, site work, and demobilization. In addition to construction
activities, procurement times for critical items, submittal turnaround time,
mobilization, final inspection, punch-list work, and demobilization shall be
shown on the schedule.
2.
The duration of each work category.
3.
Any concurrent work categories.
Schedule of Values: This schedule shall be prepared as a detailed cost breakdown
of the contract price and be submitted with the Construction Schedule. This
schedule shall include but not be limited to costs of materials, equipment, and labor
for all major work categories shown on the Construction Schedule. The Contractor
shall adhere to the following guidelines when developing the Schedule of Values.
1.
Format: The line items in the Schedule of Values shall be the same as that of
the Construction Schedule.
2.
Bonds: Bonding costs will only be paid in a lump sum if they are broken out
separately and included with the schedule of values. The Contractor shall provide
evidence that he has furnished full payment to the surety.
3.
Materials: To request progress payments for materials delivered to the
construction or fabrication site, the particular category of work associated with the
materials must be broken down into separate material and labor costs.
2.
UPDATES: Each month and /or with each progress payment request, the Contractor shall
submit the following:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 31 00 Page 17 of 367
a.
Progress Schedule-This schedule shall be an update of the Construction Schedule. It
shall show the current schedule of all work.
1.
Modifications - If modifications are made to the contract, the work added
shall be tracked separately from the original Construction Schedule and shall
maintain its individuality on the Progress Schedule throughout the life of the
contract. Progress Payment requests shall not lump modification costs into the
original contract price.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 31 00 Page 18 of 367
SECTION 01 37 00
CONSTRUCTION DAILY REPORTS
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor shall complete a Daily Report for each and every day after
mobilization. The importance of an accurate, fully detailed Daily Report, promptly delivered to the
designated On-Site Representative cannot be overemphasized. The report shall provide an accurate
cumulative summary of the history and performance of the work. The Daily Report shall document
weather; work hours; work in-place; inspections and tests conducted, and their results; dimensional
checks; equipment and material checks; data on workers by classification; the mobilization and
demobilization of construction equipment; materials delivered to the site; and any other pertinent
noteworthy event; e.g., personnel injury, site visit by Coast Guard personnel, etc.
2.
RESPONSIBILITY: The Daily Reports play an important role in settling disputes and
claims for both parties. For this reason the On-Site Representative and the Contractor's
Superintendent, together, should review the report to ensure its completeness and accuracy. Each
day's report shall be submitted to the On-Site Representative no later than 10:00 a.m. the following
morning. The maximum allowable retainage will be enforced for late, sporadic or non-submission
of Daily Reports. In the absence of an On-Site Representative the Contractor shall mail the Daily
Reports directly to the Contracting Officer every Friday. Should the Daily Report indicate an
accident, environmental issue, OSHA violation or any crisis the On-Site Representative deems
important, the Report should be faxed to the Contracting Officer at (216) 902-6278 immediately.
3.
DESIGNATED ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE RESPONSIBILITY: After a “Notice to
Proceed” for site work has been issued the On-Site Representative shall complete a Daily Report
for each day until the Contractor mobilizes. After the Contractor is at the site, the On-Site
Representative shall ensure that the Contractor completes the Daily Report in accordance with
Paragraphs 1 and 2 above. Any items of dispute or other notes the On-Site Representative feels
appropriate shall be added to the Daily Report. The On-Site Representative is also responsible for
informing the COTR when the contractor fails to submit daily reports.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 37 00 Page 19 of 367
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish
requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number,
date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards
producing organization, (e.g. ASTM B 564 Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the
standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying
number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other
sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different
from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the standards producing
organization should be ordered from the source by title rather than by number.
ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
38800 Country Club Drive
Farmington Hills, MI 48331
Ph: 248-848-3700
Fax: 248-848-3701
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.concrete.org
AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI)
2111 Wilson blvd, Suite 500
Arlington, VA 22201
Ph: 703-524-8800
Fax: 703-528-3816
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ahrinet.org
AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL (AMCA)
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004-1893
Ph: 847-394-0150
Fax: 847-253-0088
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.amca.org
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 20 of 367
ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
National Headquarters
1525 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph: 703-358-2960
Fax: 703-358-2961
Internet: http://www.aluminum.org
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249
Washington, DC 20001
Ph: 202-624-5800
Fax: 202-624-5806
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS
(ACGIH)
1330 Kemper Meadow Drive
Cincinnati, OH 45240
Ph: 513-742-2020
Fax: 513-742-3355
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.acgih.org
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
c/o Composite Panel Association
18922 Premiere Court
Gaithersburg, MD 20879-1574
Ph: 301-670-0604
Fax: 301-840-1252
Internet: http://www.pbmdf.org
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
One East Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph: 312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Publications: 800-644-2400
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
1140 Connecticut Avenue, NW, Suite 705
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 21 of 367
Washington, DC 20036
Ph: 202-452-7100
Fax: 202-463-6573
Internet: http://www.steel.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW, 6th Floor
Washington, DC 20036
Ph: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
Ph: 703-295-6300 - 800-548-2723
Fax: 703-295-6222
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.asce.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIRCONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE)
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329
Ph: 800-527-4723 or 404-636-8400
Fax: 404-321-5478
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ashrae.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018-2187
Ph: 847-699-2929
Fax: 847-768-3434
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
901 Canterbury, Suite A
Westlake, OH 44145
Ph: 440-835-3040
Fax: 440-835-3488
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 22 of 367
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, CO 80235
Ph: 800-926-7337
Fax: 303-347-0804
Internet: http://www.awwa.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
550 N.W. LeJeune Road
Miami, FL 33126
Ph: 800-443-9353 - 305-443-9353
Fax: 305-443-7559
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.aws.org
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
Three Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016
Ph: 212-591-7722 or 800-843-2763
Fax: 212-591-7674
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)
1518 K Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005
Ph: 202-737-0202
Fax: 202-638-4833
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.aabchq.com
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph: 610-832-9500
Fax: 610-832-9555
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.astm.org
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
355 Lexington Avenue
17th Floor
New York, NY 10017
Ph: 212-297-2122
Fax: 212-370-9047
E-mail: [email protected]
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 23 of 367
Internet: http://www.buildershardware.com
CSA AMERICA INC (CSA/AM)
8501 East Pleasant Valley Road
Cleveland, OH 44131-5575
Ph: 216-524-4990
Fax: 216-520-8979
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.csa-america.org
CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION (CEC)
Media and Public Communications Office
1516 Ninth Street, MS-29
Sacramento, CA 95814-5512
Ph: 916-654-4287
Internet: http://www.energy.ca.gov/
CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)
5959 Shallowford Road, Suite 419
Chattanooga, TN 37421
Ph: 423-892-0137
Fax: 423-892-0817
Internet: http://www.cispi.org
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
933 North Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758
Ph: 847-517-1200
Fax: 847-517-1206
Internet: http://www.crsi.org/
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
260 Madison Avenue
New York, NY 10016
Ph: 212-251-7200
Fax: 212-251-7234
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.copper.org
FM GLOBAL (FM)
1301 Atwood Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919
Ph: 401-275-3000
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: [email protected]
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 24 of 367
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com
GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)
810 First Street, NE, Suite 510
Washington, DC 20002
Ph: 202-289-5440
Fax: 202-289-3707
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.gypsum.org
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA)
120 Wall Street, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10005
Ph: 212-248-5000
Fax: 212-248-5018
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.iesna.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
445 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331
Ph: 732-981-0060
Fax: 732-981-1712
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF PLUMBING AND MECHANICAL
OFFICIALS (IAPMO)
5001 E. Philadelphia St.
Ontario, CA 91761
Ph: 909-472-4100
Fax: 909-472-4150
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.iampo.org
INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL (ICC)
5360 Workman Mill Road
Whittier, CA 90601
Ph: 562-699-0541
Fax: 562-699-9721
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.iccsafe.org
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND
FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS)
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 25 of 367
127 Park Street, NE
Vienna, VA 22180-4602
Ph: 703-281-6613
Fax: 703-281-6671
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.mss-hq.com
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)
2800 Ingleton Avenue
Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C
Ph: 888-674-8937
Fax: 888-211-8708
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.paintinfo.com/mpi
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)
1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.mbma.com
MIDWEST INSULATION CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MICA)
16712 elm Circle
Omaha, NE 68130
Ph: 800-747-6422
Fax: 402-330-9702
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.micainsulation.org
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION (NASA)
Publication(s) Available From
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
Ph: 202-783-3238
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS
(NAAMM)
8oo Roosevelt Road, Bldg C, Suite 312
Glen Ellyn, IL 60137
Ph: 630-942-6591
Fax: 630-790-3095
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.naamm.org
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 26 of 367
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1752
Rosslyn, VA 22209
Ph: 703-841-3200
Fax: 703-841-5900
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB)
8575 Grovemont Circle
Gaithersburg, MD 20877
Ph: 301-977-3698
Fax: 301-977-9589
Internet: http://www.nebb.org
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
1 Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
100 Bureau Drive
Stop 2100
Gaithersburg, MD 20899-2100
Ph: 301-975-NIST
Internet: http://www.nist.gov
Order Publications From:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph: 888-293-6498 or 202-512-1530
Fax: 202-512-1262
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
or
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5285 Port Royal Road
Springfield, VA 22161
Ph: 703-605-6585
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: [email protected]
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 27 of 367
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)
10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018
Ph: 847-299-9070
Fax: 847-299-1183
Internet: http://www.nrca.net
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
789 North Dixboro Road
P.O. Box 130140
Ann Arbor, MI 48113-0140
Ph: 734-769-8010 or 800-NSF-MARK
Fax: 734-769-0109
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.nsf.org
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)
800 Turnpike Street, Suite 300
North Andover, MA 01845
Ph: 978-557-0720 or 800-589-8956
Fax: 978-557-0721
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.pdionline.org
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL
ASSOCIATION (SMACNA)
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1209
Ph: 703-803-2980
Fax: 703-803-3732
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.smacna.org
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS INTERNATIONAL (SAE)
400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096-0001
Ph: 724-776-4841
Fax: 724-776-0790
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.sae.org
STEEL DECK INSTITUTE (SDI)
P.O. Box 25
Fox River Grove, IL 60021
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 28 of 367
Ph: 847-458-4647
Fax: 847-458-4648
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.sdi.org
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
c/o Wherry Associates
30200 Detroit Road
Cleveland, OH 44145-1967
Ph: 440-899-0010
Fax: 440-892-1404
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.steeldoor.org
STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE (SJI)
3127 Mr. Joe White Avenue
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577-6760
Ph: 843-626-1995
Fax: 843-626-5565
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.steeljoist.org
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222-4656
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
333 Pfingsten Road
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096
Ph: 847-272-8800
Fax: 847-272-8129
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA)
2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155
Dallas, TX 75234
Ph: 972-243-3902
Fax: 972-243-3907
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.uni-bell.org
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 29 of 367
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
Order CRD-C DOCUMENTS from:
U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station
ATTN: Technical Report Distribution Section, Services
Branch, TIC
3909 Halls Ferry Road
Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199
Ph: 601-634-2664
Fax: 601-634-2388
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/handbook.htm
Order Other Documents from:
USACE Publications Depot
Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.usace.army.mil/publications
or http://www.hnd.usace.army.mil/techinfo/engpubs.htm
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)
Order AMS Publications from:
AGRICULTURAL MARKETING SERVICE (AMS)
Seed Regulatory and Testing Branch
801 Summit Crossing Place, Suite C
Gastonia, NC 28054-2193
Ph: 704-810-8870
Fax: 704-852-4189
Internet: http://www.ams.usda.gov/lsg/seed.htm
E-mail: [email protected]
Order Other Publications from:
U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service
14th and Independence Avenue, SW, Room 4028-S
Washington, DC 20250
Ph: 202-720-2791
Fax: 202-720-2166
Internet: http://www.usda.gov/rus
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)
1401 Constitution Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20230
Ph: 202-482-2000
Internet: http://www.commerce.gov/
Order Publications From:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 30 of 367
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5285 Port Royal Road
Springfield, VA 22161
Ph: 703-605-6585
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
Order DOD Documents from:
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5285 Port Royal Road
Springfield, VA 22161
Ph: 703-605-6585
FAX: 703-605-6900
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account registration required
Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from:
Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG)
National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS)
1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700
Washington, CD 20005
Ph: 202-289-7800
Fax: 202-289-1092
Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
Ariel Rios Building
1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20460
Ph: 202-272-0167
Internet: http://www.epa.gov
--- Some EPA documents are available only from:
National Technical Information Service (NTIS)
5285 Port Royal Road
Springfield, VA 22161
Ph: 703-605-6585
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 31 of 367
Fax: 703-605-6900
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U. S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)
1015 18th Street, NW, Suite 508
Washington, D.C. 20036
Ph: 202-828-7422
Fax: 202-828-5110
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.usgbc.org
AOK: 2/04
LOK: 2/04
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)
General Services Administration
1800 F Street, NW
Washington, DC 20405
Ph: 202-501-1021
Internet: www.GSA.gov
Obtain documents from:
Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST)
Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP)
Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS)
Building 4/D
700 Robbins Avenue
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094
Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues
Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account registration required
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO)
732 North Capitol Street, NW
Washington, DC 20401
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
-- End of Section -P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 42 00 Page 32 of 367
SECTION 01 51 00
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
1.
GENERAL: All temporary utility connections shall be compatible with existing materials
and equipment to provide safe and efficient installation, operation and removal.
2.
ELECTRICITY AND WATER: Electrical power and water are available on the site. The
Contractor will be permitted to utilize these utilities in performing the work, provided that the
existing systems are not overloaded. The Contractor is responsible for installing and removing all
connections to existing systems and shall ensure work and materials are in accordance with local
codes. The use of the electricity shall be limited to tools that can be operated on 60 Hertz, single
phase, 20 ampere, 120 volt circuits.
3.
TELEPHONE: Telephone services will not be available for use by the Contractor.
4.
WATER HOOKUP: All connections to the water system shall be equipped with back flow
protection. Temporary potable water pipes and hoses shall be sterilized before being placed in
operation and every time the system is opened to the atmosphere for repair or relocation.
5.
SANITARY FACILITIES: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and
maintain approved portable toilet facilities for all Contractor personnel. The On-Site
Representative will designate the physical location for the facility and the Contractor shall maintain
the toilet facility to the satisfaction of the Government. Contractor personnel are forbidden to use
toilet facilities within existing buildings.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 51 00 Page 33 of 367
SECTION 01 52 00
PROTECTION FROM WEATHER AND CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS
1.
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES: Protect existing facilities/equipment and new
construction, whether in progress or newly completed, from the adverse effects of the weather and
construction operations. Provide temporary enclosures, coverings and barriers as required to afford
protection against exposure, weather and wind damage and from construction operations which
could degrade, stain, age, or reduce the finished quality of new work or damage existing facilities
and equipment.
2.
REAPPLICATION: All temporary closures or enclosures shall be made ready for
immediate re-application in the event of sudden storms or man-made conditions requiring
protection of existing facilities or completed construction.
3.
CLIMATE CONTROL: Where temporary heat is required during construction to protect
work completed or to heat facilities in operation by the Coast Guard, all openings shall be made
weather tight to allow the maintenance of 68 degrees F heat minimum with the existing or
temporary heating equipment or 78 degrees F. maximum with existing or temporary cooling.
NOTE TO OFFEROR: CLIMATE CONTROL SPECIFICALLY REQUIRED BY THIS
CONTRACT WILL BE SPECIFIED IN THE STATEMENT OF WORK AND/OR ASSOCIATED
DRAWINGS.
4.
PIPING: Prevent water-filled pipes or tanks from freezing for both interior and exterior
systems installed or in storage.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 52 00 Page 34 of 367
SECTION 01 54 00
SAFETY PROGRAM
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor is wholly responsible for work site safety. The Contractor
shall implement a safety program that protects the lives and health of personnel in the construction
area, prevents damage to property, and avoids work interruptions. The Contractor shall provide
appropriate safety barricades, signs, signal lights, etc. as well as complying with the requirements
of all applicable Federal, State and Local safety laws, rules and regulations.
2.
COMPLIANCE: The Contractor is specifically required to comply with the requirements
of the U. S. Army Corps of Engineers "Safety and Health Requirements Manual" (EM 385-1-1,
latest version available) and the “Accident Prevention” clause (FAR 52.236-13). Once accepted,
this safety plan shall become part of the contract requirements. Note: This review/acceptance does
not in any way relinquish the Contractor from responsibility for work site safety nor the obligation
to comply with the OSHA regulations found in 29 CFR 1910 & 1926 or any other State or Local
safety law, rule or regulation applicable to the contract work. The Coast Guard will cooperate fully
with the Department of Labor (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) in their
enforcement of OSHA regulations.
3.
SAFETY PLAN: The Contractor shall submit a written safety plan. At a minimum, this
plan shall describe the Contractor's general safety program and identify specific safety provisions
for hazards incidental to the contract work; e.g., elevated working surfaces, working over water,
working from floating work platforms, overhead crane operations, etc.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 54 00 Page 35 of 367
SECTION 01 54 10
EQUIPMENT/UTILITY LOCKOUT AND TAG-OUT REQUIREMENTS
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147, “The Control of
Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tag-out)”. The Contractor shall provide a Lockout/Tagout Plan to the
Contracting Officer prior to starting any work affected by the energy in the equipment/utility
system.
2.
APPLICATION: The Contractor shall be responsible for locking out and tagging out of
service, all equipment/utility systems involved in the work under this contract. After the
Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative has approved an outage, Government personnel and
the Contractor shall independently secure the equipment/utility system and tag the respective
system out of service. The Contractor shall provide their own locks and chains that are required to
secure the equipment/utility systems; e.g., steam, water, air, and/or electricity.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 54 10 Page 36 of 367
SECTION 01 54 20
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS AND MATERIAL HANDLING PROCEDURES
1.
DATA SHEETS: Submit a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for all materials containing
hazardous substances required for contract execution. Information provided in MSDS’s shall meet
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200. MSDS’s require Contracting Officer review and
acceptance prior to bringing these materials on site.
2.
MATERIAL STORAGE: Limit the quantity of these materials stored on site to the amount
needed for execution of work. Storage of excess materials will not be permitted. Assure that the
storage of these materials comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations
and provide additional storage facilities (paint lockers, etc.) as required for the storage of such
materials. Coordinate the physical location of storage areas with the On-site Representative prior to
bringing these materials on site.
3.
PROTECTIVE MEASURES: The contractor shall take all protective measures outlined on
the MSDS’s and as required by federal, state and local regulations to protect all personnel in the
vicinity of the work area from exposure to these materials. The Contractor shall include any
required protective measures in the Safety Plan (See SECTION 01540). The Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative shall review protective measures prior to allowing use of these materials.
4.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL: The Contractor shall dispose of all excess
hazardous materials as required by the MSDS and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and
regulations.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 54 20 Page 37 of 367
SECTION 01 54 40
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
1.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection
facilities to protect against predictable and controllable fire loss. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard
for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,
Alterations and Demolition Operations".
1.1
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not
less than one extinguisher at each floor stairwell and one at each building construction opening for
personnel egress.
1.2
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection
facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires.
1.3
Provide independent supervision of welding, flame cutting and other open flame work.
Provide each fire supervisor with an appropriate fire extinguisher. Contractor shall provide a fire
watch for a period of 8 hours after open flame work is completed.
1.4
The contractor shall provide a fire watch during the period of time that the fire suppression
system is not operational. The fire watch shall be for the full duration of time that the system is not
operational and shall be in the whole building.
1.5
Provide training for all personnel on-site in the proper operation of each type of fire
extinguisher provided. Provide all personnel with the proper notification procedure to summon the
local fire department or emergency medical service.
1.6
There shall be NO SMOKING or unsupervised open flames permitted neither inside any
structure, temporary or permanent; nor within 25 feet of combustible material or within 50 feet of
flammable liquids or compressed gasses.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 54 40 Page 38 of 367
SECTION 01 55 00
ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING
1.
ACCESS: Access to the site is available from public roads. Any damage to these roads by
the Contractor's vehicles shall be repaired without cost to the Government.
2.
PARKING: Vehicular operations and parking shall comply with all applicable government
orders and regulations. All driveways and entrances serving the Government shall be kept clear
and available to emergency vehicles at all times.
3.
VEHICLE AND VEHICLE OPERATION: All vehicles, owned by the Contractor or
employees of the Contractor, and operators of these vehicles, shall meet all state regulations for
safety, noise, loading and minimum liability insurance. All vehicle operators demonstrating
reckless or careless operation in the opinion of the Government shall not be allowed to operate
vehicles on government property for the duration of the contract.
4.
VISITORS: No visiting vehicles will be permitted on government property unless the
operator is employed by a subcontractor or supplier.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 55 00 Page 39 of 367
SECTION 01 56 60
GENERAL CLEANUP & SITE RESTORATION OF WORK AREAS
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of all trash and debris
incidental to the contract work from the limits of government property, as well as all adjacent
affected areas. The Contracting Officer shall determine the extent and interval of these cleanups.
2.
WORK AREA CLEANUP: At the end of each day the entire work area and all adjacent
affected areas shall be thoroughly cleaned by removing all trash, debris, dust, etc. caused by the
contract work. Any floor, wall or ceiling surfaces that may have been stained or soiled by the
contract work shall be restored to pre-construction condition.
3.
SITE RESTORATION: If at any time while performing the contract the Contractor causes
damage or destruction to any portion of any Government facility or grounds; e.g., bulkheads,
pavement, lawns, shrubbery, etc., it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to replace and/or restore
the damage as approved by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative at no additional cost
to the Government.
4.
POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP: Upon completion of the job, the Contractor shall
clean up the job site, returning it to a state of cleanliness equal to or exceeding that in which it was
found. The Contractor shall properly dispose of any trash, extra materials, dirt, debris, or other
litter that remains. If the job site appearance is not to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer’s
Technical Representative, final acceptance will not be approved.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 56 60 Page 40 of 367
SECTION 01 56 90
HAZARDOUS WASTE
1.
GENERAL: The Contractor shall comply with all federal, state, and local environmental
regulations dealing with the generation, management, storage, and disposal of solid, toxic, and
hazardous wastes. The Contractor shall ensure that all wastes are properly containerized, labeled
and placarded, managed, tested, stored, transported, and disposed of in accordance with all
applicable regulations.
2.
USED ELECTRIC LAMPS: 40 CFR 273 requires that electric lamps, including
incandescent, fluorescent, neon and high intensity discharge (mercury vapor, high/low pressure
sodium, metal halide) lamps that are no longer of use be recycled or treated as hazardous waste.
The Contractor shall not dispose of any used electric lamps as solid waste. The Contractor shall
recycle all waste electric lamps generated as a result of this work only at a licensed recycling
facility
3.
METALS: Unless noted otherwise, scrap metal shall not be land filled or treated as
hazardous waste. Recycle all scrap metal by smelting or any other acceptable recycling process.
Scrap metal includes ductwork, light fixture housings, pipe, mechanical and electrical equipment,
doors and frames, etc.
4.
SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer with signed and fully
executed originals of all hazardous waste profiles, test results, hazardous waste manifests and/or
other shipping papers, electric lamp disposal documents and all other required documentation.
Maximum payment retention shall be withheld until this documentation is received.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 56 90 Page 41 of 367
SECTION 01 62 00
STAGING AREAS AND ACCESS
1.
LOCATION: The Contractor shall store materials and operate equipment within the
confines of the staging area identified by the Government. Storage of materials outside of the
staging area will not be permitted.
2.
COORDINATION: Two weeks prior to construction, the Contractor shall contact LT
Jeremy Courtade, Facilities Engineering, (609)-813-3892, or LCDR Sean Obrien, Facilities
Engineering, (609)-813-3891, to verify the condition of the staging area, between the hours of 0800
and 1500, Monday thru Friday.
3.
ADJACENT AREAS: The Contractor shall ensure that all land and vegetation adjacent to
the staging area and access drive remain undisturbed and undamaged; all damages shall be repaired
at no cost to the Government.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 62 00 Page 42 of 367
SECTION 01 65 00
RECOVERED MATERIALS NOTICE
1.
GENERAL: It is the intent of CEU Cleveland to comply with the requirements of Section
6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act
(RCRA or the Act) as amended, 42 U.S.C. 6962 and Executive Order 12873 as they apply to the
procurement of the materials designated in paragraph 2.
2.
DESIGNATED RECOVERED MATERIALS: It is the purpose of this section to designate
items that are or can be made with recovered materials. These designated items can be found at
http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/procure/products.htm .
3.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSBILITY: The contractor should provide recycled materials to
the extent practical, provided the materials meet all other requirements of the applicable
specification section.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 65 00 Page 43 of 367
SECTION 01 72 00
AS BUILT DRAWINGS
1.
GENERAL: Maintain one full size set of contract drawings to record variations from the
original design. All deviations shall be neatly and clearly marked in RED on these drawings to
show work and/or materials actually provided. As Built drawings shall be updated as work
progresses and kept at the work site for the duration of the contract. These drawings shall be
available for Contracting Officer Technical Representative review upon request.
2.
DISCOVERED UTILITIES: Indicate the exact location of any underground utility lines
discovered in the course of the work on the As-Built drawings.
3.
PERMITTED VARIATIONS: As Built drawings shall reflect the actual construction and
materials provided when alternative materials or work methods are allowed in the specifications
and/or drawings or if the scope is altered by award of bid items, subsequent changes or
modifications.
4.
STANDARDS: Variations shown on As Built drawings shall be neat, clear and in
conformance with standard drafting practices. Mark-ups shall include supplementary notes,
legends, and details necessary to convey the exact representation of construction actually provided.
To comply with Computer Assisted Design (CAD) practices, only full size “AS- BUILT
Drawings” are acceptable.
5.
SUBMITTAL: Submit As Built drawings for Contracting Officer’s Technical
Representative Acceptance upon completion of the contract. Final payment will not be made until
all required As Built drawings are accepted. Maximum retention shall be withheld for late or
incomplete As Built drawings.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 72 00 Page 44 of 367
SECTION 01 73 00
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING
1.
MANUALS: Upon completion of the work, but before the work is accepted by the
Government, the Contractor must forward two complete bound sets of instructions, tabbed and
identified for reference, for all equipment and/or systems provided under this contract. The
instructions shall include component parts, manufacturer's certificates, warranty slips, parts lists,
descriptive brochures, and manufacturer's maintenance and operating instructions.
2.
TRAINING: The Contractor shall provide two hours of training, which shall explain to the
Government’s personnel all procedures necessary to operate and maintain all equipment and
systems on a continuing basis. A verification of training shall be provided.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 01 73 00 Page 45 of 367
LIST OF SUBMITTALS
SECT
01 03 00
01 31 00
01 54 00
01 54 10
01 54 20
01 56 90
01 72 00
01 73 00
02 41 00
03 30 00
05 21 19
05 30 00
05 50 00
07 21 16
PARA
1
1.a
1.b
2
3
1
1
3
4
5
1
2
1.5.2
1.7
1.3.1
1.5.1.2
2.4.7
2.4.1
2.4.1.3
2.3.2
2.4.6
2.3.3
2.5
1.5.1.1
2.3.1
3.11.2.3
3.11.2.4
2.4.10
1.4.2
1.4.2
1.4.1
2.1
1.4.2
2.2
2.1.5
2.2.6
1.2.2
2.7
2.4
2.1
ITEM
Pre-Con Site Conditions
Construction Schedule
Schedule of Values
Progress Schedule
Safety Plan
Lockout/Tag-out Plan
MSDS
Protective Measures
Hazardous Waste Documents
As-Built Drawings
Operating Instructions
Verification of Training
Existing Conditions
Demolition Plan
Notifications
Reinforcing Steel
Materials for curing concrete
Cement
Portland Cement
Ready-Mix Concrete
Vapor Barrier
Concrete Curing Materials
Reinforcement
Reinforcement Materials
Concrete Mix Design
Compressive Strength tests
Air Content
Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Welder Qualification
Material Safety Data Sheet
Steel Joist Framing
Accessories
Certification of Compliance
Accessories
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Mechanical Fasteners
Welding Procedures
Steel Stairs
Handrails
Blanket Insulation
P/N 05-C05124
Page 46 of 367
GENERAL USE COLUMN
07 84 00 2.1
07 92 00 2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
08 11 13 2.1
2.3
08 11 16 1.3.1
1.3.2.1
2.3.4.1
08 33 23 1.4
2.1
2.4
2.2
2.3
2.4
1.4
08 71 00 1.2
2.2.5
2.2
1.3
09 29 00 2.1
2.1
09 65 00 2.7
3.1
09 90 00 2.1
2.1
1.4
1.2
10 21 13
2.6
10 28 13 2.1.2
2.2
10 44 16 2.1
2.4
2.5
3.2.1
13 34 19 1.5.2
1.1.1.7
2.4.3
1.5.1
1.6
3.12.1
3.12.2
Firestopping Materials
Sealants
Primers
Bond Breakers
Backstops
Doors
Frames
Windows and Frames
Finish Sample
Insulating Glass
Installation Drawings
Overhead Coiling Doors
Accessories
Hardware
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Electric Door Operators
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Hardware Schedule
Keying System
Hardware Items
Key Bitting
Asbestos Free Materials
Material Safety Data Sheets
Resilient Flooring Products
Surface Preparation
Coating
Manufacturer’s Technical Data Sheets
Color
Applicator’s Qualifications
Toilet Partition System
Colors and Finishes
Finishes
Accessory Items
Fire Extinguishers
Accessories
Wall Brackets
Replacement Parts
Manufacturer’s Qualifications
Detail Drawings
Manufacturer’s color charts and chips
Installation of Roof and Wall Panels
Shipping, Handling, and Storage
Manufacturer’s Warranty
Contractor’s Warranty for Installation
P/N 05-C05124
Page 47 of 367
22 00 00 2.4
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.8
2.5
2.6.2
23 05 93 1.4.1
23 07 00 2.3
3.3
23 31 13 1.3
1.3
3.3.3
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.2.1
2.2.4
2.2.6
2.2.9
2.2.11
2.2.10
3.4.1
23 37 13 2.1
2.1
2.1
3.1
23 82 02 1.3
1.5
3.1
2.5.1.1
3.5
3.4
2.1.1
26 20 00 2.10
2.9
2.8
3.4.2
3.4.3
1.4.1
Fixtures
Flush valve water closets
Flush valve urinals
Wall hung lavatories
Service sinks
Drinking-water coolers
Plastic shower units
Water heaters
Backflow preventers
Shower Faucets
Independent TAB Agency and personnel
qualifications
Pipe Insulation Systems
Duct Insulation Systems
Material, Equipment and Fixture List
Records of Existing Conditions
Duct Supports
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting
Materials
Round sheet metal duct fittings
Turning Vanes
Flexible Connectors
Flexible Duct Materials
Power Operated Dampers
Manual Volume Dampers
Ductwork Leakage Tests
Materials, Equipment and Fixture List
Records of Existing Conditions
Fabrication Drawings
Installation Drawings
Drawings
Spare Parts
Verification of Dimensions
Coil Corrosion Protection
System Performance Tests
Refrigerant Tests, Charging and Start-Up
Materials and Equipment
Panelboards
Receptacles
Switches
600-volt wiring test
Grounding System Test
Electrical Systems
P/N 05-C05124
Page 48 of 367
26 51 00 2.1
1.4.1
2.1.2
2.2
28 31 63
31 11 00
31 23 00
31 31 16
32 92 19
33 11 00
33 30 00
33 32 16
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.6
2.7
1.4.3.2
2.2.9
2.2.14
2.2.13
2.2.4
2.2.11
2.2.14.1
1.4.3
3.4.1
3.12.2.1
3.12.2.2
3.12.2.3
3.12.2.4
2.1
3.1
3.4.1
1.5
1.2.1
2.5.3
2.4
2.1
2.1.1
2.1
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
1.6
1.5
2.1
2.3
2.1
2.2.2
2.2.1
2.3
2.4
2.1.5
Fluorescent lighting fixtures
Fluorescent electronic ballasts
Fluorescent lamps
High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting
fixtures
HID Ballasts
Metal-halide lamps
Photocell switch
Exit signs
Energy Efficiency
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
Transmitters
Notification Appliances
Addressable interface devices
Graphic Annunciator
Radio transmitter and interface panels
Record Drawing Software
Nonsaleable Materials
Fill and backfill
Select material
Porous Fill
Density tests
Termiticides
Verification of measurement
Application Equipment
Warranty
Qualifications
Wood cellulose fiber mulch
Fertilizer
Seed
Piping materials
Water service line
Valve boxes
Disinfection
Existing Conditions
Drawings
Pipeline Materials
Reports
Pipe and Fittings
Check Valves
Gate Valves
Submersible sewage grinder pumps
Pump motor
Flexible flanged coupling
P/N 05-C05124
Page 49 of 367
CONTRACT ITEM ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
Contract Number: HSCG83Contract Specialist:
Contractor Name:
URGENT
YES
NO
Submittal #_____________________
HSCG83Project Number:
(if yes) CONTRACTOR FAX #: _______________________
Job Location: ___________________________________
NOTE: Contractor must mark Deviation column if submittal deviates from contract requirements
Item
No.
Spec Section
Description of Material
and Paragraph Include Type, Model #,
Manufacturer, Etc.
Deviation
Status
STATUS ABBREVIATION GUIDE:
AC - Accepted
AC w/ CMT - Accepted with Comment
R-Resubmit
Comments:
Typed Name & Title
Signature
Date
NOTE: Review and acceptance of submittals by the Government is intended to verify general conformance with the design intent as
shown on the contract drawings and in the specifications. Acceptance by the Contracting Officer Technical Representative does not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any errors and/or omissions in the submittals, nor from the responsibility for complying with
the requirements of the contract, except with respect to variations described and approved in accordance with FAR 52.243-4
CHANGES.
P/N 05-C05124
Page 50 of 367
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not begin demolition or until “Notice to Proceed” authorization is received from the
Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the project site; do not allow
accumulations inside or outside the buildings. In the interest of occupational safety and health,
perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable
Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Existing Conditions; G
SD-07 Certificates
Demolition Plan; G
Notifications; G
Proposed demolition and removal procedures for approval before work is started.
1.3 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in
ASSE/SAFE A10.6.
1.3.1 Notifications
1.3.1.1 General Requirements
Furnish timely notification of demolition projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities
in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the State's environmental protection agency
and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in
accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 51 of 367
1.4 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building and avoid the creation
of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or
objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution. Vacuum and dust
the work area daily. Sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris that
may result in foreign object damage potential to aircraft.
1.5 PROTECTION
1.5.1 Traffic Control Signs
Where pedestrian and driver safety is endangered in the area of removal work, use traffic
barricades with flashing lights. Notify the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative prior
to beginning such work.
1.5.2 Existing Conditions Documentation
Before beginning any demolition work, survey the site and examine the drawings and
specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of
the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative showing the condition of structures and other
facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable
as a record of existing conditions. Existing damage and description of surface conditions that
exist prior to before starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all
required outages which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages on
the record document.
1.5.3 Items to Remain in Place
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or
to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Coordinate the work of this section with all
other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure
that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as
may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work
performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and
reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition, or removal work. Repairs,
reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative prior to performing such work.
1.5.4 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of
new construction. Provide temporary shoring and bracing for support of building components to
prevent settlement or other movement. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and
migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 52 of 367
1.5.5 Weather Protection
Protect building interior and materials and equipment from the weather at all times.
1.5.6 Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during
demolition operations. Prior to start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal
will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor upon written
request from the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
1.5.7 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and
pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed
areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors,
roofs, walls, columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and
constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined to be in stable
condition, must remain standing without additional bracing, shoring, or lateral support until
demolished or deconstructed, unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and
place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any
cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract.
1.5.8 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work the Contractor shall continuously evaluate the
condition of the structure being demolished and take immediate action to protect all personnel
working in and around the project site. No area, section, or component of floors, roofs, walls,
columns, pilasters, or other structural element will be allowed to be left standing without
sufficient bracing, shoring, or lateral support to prevent collapse or failure while workmen
remove debris or perform other work in the immediate area.
1.6 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted.
1.7 REQUIRED DATA
Prepare a Demolition Plan. Include in the plan procedures for careful removal and disposition of
materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection
schedule of utility services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each
operation and of the sequence of operations. Coordinate with Waste Management Plan. Include
statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof system and its suitability to
perform as a safe working platform or if inspection reveals a safety hazard to workers, state
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 53 of 367
provisions for securing the safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work.
Provide procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Plan shall be
approved by Contracting Officer prior to work beginning.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified.
1.9 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Use of explosives will not be permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Inspect and evaluate existing structures on site for reuse. Existing construction scheduled to be
removed for reuse shall be disassembled. Dismantled and removed materials are to be separated,
set aside, and prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for reuse,
remanufacture, recycling, or other disposal, as specified. Materials shall be designated for reuse
on site whenever possible.
3.1.1 Utilities and Related Equipment
3.1.1.1 General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in
writing by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Do not interrupt existing utilities
serving facilities occupied and used by the Government except when approved in writing and
then only after temporary utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin
demolition or deconstruction work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and
cap utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.1.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized
code covering the specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative. When utility lines are encountered that are not indicated on the drawings, the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative shall be notified prior to further work in that area.
3.1.2 Concrete
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 54 of 367
Saw concrete along straight lines to a depth of a minimum 2 inch. Break out the remainder of
the concrete provided that the broken area is concealed in the finished work, and the remaining
concrete is sound. At locations where the broken face cannot be concealed, grind smooth or saw
cut entirely through the concrete.
3.1.3 Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and
repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces, using on-site
materials when available. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform
removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work.
Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall
match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to texture and finish. Patching shall
be as specified and indicated, and shall include:
a. Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, left as a result of
removals in existing masonry walls to remain, with an approved masonry patching
material, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.2.1 Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials or equipment scheduled
for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and not reused or salvaged, shall become the
property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials
resulting from demolition, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the
Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition, and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition. The Government
will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.
3.3 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish from the site. Remove and transport the in a manner that prevents
spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
3.4.1 Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other non-salvageable materials resulting from removal
operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations. Storage of removed materials
on the project site is prohibited.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 55 of 367
3.4.2 Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished structures, from Government property for
legal disposal.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 02 41 00 Page 56 of 367
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
01/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
a. "Cementitious material" as used herein must include all portland cement, pozzolan, fly
ash and ground granulated blast-furnace.
b. "Exposed to public view" means situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a
public location after completion of the building. A public location is accessible to
persons not responsible for operation or maintenance of the building.
c. "Chemical admixtures" are materials in the form of powder or fluids that are added to
the concrete to give it certain characteristics not obtainable with plain concrete mixes.
d. "Workability (or consistence)" is the ability of a fresh (plastic) concrete mix to fill the
form/mould properly with the desired work (vibration) and without reducing the
concrete's quality. Workability depends on water content, chemical admixtures,
aggregate (shape and size distribution), cementitious content and age (level of
hydration).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Reinforcing steel; G
Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable.
Provide erection drawings for concrete Formwork that show placement of
reinforcement and accessories, with reference to the contract drawings.
SD-03 Product Data
Materials for curing concrete
Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items must include printed instructions
for admixtures and waterstops.
Cement
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 57 of 367
Portland cement
Ready-Mix Concrete
Vapor Barrier
Concrete Curing Materials
Reinforcement
Reinforcement Materials
SD-04 Samples
Submit the following samples:
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete mix design; G
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for each
strength and type of concrete. Submit a complete list of materials including type;
brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, pozzolans, ground slag and admixtures;
and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix proportion data using at least
three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which produce a range of
strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required. If
source material changes, resubmit mix proportion data using revised source material.
Provide only materials that have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the
requirements of this specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Contracting Officer. Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix design is used
when more than one mix design is submitted. Submit additional data regarding
concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate changes. Submit copies of the fly ash,
and pozzolans test results, in addition. The approval of fly ash, and pozzolans test
results must be within 6 months of submittal date. Obtain acknowledgement of receipt
prior to concrete placement.
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete mix design; G
Compressive strength tests
Air Content
SD-07 Certificates
Biodegradable Form Release Agent
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 58 of 367
Submit mill certificates for Steel Bar according to the paragraph entitled,
"Fabrication," of this section.
Provide certificates for concrete that are in accordance with the paragraph entitled,
"Classification and Quality of Concrete," of this section. Provide certificates that
contain project name and number, date, name of Contractor, name of concrete testing
service, source of concrete aggregates, material manufacturer, brand name of
manufactured materials, material name, values as specified for each material, and test
results.
1.3 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the
advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory. Interpret reference to the "Building
Official," the "Structural Engineer," and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver concrete until vapor barrier, forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer
strips are in place and ready for concrete placement. ACI/MCP-2 for job site storage of
materials. Protect materials from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure materials
can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed. Do not store concrete
curing compounds or sealers with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic
compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store concrete curing compounds or sealers in occupied
spaces.
1.4.1 Reinforcement
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the
ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt.
Ensure bar sizes can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Drawings
1.5.1.1 Shop Drawings
Fabrication Drawings for concrete formwork for Reinforcement Materials, must indicate
concrete pressure calculations with both live and dead loads, along with material types. Provide
all design calculations in accordance with ACI/MCP-2 and ACI/MCP-3.
1.5.1.2 Reinforcing Steel
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 59 of 367
ACI/MCP-4. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps of bars, shapes,
dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing, accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale
dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars.
1.5.2 Test Reports
1.5.2.1 Concrete Mix Design
Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to
produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix must be suitable for the job
conditions. Include mill test and all other test for cement, aggregates, and admixtures in the
laboratory test reports. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation analysis, percentage
retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Submit test
reports along with the concrete mix design. Obtain approval before concrete placement.
1.6 CONCRETE SAMPLING AND TESTING
Testing by the Contractor must include sampling and testing concrete materials proposed for use
in the work and testing the design mix for each class of concrete. Perform quality control testing
during construction.
Sample and test concrete aggregate materials proposed for use in the work in accordance with
ASTM C 33/C 33M.
Sample and test portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150.
Sample and test air-entraining admixtures in accordance with ASTM C 233.
Testing must be performed by a Grade I Testing Technician.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS
Provide wood, plywood, or steel. Use plywood or steel forms where a smooth form finish is
required.
2.1.1 Wood Forms
Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes,
or other surface defects. Provide plywood that complies with PS1, B-B concrete form panels or
better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining.
2.1.1.1 Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, concrete form, not less than 5/8-inch thick.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 60 of 367
2.1.2 Steel Forms
Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents, or sags.
2.2 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
The use of wire alone is prohibited. Provide form ties and accessories that do not reduce the
effective cover of the reinforcement.
2.3 CONCRETE
2.3.1 Contractor-Furnished Mix Design
ACI/MCP-1, ACI/MCP-2, and ACI/MCP-3 except as otherwise specified. Indicate the
compressive strength (f'c) of the concrete for each portion of the structure(s) and as specified
below.
f'c
ASTM C 33/C 33M
(Min. 28Maximum
Day Comp. Nominal
Strength)
Aggregate
Location (psi)
(Size No.)
All areas
3500
1 1/2
Maximum
Range
of
Slump
(inches)
WaterCement
Ratio
(by weight)
Air
Entr.
(percent)
3-4
0.48
5
Maximum slump shown above may be increased 1 inch for methods of consolidation other than
vibration. Slump may be increased to 8 inches when super plasticizers are used. Provide air
entrainment using air-entraining admixture. Provide air entrainment within plus or minus 1.5
percent of the value specified.
2.3.1.1 Mix Proportions for Normal Weight Concrete
Trial design batches, mixture proportioning studies, and testing requirements for various classes
and types of concrete specified are the responsibility of the Contractor. Base mixture
proportions on compressive strength as determined by test specimens fabricated in accordance
with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M. Samples of all
materials used in mixture proportioning studies must be representative of those proposed for use
in the project and must be accompanied by the manufacturer's or producer's test report indicating
compliance with these specifications. Base trial mixtures having proportions, consistencies, and
air content suitable for the work on methodology described in ACI/MCP-1. In the trial mixture,
use at least three different water-cement ratios for each type of mixture, which must produce a
range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required on
the project. The maximum water-cement ratio required must be based on equivalent watercement ratio calculations as determined by the conversion from the weight ratio of water to
cement plus pozzolan, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag by weight equivalency method.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 61 of 367
Design laboratory trial mixture for maximum permitted slump and air content. Each
combination of material proposed for use must have separate trial mixture, except for accelerator
or retarder use can be provided without separate trial mixture. Report the temperature of
concrete in each trial batch. For each water-cement ratio, at least three test cylinders for each
test age must be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 192/C 192M and tested in
accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M for 7 and 28 days. From these results, plot a curve showing
the relationship between water-cement ratio and strength for each set of trial mix studies. In
addition, plot a curve showing the relationship between 7 and 28 day strengths.
2.3.1.2 Required Average Strength of Mix Design
The selected mixture must produce an average compressive strength exceeding the specified
strength by the amount indicated in ACI/MCP-2. When a concrete production facility has a
record of at least 15 consecutive tests, the standard deviation must be calculated and the required
average compressive strength must be determined in accordance with ACI/MCP-2. When a
concrete production facility does not have a suitable record of tests to establish a standard
deviation, the required average strength must follow ACI/MCP-2 requirements.
2.3.2 Ready-Mix Concrete
Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C 94/C 94M.
Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets with each load of
concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the following information in addition to that
required by ASTM C 94/C 94M:
Type and brand cement
Cement content in 95-pound bags per cubic yard of concrete
Maximum size of aggregate
Amount and brand name of admixtures
Total water content expressed by water/cement ratio
2.3.3 Concrete Curing Materials
2.3.3.1 Absorptive Cover
Provide burlap cloth cover for curing concrete made from jute or kenaf, weighing 10 ounces plus
or minus 5 percent per square yard when clean and dry, conforming to ASTM C 171, Class 3; or
cover may be cotton mats as approved.
2.3.3.2 Moisture-Retaining Cover
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 62 of 367
Provide waterproof paper cover for curing concrete conforming to ASTM C 171, regular or
white, or polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM C 171, or polyethylene-coated burlap
consisting of a laminate of burlap and a white opaque polyethylene film permanently bonded to
the burlap; burlap must conform to ASTM C 171, Class 3, and polyethylene film must conform
to ASTM C 171. When tested for water retention in accordance with ASTM C 156, weight of
water lost 72 hours after application of moisture retaining covering material must not exceed
0.039 gram per square centimeter of the mortar specimen surface.
2.3.3.3 Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
Provide liquid type compound conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear, Type 1D with fugitive
dye for interior work and Type 2, white, pigmented for exterior work.
2.4 MATERIALS
2.4.1 Cement
ASTM C 150, Type I or II. Provide blended cement that consists of a mixture of ASTM C 150,
Type II, cement and one of the following materials: ASTM C 618 pozzolan or fly ash. For
exposed concrete, use one manufacturer for each type of cement, fly ash, and pozzolan.
2.4.1.1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C 618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must be 6
percent for Types N and F. Add with cement. Where the use of fly ash cannot meet the
minimum level, provide the maximum amount of fly ash permittable that meets the code
requirements for cement content. Report the chemical analysis of the fly ash in accordance with
ASTM C 311. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D 5759.
High contents of supplementary cementitious materials can have some detrimental effects on the
concrete properties, such as slowing excessively the strength gain rate, and delaying and
increasing the difficulty of finishing. The recommended maximum content (by weight of the
total cementitious material) for these materials are:
1. For fly ash or natural pozzolan: 40 percent (25 percent in cold climates)
2. For silica fume: 10 percent
2.4.1.2 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
ASTM C 989, Grade 120. Slag content must be a minimum of 70 percent by weight of
cementitious material.
2.4.1.3 Portland Cement
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 63 of 367
Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C 150, Type I, or II. Use one brand and type of cement
for formed concrete having exposed-to-view finished surfaces.
2.4.2 Water
Minimize the amount of water in the mix. The amount of water must not exceed 45 percent by
weight of cementitious materials (cement + pozzolans), and in general, improve workability by
adjusting the grading rather than by adding water. Water must be fresh, clean, and potable; free
from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances
deleterious to concrete.
2.4.3 Aggregates
ASTM C 33/C 33M. Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be
deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement.
Fine and coarse aggregates must show expansions less than 0.08 percent at 16 days after casting
when testing in accordance with ASTM C 1260. Should the test data indicate an expansion of
0.08 percent or greater, reject the aggregate(s) or perform additional testing using ASTM C 1567
using the Contractor's proposed mix design. In this case, include the mix design low alkali
portland cement and one of the following supplementary cementitious materials:
1. GGBF slag at a minimum of 40 percent of total cementitious
2. Fly ash or natural pozzolan at a minimum of total cementitious of
a. 30 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 65 percent or more,
b. 25 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 70 percent or more,
c. 20 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 80 percent or more,
d. 15 percent if (SiO2+Al2O3+Fe2O3) is 90 percent or more.
If a combination of these materials is chosen, the minimum amount must be a linear combination
of the minimum amounts above. Include these materials in sufficient proportion to show less
than 0.08 percent expansion at 16 days after casting when tested in accordance with ASTM C
1567.
Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to have specific
unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C 295.
2.4.3.1 Aggregates/Combined Aggregate Gradation (Floor Slabs Only)
ASTM C 33/C 33M, uniformly graded and as follows: Nominal maximum aggregate size of 1
inch. A combined sieve analysis must indicate a well graded aggregate from coarsest to finest
with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except
that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3mm) sieve, and less
than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3mm). Provide sand that is at least
50 percent natural sand.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 64 of 367
2.4.4 Nonshrink Grout
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
2.4.5 Admixtures
ASTM C 494/C 494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type
D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do
not use calcium chloride admixtures.
2.4.5.1 Air-Entraining
ASTM C 260.
2.4.5.2 High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F and ASTM C 1017/C 1017M.
2.4.5.3 Pozzolan
Provide fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures that conform to ASTM C 618.
2.4.6 Vapor Barrier
Provide vapor barrier as specified on the drawings.
2.4.7 Materials for Curing Concrete
Use water-based curing compounds, sealers, and coatings with low (maximum 160 grams/liter,
less water and less exempt compounds) VOC content.
Consider the use of water based or vegetable or soy based curing agents in lieu of petroleum
based products. Consider agents that are not toxic and emit low or no Volatile Organic
Compounds (VOC). Consider the use of admixtures that offer high performance to increase
durability of the finish product but also have low toxicity and are made from bio-based materials
such as soy, and emit low levels of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).
2.4.7.1 Impervious Sheeting
ASTM C 171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated
burlap.
2.4.7.2 Pervious Sheeting
AASHTO M 182.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 65 of 367
2.4.7.3 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
ASTM C 309, white-pigmented, Type 2, Class B.
2.4.8 Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Compound
Provide magnesium fluorosilicate compound which when mixed with water seals and hardens
the surface of the concrete. Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing conditions. Provide
compound that does not reduce the adhesion of resilient flooring, tile, paint, roofing,
waterproofing, or other material applied to concrete.
2.4.9 Joint Sealants
2.4.9.1 Horizontal Surfaces, 3 Percent Slope, Maximum
ASTM D 1190 or ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Use T. ASTM D 7116 for surfaces
subjected to jet fuel.
2.4.9.2 Waterstops
Provide hydrophyllic waterstops.
2.4.10 Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Provide form release agent that is colorless, biodegradable, and rapeseed oil-based or soy oilbased, with a low (maximum of 55 grams/liter (g/l)) VOC content. A minimum of 85 percent of
the total product must be biobased material. Provide product that does not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces. Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based
lubricating oils, waxes, or kerosene.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
Galvanize bars, fabrics, connectors, and chairs.
2.5.1 Reinforcing Bars
ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel. ASTM A 615/A 615M and
AASHTO M 322M/M 322 with the bars marked A, S, W, Grade 60; or ASTM A 996/A 996M
with the bars marked R, Grade 60, or marked A, Grade 60.
2.5.2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors
ACI/MCP-2. Provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 66 of 367
2.5.3 Wire
ASTM A 82/A 82M or ASTM A 496/A 496M.
2.5.3.1 Welded Wire Fabric
ASTM A 185/A 185M or ASTM A 497/A 497M. Wire fabric may contain post-consumer or
post-industrial recycled content. Provide flat sheets of welded wire fabric for slabs and toppings.
2.5.3.2 Steel Wire
Wire must conform to ASTM A 82/A 82M.
2.5.4 Reinforcing Bar Supports
Provide bar ties and supports of coated or non corrodible material.
2.5.5 Chairs and Bolsters: Steel
Plastic and steel may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content.
2.5.6 Supports for Reinforcement
Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for proper spacing,
supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and wire fabric in place.
Provide wire bar type supports conforming to ACI/MCP-3 and CRSI 10MSP.
Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or plastic coated after
fabrication, or stainless-steel bar supports.
2.6 CLASSIFICATION AND QUALITY OF CONCRETE
2.6.1 Concrete Classes and Usage
Provide concrete classes, compressive strength, requirements for air entrainment, and usage as
follows:
CONCRETE
CLASS
3A
MIN. 28-DAY
COMPRESSIVE
STRENGTH
POUNDS PER
SQ. IN.
3,500
REQUIREMENT
FOR AIR
ENTRAINMENT
Airentrained
USAGE
For foundation concrete
work exposed to freez-
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 67 of 367
ing and thawing or
subjected to hydraulic pressure, such
as foundation walls,
grade beams, pits,
tunnels. For exterior
concrete slabs, such as
steps, platforms, walks
2.6.2 Limits for Concrete Proportions
Provide limits for maximum water/cement ratio and minimum cement content for each concrete
class as follows:
CONCRETE MAX. WATER/CEMENT RATIO
CLASS
BY WEIGHT
3A
MIN. CEMENT FOR 3- TO
4-INCH SLUMP, (NO. OF 94POUND SACKS) PER CU. YD.
0.48
5.25
* Weight of water to weight of cement in pounds in one cubic yard of concrete
2.6.3 Maximum Size of Aggregate
Size of aggregate, designated by the sieve size on which maximum amount of retained coarse
aggregate is 5 to 10 percent by weight, must be as follows:
MAXIMUM
SIZE OF
AGGREGATE
1-1/2 inches
3/4 inch
ASTM C 33/C 33M
SIZE
NUMBER
467
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION
Monolithic slabs on ground,
concrete fill, and other flatwork having a depth of not less
than 5 inches and a clear
distance between reinforcing
bars of not less than 2 inches
Elevated Decks
Maximum size of aggregate may be that required for most critical type of construction using that
concrete class.
Specify gradation of aggregates for separate floor topping.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 68 of 367
2.6.4 Slump
Provide slump for concrete at time and in location of placement as follows:
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION
SLUMP
Footings, unreinforced
walls
Not less than 1 inch nor more
than 3 inches
Footings or Slabs
Not less than 1 inch nor more
than 4 inches
2.6.5 Total Air Content
Air content of exposed concrete and interior concrete must be in accordance with ASTM C 260
and/or as follows:
LIMITS
CONCRETE
EXPOSURE
REQUIREMENT
FOR AIR
ENTRAINMENT
Exposed to
freezing
and thawing
or subjected
to hydraulic
pressure
Airentrained
MAXIMUM SIZE
OF AGGREGATE
1-1/2 or
TOTAL AIR CONTENT
BY VOLUME
4 to 6 percent
5 to 7 percent
6 to 8.5 percent
Provide concrete exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to hydraulic pressure that is airentrained by addition of approved air-entraining admixture to concrete mix.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed; verify that substrates
are plumb and true.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Contracting Officer’s
Technical Representative of unsatisfactory preparation before processing.
Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design
dimensions for proper installation, notify Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative and
wait for instructions before beginning installation.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 69 of 367
3.2 PREPARATION
Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess concrete.
Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before the concrete is poured.
3.2.1 General
Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris, loose material, standing
water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances before start of concrete placing.
Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete. Divert flow of water
through side drains provided for such purpose.
3.2.2 Subgrade Under Foundations and Footings
When subgrade material is semiporous and dry, sprinkle subgrade surface with water as required
to eliminate suction at the time concrete is deposited. When subgrade material is porous, seal
subgrade surface by covering surface with specified water barrier subgrade cover; this may also
be used over semiporous, dry subgrade material instead of water sprinkling.
3.2.3 Subgrade Under Slabs on Ground
Before construction of slabs on ground, have underground work on pipes and conduits completed
and approved.
Previously constructed subgrade or fill must be cleaned of foreign materials and inspected by the
Contractor for adequate compaction and surface tolerances as specified.
Actual density of top 12 inches of subgrade soil material-in-place must not be less than the
following percentages of maximum density of same soil material compacted at optimum
moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
SOIL MATERIAL
PERCENT MAXIMUM DENSITY
Drainage fill
100
Cohesionless soil material
100
Cohesive soil material
95
Finish surface of drainage fill under interior slabs on ground must not show deviation in excess
of 1/4 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge parallel with and at right angles to building
lines.
Finished surface of subgrade or fill under exterior slabs on ground must not be more than 0.02foot above or 0.10-foot below elevation indicated.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 70 of 367
Cover drainage fill surface under interior slabs on ground with specified water-vapor barrier
subgrade cover immediately prior to placing reinforcement. Install subgrade cover to avoid
puncture or tear. Patch punctures or tears over 12 inches with separate sheets lapped not less
than 12 inches. Seal all punctures or tears less than 12 inches with pressure-sensitive vapor
barrier tape not less than 2-inches wide. Seal lapped joints with vapor barrier adhesive or
pressure-sensitive vapor barrier tape not less than 2-inches wide. Lay subgrade cover sheets with
not less than a 6-inch lap at edges and ends and in direction in which concrete is to be placed.
Prepare subgrade or fill surface under exterior slabs on ground as specified for subgrade under
foundations and footings.
3.2.4 Formwork
Complete and approve formwork. Remove debris and foreign material from interior of forms
before start of concrete placing.
3.2.5 Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs
Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain indicated
elevations and contours in finished slab surface and must be strong enough to support vibrating
bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if nature of specified slab finish requires use of such
equipment. Align concrete surface to elevation of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or
approved compacting-type screeds.
3.2.6 Reinforcement and Other Embedded Items
Secure reinforcement, joint materials, and other embedded materials in position, inspected, and
approved before start of concrete placing.
3.3 FORMS
ACI/MCP-2. Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete placement. Set forms mortartight and true to line and grade. Chamfer above grade exposed joints, edges, and external
corners of concrete 0.75 inch unless otherwise indicated. Provide formwork with clean-out
openings to permit inspection and removal of debris. Forms submerged in water must be
watertight.
3.3.1 General
Construct forms to conform, within the tolerances specified, to shapes dimensions, lines,
elevations, and positions of cast-in-place concrete members as indicated. Forms must be
supported, braced, and maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load.
3.3.2 Design and Construction of Formwork
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 71 of 367
Provide forms that are tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placing.
Support form facing materials by structural members spaced close to prevent deflection of form
facing material. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate
alignment to ensure a smooth completed surface within the tolerances specified. Where
necessary to maintain the tolerances specified, such as long spans where immediate supports are
not possible, camber formwork for anticipated deflections in formwork due to weight and
pressure of fresh concrete and to construction loads.
Chamfer exposed joints, edges, and external corners a minimum of 3/4 inch by moldings placed
in corners of column, beam, and wall forms.
Provide forms that are readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to concrete.
3.3.3 Coating
Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a nonstaining mineral oil,
nonstaining form coating compound, or two coats of nitrocellulose lacquer. Do not use mineral
oil on forms for surfaces to which adhesive, paint, or other finish material is to be applied.
3.3.4 Reshoring
Reshore concrete elements where forms are removed prior to the specified time period. Do not
permit elements to deflect or accept loads during form stripping or reshoring. Forms on
columns, walls, or other load-bearing members may be stripped after 2 days if loads are not
applied to the members. After forms are removed, reshore slabs and beams over 10 feet in span
and cantilevers over 4 feet for the remainder of the specified time period in accordance with
paragraph entitled "Removal of Forms." Perform reshoring operations to prevent subjecting
concrete members to overloads, eccentric loading, or reverse bending. Provide reshoring
elements with the same load-carrying capabilities as original shoring and spaced similar to
original shoring. Firmly secure and brace reshoring elements to provide solid bearing and
support.
3.3.5 Reuse
Reuse forms providing the structural integrity of concrete and the aesthetics of exposed concrete
are not compromised.
3.3.6 Forms for Standard Rough Form Finish
Give rough form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be concealed by other construction,
unless otherwise specified.
Form facing material for standard rough form finish must be the specified concrete form
plywood or other approved form facing material that produces concrete surfaces equivalent in
smoothness and appearance to that produced by new concrete form plywood panels.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 72 of 367
For concrete surfaces exposed only to the ground, undressed, square-edge, 1-inch nominal
thickness lumber may be used. Provide horizontal joints that are level and vertical joints that are
plumb.
3.3.7 Forms for Standard Smooth Form Finish
Give smooth form finish concrete formed surfaces that are to be exposed to view or that are to be
covered with coating material applied directly to concrete or with covering material bonded to
concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar coating system.
Form facing material for standard smooth finish must be the specified overlaid concrete form
plywood or other approved form facing material that is nonreactive with concrete and that
produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and appearance to that produced by new
overlaid concrete form plywood panels.
Maximum deflection of form facing material between supports and maximum deflection of form
supports such as studs and wales must not exceed 0.0025 times the span.
Provide arrangement of form facing sheets that are orderly and symmetrical, and sheets that are
in sizes as large as practical.
Arrange panels to make a symmetrical pattern of joints. Horizontal and vertical joints must be
solidly backed and butted tight to prevent leakage and fins.
3.3.8 Form Ties
Provide ties that are factory fabricated metal, adjustable in length, removable or snap-off type
that do allow form deflection or do not spall concrete upon removal. Portion of form ties
remaining within concrete after removal of exterior parts must be at least 1-1/2 inches back from
concrete surface. Provide form ties that are free of devices that leave a hole larger than 7/8 inch
or less than 1/2 inch in diameter in concrete surface. Form ties fabricated at the project site or
wire ties of any type are not acceptable.
3.3.9 Tolerances for Form Construction
Construct formwork to ensure that after removal of forms and prior to patching and finishing of
formed surfaces; provide concrete surfaces in accordance with tolerances specified in ACI/MCP1 and ACI/MCP-2.
3.4 FORMED SURFACES
3.4.1 Preparation of Form Surfaces
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed.
Provide a commercial formulation form-coating compound that does not bond with, stain, nor
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 73 of 367
adversely affect concrete surfaces and impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces that
entails bonding or adhesion nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing
compounds. Do not allow excess form-coating compound to stand in puddles in the forms nor to
come in contact with concrete against which fresh concrete is placed. Make thinning of formcoating compound with thinning agent of the type, in the amount, and under the conditions
recommended by form-coating compound manufacturer's printed or written directions.
3.4.2 Tolerances
ACI/MCP-4 and as indicated.
3.4.3 As-Cast Form
Provide form facing material producing a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete.
Arrange facing material in an orderly and symmetrical manner and keep seams to a practical
minimum. Support forms as necessary to meet required tolerances. Do not use material with
raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which can impair the
texture of the concrete surface.
3.5 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
ACI/MCP-2. Provide bars, wire fabric, wire ties, supports, and other devices necessary to install
and secure reinforcement. Reinforcement must not have rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign
substances that would reduce the bond. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the
effective cross-sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced. Remove
loose rust prior to placing steel. Tack welding is prohibited.
3.5.1 General
Provide details of reinforcement that are in accordance with, and ACI/MCP-4 and as specified.
3.5.2 Vapor Barrier
Provide beneath the on-grade concrete floor slab. Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable
to eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and tape or cement
joints. Remove torn, punctured, or damaged vapor barrier material and provide with new vapor
barrier prior to placing concrete. Concrete placement must not damage vapor barrier material.
3.5.3 Reinforcement Supports
Place reinforcement and secure with galvanized or non corrodible chairs, spacers, or metal
hangers. For supporting reinforcement on the ground, use concrete or other non corrodible
material, having a compressive strength equal to or greater than the concrete being placed.
3.5.4 Splicing
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 74 of 367
Per ACI/MCP-2. Do not splice at points of maximum stress. Overlap welded wire fabric the
spacing of the cross wires, plus 2 inches.
3.5.5 Cover
ACI/MCP-2 for minimum coverage, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5.6 Setting Miscellaneous Material
Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position
before concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily
fill voids in sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
3.5.7 Construction Joints
Locate joints to least impair strength. Continue reinforcement across joints unless otherwise
indicated.
3.5.8 Fabrication
Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to shapes and dimensions indicated for reinforcement,
and as follows:
Provide fabrication tolerances that are in accordance with ACI/MCP-1, ACI/MCP-2 and
ACI/MCP-3.
Provide hooks and bends that are in accordance with and ACI/MCP-3.
Reinforcement must be bent cold to shapes as indicated. Bending must be done in the shop.
Rebending of a reinforcing bar that has been bent incorrectly is not be permitted. Bending must
be in accordance with standard approved practice and by approved machine methods.
Tolerance on nominally square-cut, reinforcing bar ends must be in accordance with ACI/MCP3.
Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged, and marked. Tags must be metal with bar size, length,
mark, and other information pressed in by machine. Marks must correspond with those used on
the placing drawings.
Do not use reinforcement that has any of the following defects:
a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends beyond specified fabrication tolerances
b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or approved shop drawings
c. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 75 of 367
Replace defective reinforcement with new reinforcement having required shape, form, and crosssection area.
3.5.9 Placing Reinforcement
Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI/MCP-4.
For slabs on grade (over earth or over capillary water barrier) and for footing reinforcement,
support bars on precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement, to
keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of slab or footing.
Contractor must cooperate with other trades in setting of anchor bolts, inserts, and other
embedded items. Where conflicts occur between locating reinforcing and embedded items, the
Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative so that conflicts may
be reconciled before placing concrete. Anchors and embedded items must be positioned and
supported with appropriate accessories.
Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent displacement by
construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as follows:
Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and sufficiently
heavy to carry the reinforcement they support, and in accordance with ACI/MCP-4
and CRSI 10MSP. Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying
equipment and similar construction loads.
Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be black, soft iron wire,
not less than 16 gage.
With the exception of temperature reinforcement, tied to main steel approximately 24
inches on center, reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at intersections
with 18-gage annealed wire, and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers,
chairs, or other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form. Unless
otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports must conform to ACI/MCP-3.
Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted only as specified in
and ACI/MCP-4.
3.5.10 Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in accordance with the
ACI/MCP-3.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or with
conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 76 of 367
one bar diameter or specified placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is
subject to approval.
3.5.11 Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI/MCP-4, ASTM E 648, and ACI/MCP3.
3.5.12 Welding
Welding must be in accordance with AWS D1.4/D1.4M.
3.6 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and ACI/MCP-2, except as modified herein. Batching equipment must be
such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1
percent for cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish
mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
3.6.1 Measuring
Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled "Sampling" and "Testing."
3.6.2 Mixing
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ACI/MCP-2. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes
after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either
addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air
temperature is less than 84 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes
if the air temperature is greater than 84 degrees F except as follows: if set retarding admixture is
used and slump requirements can be met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes.
Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum slump and watercement ratio are not exceeded. When additional water is added, an additional 30 revolutions of
the mixer at mixing speed is required. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit,
add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified
limits. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the
admixture throughout the batch.
3.6.3 Transporting
Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable. Prevent segregation or
loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch. Do not use
aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of
as directed.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 77 of 367
3.7 PLACING CONCRETE
Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected
and approved. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and
consolidation; in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation; or in standing water. Prior to
placing concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, water, snow, and ice from within the forms.
Deposit concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the forms. Do not exceed a free
vertical drop of 3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete in one continuous operation
from one end of the structure towards the other. Position grade stakes on 10 foot centers
maximum in each direction when pouring interior slabs and on 20 foot centers maximum for
exterior slabs.
3.7.1 General Placing Requirements
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete is placed on
concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
specified. Perform concrete placing at such a rate that concrete which is being integrated with
fresh concrete is still plastic. Deposit concrete as nearly as practical in its final position to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not subject concrete to procedures which cause
segregation.
Concrete to receive other construction must be screeded to proper level to avoid excessive
skimming or grouting.
Do not use concrete which becomes nonplastic and unworkable or does not meet quality control
limits as specified or has been contaminated by foreign materials. Use of retempered concrete is
permitted. Remove rejected concrete from the site.
3.7.2 Footing Placement
Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval
by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Excavation width must be a minimum of
4 inches greater than indicated.
3.7.3 Vibration
ACI/MCP-2. Furnish a spare, working, vibrator on the job site whenever concrete is placed.
Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency mechanical
vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4
inches or less in depth by wood tampers, spading, and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge.
Operate internal vibrators with vibratory element submerged in the concrete, with a minimum
frequency of not less than 6000 impulses per minute when submerged. Do not use vibrators to
transport the concrete in the forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 20 inches apart.
Penetrate the previously placed lift with the vibrator when more than one lift is required. Place
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 78 of 367
concrete in 20 inch maximum vertical lifts. Use external vibrators on the exterior surface of the
forms when internal vibrators do not provide adequate consolidation of the concrete.
3.7.4 Pumping
ACI/MCP-2. Pumping must not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause interruptions
sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments. Loss of slump in pumping
equipment must not exceed 2 inches. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum
or aluminum alloy. Avoid rapid changes in pipe sizes. Limit maximum size of course aggregate
to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Limit maximum size of well rounded aggregate to 40
percent of the pipe diameter. Take samples for testing at both the point of delivery to the pump
and at the discharge end.
3.7.5 Cold Weather
ACI/MCP-2. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F. Obtain
approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when
concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and
provide sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the
structure while curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 37 degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F
per 24 hours after heat application.
3.7.6 Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 to prevent the
evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per
hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete
temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon
as possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard
to permit curing without damage. Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water
hauling equipment, where job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface
throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable, permeable material with
fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use of
either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets. For vertical surfaces, protect
forms from direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete is set.
3.7.7 Follow-up
Check concrete within 24 hours of placement for flatness, levelness, and other specified
tolerances. Adjust formwork and placement techniques on subsequent pours to achieve specified
tolerances.
3.7.8 Placing Concrete in Forms
Deposit concrete placed in forms in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 inches.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 79 of 367
Remove temporary spreaders in forms when concrete placing has reached elevation of spreaders.
Consolidate concrete placed in forms by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, or tamping. Design vibrators to operate with vibratory element submerged in
concrete and maintain a speed of not less than 9,000 impulses per minute when submerged in
concrete. Provide vibrating equipment adequate in number of units and power of each unit to
properly consolidate concrete. Vibration of forms and reinforcement is not permitted. Do not
use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced points not farther apart than visible effectiveness of machine. Do not insert
vibrator into lower courses of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration
of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement
and other embedded items without causing segregation of concrete mix.
Do not start placing of concrete in supporting elements until concrete previously placed in
columns and walls is no longer plastic and has been in place a minimum of 2 hours.
3.7.9 Placing Concrete Slabs
Place and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of approved
construction joints until placing of panel or section is completed.
During concrete placing operations, consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment so
that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Consolidate concrete placed in beams and girders of supported slabs and against bulkheads of
slabs on ground by mechanical vibrators as specified. Consolidate concrete in remainder of slabs
by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved method. Limit consolidation
operations to time necessary to obtain consolidation of concrete without bringing an excess of
fine aggregate to the surface. Concrete to be consolidated must be as dry as practical and
surfaces thereof must not be manipulated prior to finishing operations. Bring concrete correct
level with a straightedge and struck-off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, leaving it
free of humps or hollows. Sprinkling of water on plastic surface is not permitted.
Provide finish of slabs as specified.
3.7.10 Bonding
Surfaces of set concrete at joints, except where bonding is obtained by use of concrete bonding
agent, must be roughened and cleaned of laitance, coatings, loose particles, and foreign matter.
Roughen surfaces in a manner that exposes the aggregate uniformly and does not leave laitance,
loosened particles of aggregate, nor damaged concrete at the surface.
Obtain bonding of fresh concrete that has set as follows:
At joints between footings and walls or columns, between walls or columns and the beams
or slabs they support, and elsewhere unless otherwise specified; roughened and cleaned
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 80 of 367
surface of set concrete must be dampened, but not saturated, immediately prior to placing of
fresh concrete.
At joints in exposed-to-view work; at vertical joints in walls; at joints near midpoint of span
in girders, beams, supported slabs, other structural members; in work designed to contain
liquids; the roughened and cleaned surface of set concrete must be dampened but not
saturated and covered with a cement grout coating.
Provide cement grout that consists of equal parts of portland cement and fine aggregate by
weight with not more than 6 gallons of water per sack of cement. Apply cement grout with
a stiff broom or brush to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch. Deposit fresh concrete before
cement grout has attained its initial set.
Bonding of fresh concrete to concrete that has set may be obtained by use of a concrete
bonding agent. Apply such bonding material to cleaned concrete surface in accordance
with approved printed instructions of bonding material manufacturer.
3.8 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES
3.8.1 Defects
Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than 1 square inch surface
area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to
the surface and patch with nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are
removed. Concrete with extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement, cold
joints, entrapped debris, separated aggregate, or other defects which affect the serviceability or
structural strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of
corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete must not vary more than the
allowable tolerances of ACI/MCP-4. Exposed surfaces must be uniform in appearance and
finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified.
3.8.2 Not Against Forms (Top of Walls)
Surfaces not otherwise specified must be finished with wood floats to even surfaces. Finish must
match adjacent finishes.
3.8.3 Formed Surfaces
3.8.3.1 Tolerances
ACI/MCP-1 and as indicated.
3.8.3.2 As-Cast Rough Form
Provide for surfaces not exposed to public view. Patch these holes and defects and level abrupt
irregularities. Remove or rub off fins and other projections exceeding 0.25 inch in height.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 81 of 367
3.8.3.3 Standard Smooth Finish
Finish must be as-cast concrete surface as obtained with form facing material for standard
smooth finish. Repair and patch defective areas as specified; and all fins and remove other
projections on surface.
3.8.4 Surface Finish Samples
Provide a minimum of three sample concrete panels for each finish for each mix design, 3 by 3
feet, 3 inches thick. Use the approved concrete mix design(s). Provide sample panels on-site at
locations directed. Once approved, each set of panels must be representative of each of the
finishes specified and of the workmanship and finish(es) required. Do not remove or destroy
samples until directed by the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.
3.9 FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTRUCTION
ACI/MCP-2, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are
provided.
3.9.1 Finish
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and
elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and
supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the
surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use
dry cement to absorb bleedwater.
3.9.1.1 Steel Troweled
Use for floors intended as walking surfaces and for reception of floor coverings. First, provide a
floated finish. Next, the finish must be power troweled three times, and finally hand troweled.
The first troweling after floating needs to produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of
defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Perform additional trowelings done by
hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling is done when a ringing
sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. Thoroughly consolidate the surface
by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface must be essentially free of trowel marks
and uniform in texture and appearance. The finished surface must produce a surface level to
within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove any defects
of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering by grinding.
3.9.1.2 Broomed
Use on surfaces of exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless otherwise indicated.
Perform a floated finish, then draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to produce a coarse
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 82 of 367
scored texture. Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom
transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.
3.9.2 Flat Floor Finishes
3.9.2.1 Measurement of Floor Tolerances
Test slab within 24 hours of the final troweling. Provide tests to Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative within 12 hours after collecting the data. Floor flatness inspector is required to
provide a tolerance report which must include:
a. Key plan showing location of data collected.
b. Results required by ASTM E 1155.
3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION
ACI/MCP-2 unless otherwise specified. Begin curing immediately following form removal.
Avoid damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting, pile driving, movement of
equipment in the vicinity, disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement, and any other
activity resulting in ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain,
flowing water, frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry
out from time of placement until the expiration of the specified curing period. Do not use
membrane-forming compound on surfaces where appearance would be objectionable, on any
surface to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to the concrete, or on concrete to which
other concrete is to be bonded. If forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period,
provide another curing procedure specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period.
Provide moist curing for those areas receiving liquid chemical sealer-hardener or epoxy coating.
Allow curing compound/sealer installations to cure prior to the installation of materials that
adsorb VOCs.
3.10.1 General
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and cold or hot temperature and maintain
without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration
of cement and proper hardening of concrete.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from surface of concrete after placing
and finishing. Keep concrete moist for minimum 72 hours.
Final curing must immediately follow initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue
final curing until cumulative number of hours or fraction thereof (not necessarily consecutive)
during which temperature of air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F has totaled
168 hours. Alternatively, if tests are made of cylinders kept adjacent to the structure and cured
by the same methods, final curing may be terminated when the average compressive strength has
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 83 of 367
reached 70 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength. Prevent rapid drying at end of
final curing period.
3.10.2 Moist Curing
Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure. Prevent water run-off.
3.10.2.1 Pervious Sheeting
Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting.
Overlap sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting. Provide sheeting that is at least as long as the
width of the surface to be cured. During application, do not drag the sheeting over the finished
concrete nor over sheeting already placed. Wet sheeting thoroughly and keep continuously wet
throughout the curing period.
3.10.2.2 Impervious Sheeting
Wet the entire exposed surface of the concrete thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover
with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period. Lay sheeting directly on the concrete
surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider
than the concrete surface to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints.
Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting. Cover or wrap columns, walls, and
other vertical structural elements from the top down with impervious sheeting; overlap and
continuously tape sheeting joints; and introduce sufficient water to soak the entire surface prior
to completely enclosing.
3.10.3 Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound. Prevent curing compound
from entering the joint. Apply in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the
concrete surface. Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing
period. Do not use this method of curing where the use of Figure 2.1.5 in ACI/MCP-2 indicates
that hot weather conditions cause an evaporation rate exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square
foot per hour.
3.10.3.1 Application
Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound immediately after the surface
loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and before joints are sawed. Mechanically
agitate curing compound thoroughly during use. Use approved power-spraying equipment to
uniformly apply two coats of compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the
two coats must be 200 square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer's written instructions. The compound must form a uniform,
continuous, coherent film that does not check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an additional
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 84 of 367
coat of compound to areas where the film is defective. Re-spray concrete surfaces subjected to
rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound application.
3.10.3.2 Protection of Treated Surfaces
Prohibit pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion at least 72 hours after
compound application. Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and
immediately repair any damage.
3.10.4 Requirements for Type III, High-Early-Strength Portland Cement
The curing periods are required to be not less than one-fourth of those specified for portland
cement, but in no case less than 72 hours.
3.10.5 Curing Periods
ACI/MCP-2. Begin curing immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature
drying, excessively hot temperatures, and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss
at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and
hardening of the concrete. The materials and methods of curing are subject to approval by the
Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.
3.10.6 Curing Methods
Accomplish curing by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, by membrane curing,
and by combinations thereof, as specified.
Moist curing:
Accomplish moisture curing by any of the following methods:
Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover for curing concrete
saturated with water and keeping absorptive cover wet by water spraying or
intermittent hosing. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces
and edges with a slight overlap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-cover curing:
Accomplish moisture-retaining cover curing by covering concrete surfaces with specified
moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete. Place cover directly on concrete in widest
practical width, with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches. Weight cover to prevent
displacement; immediately repair tears or holes appearing during curing period by patching
with pressure-sensitive, waterproof tape or other approved method.
Membrane curing:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 85 of 367
Accomplish membrane curing by applying specified membrane-forming curing compound
to damp concrete surfaces as soon as moisture film has disappeared. Apply curing
compound uniformly in a two-coat operation by power-spraying equipment using a spray
nozzle equipped with a wind guard. Apply second coat in a direction at right angles to
direction of first coat. Total coverage for two coats must be not more than 200 square feet
per gallon of curing compound. Respray concrete surfaces which are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied by method and at rate
specified. Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and immediately repair
damage to coating during this period.
Membrane-curing compounds must not be used on surfaces that are to be covered with
coating material applied directly to concrete or with a covering material bonded to concrete,
such as other concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane
roofing, painting, and other coatings and finish materials.
3.10.7 Curing Formed Surfaces
Accomplish curing of formed surfaces, including undersurfaces of girders, beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or
until forms are removed. If forms are removed before end of curing period, accomplish final
curing of formed surfaces by any of the curing methods specified above, as applicable.
3.10.8 Curing Unformed Surfaces
Accomplish initial curing of unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, floor topping, and
other flat surfaces, by membrane curing.
Unless otherwise specified, accomplish final curing of unformed surfaces by any of curing
methods specified above, as applicable.
Accomplish final curing of concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener of finish flooring by
moisture-retaining cover curing.
3.10.9 Temperature of Concrete During Curing
When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below, maintain temperature of concrete at
not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing
period is measured by maturity. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete
placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to maintain specified
temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during curing period.
When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during other climatic
conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete, make arrangements before start of concrete
placing for installation of wind breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or
moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete during curing period.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 86 of 367
Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37 degrees F in any 1 hour
nor 80 degrees F in any 24-hour period.
3.10.10 Protection from Mechanical Injury
During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load
stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.
3.10.11 Protection After Curing
Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.11.1 Sampling
ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C 31/C 31M
for making test specimens.
3.11.2 Testing
3.11.2.1 Slump Tests
ASTM C 143/C 143M. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The maximum
slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that
the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement,
when test cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum)
of concrete.
3.11.2.2 Temperature Tests
Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold weather
conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch (minimum) or every 20
cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever
test cylinders and slump tests are made.
3.11.2.3 Compressive Strength Tests
ASTM C 39/C 39M. Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C
31/C 31M. Take precautions to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen. Test
two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Take
samples for strength tests of each mix design of and for concrete placed each day not less than
once a day, nor less than once for each 160 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each
5400 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls. For the entire project, take no less than five
sets of samples and perform strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed. Each strength
test result must be the average of two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 87 of 367
If the average of any three consecutive strength test results is less than f'c or if any strength test
result falls below f'c by more than 450 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C 42/C 42M core
samples from the in-place work represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Concrete
represented by core test is considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal
to at least 85 percent of f'c and if no single core is less than 75 percent of f'c. Retest locations
represented by erratic core strengths. Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and provide
new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of
adjacent concrete.
3.11.2.4 Air Content
ASTM C 173/C 173M or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete and ASTM C 173/C 173M
for lightweight concrete. Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as
specified for slump tests.
3.11.2.5 Strength of Concrete Structure
Compliance with the following is considered deficient if it fails to meet the requirements which
control strength of structure in place, including following conditions:
Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated
Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce
strength
Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of temperature during curing,
not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy
shock, and excessive vibration
Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength
3.11.2.6 Testing Concrete Structure for Strength
When there is evidence that strength of concrete structure in place does not meet specification
requirements, make cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination in
accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M, and as follows:
Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete-in-place that
is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores will be determined by the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 88 of 367
Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C 42/C 42M if concrete
they represent is more than superficially wet under service.
Air dry cores, (60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days
before test and test dry if concrete they represent is dry under service conditions.
Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory if their average is
equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength of the class of
concrete.
Core specimens will be taken and tested by the Government. If the results of core-boring tests
indicate that the concrete as placed does not conform to the drawings and specification, the cost of
such tests and restoration required must be borne by the Contractor.
Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent concrete surfaces.
Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
3.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT
As specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows.
3.12.1 Mixing Equipment
Before concrete pours, designate Company-owned site meeting environmental standards for
cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash equipment.
3.12.2 Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
Dispose of off site.
3.12.3 Reinforcing Steel
Collect reinforcing steel and place in designated area for recycling.
3.12.4 Other Waste
Identify concrete manufacturer's or supplier's policy for collection or return of construction
waste, unused material, deconstruction waste, and/or packaging material. Return excess cement
to supplier.
3.13 JOINTS
3.13.1 Waterstops
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 89 of 367
Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated.
Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make adequate provisions to
support and protect waterstops during progress of work. Make field joints in waterstops in
accordance with waterstop manufacturer's printed instructions, as approved. Protect waterstops
protruding from joints from damage.
3.14 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE DEVICES
3.14.1 General
Anchorage devices and embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported
by, set and build in cast-in-place concrete as part of the work of this section, using setting
drawings, instructions, and directions for work to be attached thereto.
3.14.2 Placing Anchorage Devices
Anchorage devices and embedded items must be positioned accurately and supported against
displacement. Fill openings in anchorage devices such as slots and threaded holes with an
approved, removable material to prevent entry of concrete into openings.
3.15 CONCRETE CONVEYING
3.15.1 Transfer of Concrete At Project Site
Handle concrete from point of delivery and transfer to concrete conveying equipment and to
locations of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods which prevent segregation and loss
of concrete mix materials.
3.15.2 Mechanical Equipment for Conveying Concrete
Equipment must ensure a continuous flow of concrete at delivery end, as approved. Provide
runways for wheeled concrete-conveying equipment from concrete delivery point to locations of
final deposit. Interior surfaces of concrete conveying equipment must be free of hardened
concrete, debris, water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 03 30 00 Page 90 of 367
SECTION 05 21 19
OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST FRAMING
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Welder qualification
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) per OSHA 1910.1200
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Steel joist framing; G
SD-07 Certificates
Accessories
Certification of Compliance
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
All joist girder framing must conform to 29 CFR 1926.757. Secure all joist bridging and
anchoring in place prior to the application of any construction loads. Distribute temporary loads
so that joist capacity is not exceeded. Do not apply loads to bridging.
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Handle, transport, and store joists in a manner to prevent damage affecting their structural
integrity. Store all items off the ground in a well drained location protected from the weather
and easily accessible for inspection and handling.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
All work must comply with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.
1.4.1 Drawing Requirements
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 21 19 Page 91 of 367
Submit steel joist framing drawings. Show joist type and size, layout in plan, and erection
details including methods of anchoring, framing at openings, type and spacing of bridging,
requirements for field welding, and details of accessories as applicable.
1.4.2 Certification of Compliance
Prior to construction commencement, submit Material Safety Data Sheet per 29 CFR 1910.1200
for steel joists , and certification for welder qualification, compliance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M,
welding operation, and tacker, stating the type of welding and positions qualified for, the code
and procedure qualified under, date qualified, and the firm and individual certifying the
qualification tests.
Submit certification of compliance for the following:
SJI TD 8
SJI TD 9
SJI TD 10
29 CFR 1926
29 CFR 1926.757
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 JOISTS AND ACCESSORIES
Provide design data from SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
2.2 PAINTING
2.2.1 Shop Painting
Clean and prime joists in accordance with SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC PS 14.01, Steel Joist Shop
Painting System, using only Type I, "Red Oxide Paint." Finish coat of paint is specified in
Section 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Handling and Erection
Conform to SJI LOAD TABLES for the joist series indicated.
3.1.2 Welding
All welding must conform to AWS B2.1/B2.1M and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 21 19 Page 92 of 367
3.2 BEARING PLATES
Provide bearing plates to accept full bearing after the supporting members have been plumbed
and properly positioned, but prior to placing superimposed loads. The area under the plate must
be damp-packed solidly with bedding mortar, except where nonshrink grout is indicated on the
drawings. Bedding mortar and grout must be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
3.3 PAINTING
3.3.1 Touch-Up Painting
After erection of joists touch-up connections and areas of abraded shop coat with paint of the
same type used for the shop coat.
3.3.2 Field Painting
Paint joists requiring a finish coat in conformance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 21 19 Page 93 of 367
SECTION 05 30 00
STEEL DECKS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Accessories
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Mechanical Fasteners
SD-07 Certificates
Welding Procedures
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Deck Units
Furnish deck units and accessory products from a manufacturer regularly engaged in
manufacture of steel decking. Provide manufacturer's certificates attesting that the decking
material meets the specified requirements.
1.2.2 Qualifications for Welding Work
Follows Welding Procedures in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Submit qualified Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, or under an
equivalent approved qualification test.
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for Welding Equipment and Welding Rods and Accessories.
1.2.3 Regulatory Requirements
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver deck units to the site in a dry and undamaged condition. Store and handle steel deck in a
manner to protect it from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Do not use
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 94 of 367
decking for storage or as working platform until units have been fastened into position. Exercise
care not to damage material or overload decking during construction. Must not exceed the
design live load. The maximum uniform distributed storage load. Stack decking on platforms or
pallets and cover with weathertight ventilated covering. Elevate one end during storage to
provide drainage. Maintain deck finish at all times to prevent formation of rust. Repair deck
finish using touch-up paint. Replace damaged material.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR DECKS
1.4.1 Properties of Sections
Properties of metal deck sections must comply with engineering design width as limited by the
provisions of AISI SG-913.
1.4.2 Allowable Loads
Indicate total uniform dead and live load for detailing purposes.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Steel Sheet
Flat rolled carbon steel sheets of structural quality, thickness not less than indicated, meeting the
requirements of AISI SG03-3, except as modified herein.
2.1.2 Steel Coating
ASTM A 653/A 653M designation G90 galvanized, or ASTM A 792/A 792M designation AZ55,
aluminum-zinc alloy. Apply coating to both sides of sheet. Conform to UL 209 for coating on
decking provided as wire raceways.
2.1.3 Mixes
2.1.3.1 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Floor Decks
Provide a high-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel conforming to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.1.4 Galvanized Steel Angles for Decks
Provide hot-rolled carbon steel angles conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, merchant quality,
Grade Designation SAE/AISI 1023 or SAE/AISI 1025, and hot-dip galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 95 of 367
2.1.5 Galvanizing Repair Paint for Decks
Provide a high zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel and shall
conform to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
Provide accessories of same material as deck, unless specified otherwise. Provide manufacturer's
standard type accessories, as specified.
2.2.1 Adjusting Plates
Provide adjusting plates, or segments of deck units, of same thickness and configuration as deck
units in locations too narrow to accommodate full size units. Provide factory cut plates of
predetermined size where possible.
2.2.2 End Closures
Fabricated of sheet metal by the deck manufacturer. Provide end closures minimum 0.028 inch
thick to close open ends at exposed edges of floors, end walls, and openings through deck.
2.2.3 Sheet Metal Collar
Where deck is cut for passage of pipes, ducts, columns, etc., and deck is to remain exposed,
provide a neatly cut sheet metal collar to cover edges of deck. Do not cut deck until after
installation of supplemental supports.
2.2.4 Cover Plates
Sheet metal to close panel edge and end conditions, and where panels change direction or butt.
Polyethylene-coated, self-adhesive, 2 inch wide joint tape may be provided in lieu of cover plates
on flat-surfaced decking butt joints.
Fabricate cover plates for abutting floor deck units from the specified structural-quality steel
sheets not less than nominal thick before galvanizing. Provide 6 inch wide cover plates and form
to match the contour of the floor deck units.
2.2.5 Hanger
Provide clips or loops for utility systems and suspended ceilings of one or more of the following
types:
a. Lip tabs or integral tabs where noncellular decking or flat plate of cellular section is
0.0474 inch thick or more, and a structural concrete fill is used over deck.
b. Slots or holes punched in decking for installation of pigtails.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 96 of 367
c. Tabs driven from top side of decking and arranged so as not to pierce electrical cells.
d. Decking manufacturer's standard as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.6 Mechanical Fasteners
Provide mechanical fasteners, such as powder actuated or pneumatically driven fasteners, for
anchoring the deck to structural supports and adjoining units that are designed to meet the loads
indicated. Provide positive locking-type fasteners standard with the Steel Deck Institute and the
steel deck manufacturer, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
2.2.7 Miscellaneous Accessories
Furnish the manufacturer's standard accessories to complete the deck installation. Furnish metal
accessories of the same material as the deck and with the minimum design thickness as follows:
saddles, 0.0474 inch; welding washers, 0.0598 inch cant strip, 0.0295 inch other metal
accessories, 0.0358 inch unless otherwise indicated. Accessories must include but not be limited
to saddles, welding washers, fasteners, cant strips, butt cover plates, under lapping sleeves, and
ridge and valley plates.
2.3 FABRICATION
Furnish one sample of each type of Metal Floor Deck Units used to illustrate the actual cross
section dimensions and configuration.
2.3.1 Deck
Conform to ASTM A 792/A 792M or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M for deck used in conjunction
with insulation and built-up roofing. Fabricate roof deck units of 0.0295 inch design thickness or
the thicker of the steel design thickness required by the design drawings and galvanized.
2.3.1.1 Metal Closure Strips for Decks
Fabricate strips from the specified commercial-quality steel sheets not less than nominal 0.0359
inch thick before galvanizing. Provide strips from the configuration required to provide tightfitting closures at open ends and sides of steel roof decking.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Prior to installation of decking units and accessories, examine worksite to verify that as-built
structure will permit installation of decking system without modification.
3.2 INSTALLATION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 97 of 367
Install steel deck units in accordance with SDI 30 approved shop drawings. Place units on
structural supports, properly adjusted, leveled, and aligned at right angles to supports before
permanently securing in place. Damaged deck and accessories including material which is
permanently stained or contaminated, deformed, or with burned holes shall not be installed.
Extend deck units over three or more supports unless absolutely impractical. Report inaccuracies
in alignment or leveling to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative and make
necessary corrections before permanently anchoring deck units. Locate deck ends over supports
only. Do not use unanchored deck units as a work or storage platform. Permanently anchor units
placed by the end of each working day. Do not support suspended ceilings, light fixtures, ducts,
utilities, or other loads by steel deck unless indicated. Distribute loads by appropriate means to
prevent damage. Chip off burrs and eliminate sharp edges which may damage wiring. Mesh
decking panels accurately and place in accordance with UL 209.
3.2.1 Attachment
Immediately after placement and alignment, and after correcting inaccuracies, permanently
fasten steel deck units to structural supports and to adjacent deck units by welding with
normal5/8 inch diameter puddle welds or fastened with screws, powder-actuated fasteners, or
pneumatically driven fasteners and in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure
and SDI 30. Clamp or weight deck units to provide firm contact between deck units and
structural supports while performing welding or fastening. Attachment of adjacent deck units by
button-punching is prohibited.
3.2.1.1 Welding
Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M using methods and electrodes
recommended by the manufacturers of the base metal alloys being used. Ensure only operators
previously qualified by tests prescribed in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M make
welds. Immediately recertify, or replace qualified welders, that are producing unsatisfactory
welding. Conform to the recommendations of the Steel Deck Institute and the steel deck
manufacturer for location, size, and spacing of fastening. Do not use welding washers at
sidelaps. Holes and similar defects will not be acceptable. Lap 2 inch butted deck ends. Attach
all partial or segments of deck units to structural supports in accordance with Section 2.5 of SDI
DDMO3. Immediately clean welds by chipping and wire brushing. Heavily coat welds, cut
edges and damaged portions of coated finish with zinc-dust paint conforming to ASTM A 780/A
780M.
3.2.1.2 Fastening
Anchor deck to structural supports and adjoining units with mechanical deck fasteners as
recommended by the Steel Deck Institute and the steel deck manufacturer, as approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Drive the powder-actuated fasteners with a lowvelocity piston tool by an operator authorized by the manufacturer of the piston tool. Drive
pneumatically fasteners with a low-velocity fastening tool and comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 98 of 367
3.2.1.3 Fastening Floor Deck Units
Fasten floor deck units to the steel supporting members at ends and at all intermediate supports,
both parallel and perpendicular to deck span, by welds. Do not exceed spacing of welds of 12
inch on center, with a minimum of two welds per floor deck unit at each support. Provide 3/4
inch minimum diameter fusion welds. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with the
placing of the floor deck units. Blow holes shall be cause for rejection.
Lock sidelaps between adjacent floor deck units together at intervals not exceeding 48 inch on
center by welding or button punching for all spans.
3.2.2 Openings
Cut or drill all holes and openings required and be coordinated with the drawings, specifications,
and other trades. Frame and reinforce openings through the deck in conformance with SDI DDP.
Reinforce holes and openings 6 to 12 inch across by 0.0474 inch thick steel sheet at least 12 inch
wider and longer than the opening and be fastened to the steel deck at each corner of the sheet
and at a maximum of 6 inch on center. Reinforce holes and openings larger than 12 inch by steel
channels or angles installed perpendicular to the steel joists and supported by the adjacent steel
joists. Install steel channels or angles perpendicular to the deck ribs and fasten to the channels or
angles perpendicular to the steel joists. Deck manufacturer shall approve holes or openings
larger than 6 inch in diameter prior to drilling or cutting.
3.2.3 Deck Damage
SDI MOC2, for repair of deck damage.
3.2.4 Accessory Installation
3.2.4.1 End Closures
Provide end closure to close open ends of cells at columns, walls, and openings in deck.
3.2.4.2 Access Hole Covers
Provide to seal holes cut in decking to facilitate welding of decking to structural supports.
3.2.4.3 Hangers
Provide as indicated to support utility system and suspended ceilings. Space devices so as to
provide a minimum of one device per 6.25 square feet.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 30 00 Page 99 of 367
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL: MISCELLANEOUS AND FABRICATIONS
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fabrication drawings of steel stairs; G
Handrails, installation drawings; G
Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system, and
anchoring details as specified in AISC 303.
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade,
class of metal, and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage,
and installation with relation to the building construction.
1.2 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures, materials, and
equipment of the type required for the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.2 Structural Tubing
ASTM A 500.
2.1.3 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 100 of 367
2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47/A 47M.
2.1.5 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to
which applied.
2.1.5.1 Expansion Anchors or Adhesive Anchors
Provide minimum 1/2 inch diameter expansion anchors or adhesive anchors. Minimum concrete
or masonry embedment shall be 4 inches. Design values listed shall be as tested according to
ASTM E 488.
2.1.5.2 Lag Screws and Bolts
ASME B18.52.1, type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.5.3 Toggle Bolts
ASME B18.52.1.
2.1.5.4 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME B18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.
2.1.5.5 Powder Driven Fasteners
Follow safety provisions of ASSE A10.3.
2.1.5.6 Screws
ASME B18.52.1, ASME B18.6.2, and ASME B18.6.3.
2.1.5.7 Washers
Provide plain washers to conform to ASME B18.22.1. Provide beveled washers for American
Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth. Provide
lock washers to conform to ASME B18.21.1.
2.1.6 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B 221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26/B 26M
or ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick
and aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 101 of 367
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Galvanizing
Hot-dip galvanize items specified to be zinc-coated, after fabrication where practicable.
Galvanizing: ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM
A 924/A 924M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation,
unless indicated otherwise.
2.2.3 Repair of Zinc-Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A 780
or by application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing,
as approved by Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Clean areas to be repaired and
remove slag from welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or paste material is applied, with a torch to
a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste; spread molten material uniformly
over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material.
2.2.4 Shop Cleaning and Painting
Cleaning and painting shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
2.3 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Provide galvanized standard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53/A 53M and of the size
indicated. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum
compressive strength of 2500 psi.
2.4 HANDRAILS
Design handrails to resist a concentrated load of 250 lbs in any direction at any point of the top
of the rail or 20 lbs per foot applied horizontally to top of the rail, whichever is more severe.
NAAMM AMP 521, provide the same size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same
material and finish as the handrail and posts.
2.4.1 Steel Handrails, Including Carbon Steel Inserts
Provide steel handrails, including inserts in concrete, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53/A
53M or structural tubing conforming to ASTM A 500, Grade A or B of equivalent strength.
Provide steel railings of 1 1/2 inches nominal size. Railings to be shop painted.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 102 of 367
a. Fabrication: Joint posts, rail, and corners by one of the following methods:
(1) Flush-type rail fittings of commercial standard, welded and ground smooth with
railing splice locks secured with 3/8 inch hexagonal-recessed-head setscrews.
(2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail and intermediate rail to
post, mitering corners, groove welding joints, and grinding smooth. Butt railing
splices and reinforce them by a tight fitting interior sleeve not less than 6 inches long.
(3) Railings may be bent at corners in lieu of jointing, provided bends are made in
suitable jigs and the pipe is not crushed.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES
Provide for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels, sill
angles, miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel
shapes over openings in masonry walls and partitions as required to support wall loads over
openings. Provide with connections and welds.
Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embedment as indicated. Galvanize
embedded items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
2.6 SAFETY NOSINGS FOR CONCRETE TREADS
Provide safety nosings of cast aluminum or cast iron with abrasive- surfaces, or extruded
aluminum with abrasive inserts. Nosing to be at least 4 inches wide and 1/4 inch thick and for
metal-pan cement-filled treads extending the full length of the tread and for platforms and
landings. Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded a minimum of 3/4 inch in the concrete
and with tops flush with the top of the traffic surface.
2.7 STEEL STAIRS
Provide steel stairs complete with stringers, metal-pan concrete-filled treads, landings, columns,
handrails, and necessary bolts and other fastenings. Steel stairs and accessories to be shop
painted.
2.7.1 Design Loads
Design stairs to sustain a live load of not less than 100 pounds per square foot, or a concentrated
load of 300 applied where it is most critical. Conform to AISC 360 or AISC 350 with the design
and fabrication of steel stairs, other than a commercial product.
2.7.2 Materials
Provide steel stairs of welded construction except that bolts may be used where welding is not
practicable. Screw or screw-type connections are not permitted.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 103 of 367
a. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Support metal pan for concrete fill on angle cleats welded to stringers or treads with
integral cleats, welded or bolted to the stringer. Close exposed ends.
c. Before fabrication, obtain necessary field measurements and verify drawing dimensions.
d. Clean metal surfaces free from mill scale, flake rust and rust pitting prior to shop
finishing. Weld permanent connections. Finish welds flush and smooth on surfaces
that will be exposed after installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor
shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before fabrication.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and
true curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be
continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed
connections of work in place shall not be tack welded. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth.
Exposed surfaces of work in place shall have a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved,
exposed riveting shall be flush. Where tight fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner
joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Work shall be accurately
set to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Installation shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and
details.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place.
Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and
powder-driven fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for
masonry; machine and carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do
not use wood plugs in any material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal.
Make exposed fastenings of compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to
which fastenings are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 104 of 367
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with suitable
anchoring devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in
place as the work progresses.
3.5 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS
D1.1/D1.1M. Use continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in
the finished installation.
3.6 FINISHES
3.6.1 Dissimilar Materials
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat conforming to MPI 79 to
prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster,
mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D 1187,
asphalt-base emulsion.
3.7 HANDRAILS
Toeboards and brackets shall be installed where indicated. Splices, where required, shall be
made at expansion joints. Removable sections shall be installed as indicated.
3.7.1 Steel Handrail
Install by means of base plates bolted to stringers or structural steel frame work. Secure rail ends
by steel pipe flanges anchored by expansion shields and bolts.
3.8 STEEL STAIRS
Provide anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and all parts or devices necessary for proper
installation. Provide lock washers under nuts.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS)
Pipe guards shall be set vertically in concrete piers. Piers shall be constructed of, and the hollow
cores of the pipe filled with, concrete specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SAFETY NOSINGS
Nosing shall be completely embedded in concrete before the initial set of the concrete occurs and
shall finish flush with the top of the concrete surface.
-- End of Section -P/N 05-C05124
Section 05 50 00 Page 105 of 367
SECTION 07 21 16
MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Blanket insulation
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Insulation
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BLANKET INSULATION
ASTM C 665, Type II, blankets with non-reflecting coverings or III, blankets with reflective
coverings; Class A, membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.1.1 Thermal Resistance Value (R-VALUE)
R-11 for fiberglass insulation in partitions.
2.1.2 Recycled Materials
Provide Thermal Insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided the
material meets all other requirements of this section. The minimum required recycled materials
content by weight are:
Rock Wool: 75 percent slag
Fiberglass: 20 to 25 percent glass cullet
2.1.3 Prohibited Materials
Do not provide asbestos-containing materials.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 21 16 Page 106 of 367
2.2.1 Mechanical Fasteners
Corrosion resistant fasteners as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Insulation
Install and handle insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Keep material dry
and free of extraneous materials. Ensure personal protective clothing and respiratory equipment
is used as required. Observe safe work practices.
3.1.1.1 Electrical wiring
Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of
insulation.
3.1.1.2 Continuity of Insulation
Install blanket insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets and to studs, rafters, joists, sill
plates, headers and any obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners,
wall to ceiling joints, roof, and floor. Avoid creating thermal bridges.
3.1.1.3 Sizing of Blankets
Provide only full width blankets when insulating between joists, or studs. Size width of blankets
for a snug fit where joists or studs are irregularly spaced.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 21 16 Page 107 of 367
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-07 Certificates
Firestopping Materials
Certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with the specified
requirements. In lieu of certificates, drawings showing UL classified materials as part
of a tested assembly may be provided. Drawings showing evidence of testing by an
alternate nationally recognized independent laboratory may be substituted.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing tested and listed firestop systems,
combination of materials, or devices to form an effective barrier against the spread of flame,
smoke and gases, and maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls, partitions, floors, and
ceiling-floor assemblies, including through-penetrations and construction joints and gaps.
Through-penetrations include the annular space around pipes, tubes, conduit, wires, cables and
vents. Construction joints include those used to accommodate expansion, contraction, wind, or
seismic movement; firestopping material shall not interfere with the required movement of the
joint. Gaps requiring firestopping include the gaps between the top of fire-rated walls and the
roof or floor deck above.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured, asbestos-free,
noncombustible products FM P7825a approved, or UL listed, for use with applicable
construction and penetrating items, complying with the following minimum requirements:
2.1.1 Fire Hazard Classification
Material shall have a flame spread of 25 or less, and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less,
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or UL 723. Material shall be an approved
firestopping material as listed in UL Fire Resistance or by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 84 00 Page 108 of 367
2.1.2 Toxicity
Material shall be nontoxic to humans at all stages of application or during fire conditions.
2.1.3 Fire Resistance Rating
Firestop systems shall be UL Fire Resistance listed or FM P7825a approved with "F" rating at
least equal to fire-rating of fire wall or floor in which penetrated openings are to be protected.
Firestop systems shall also have "T" rating where required.
2.1.3.1 Through-Penetrations
Firestopping materials for through-penetrations, as described in paragraph GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, shall provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E
814 or UL 1479. Fire resistance ratings for corridors (and egress) walls an electrical room walls
shall be one-hour. Fire ratings for other locations shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.1.3.2 Construction Joints and Gaps
Fire resistance ratings of construction joints, as described in paragraph GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS, and gaps such as those between floor slabs or roof decks shall be the same
as the construction in which they occur. Construction joints and gaps shall be provided with
firestopping materials and systems that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 119,
ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079 to meet the required fire resistance rating. Systems installed at
construction joints shall meet the cycling requirements of ASTM E 1399 or UL 2079.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Areas to receive firestopping shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, or loose materials which may affect
the fitting or fire resistance of the firestopping system. For cast-in-place firestop devices,
formwork or metal deck to receive device prior to concrete placement shall be sound and capable
of supporting device. Surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration,
subject to tolerance established by the manufacturer. Firestopping shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Tested and listed firestop systems shall be
provided in the following locations:
a. Penetrations of duct, conduit, tubing, cable and pipe through fire-resistance rated walls,
partitions, and ceiling assemblies.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 84 00 Page 109 of 367
b. Gaps at perimeter of fire-resistance rated walls and partitions, such as between the top of
the walls and the bottom of roof decks.
c. Construction joints in floors and fire rated walls and partitions.
d. Other locations where required to maintain fire resistance rating of the construction.
3.2.1 Insulated Pipes and Ducts
Thermal insulation shall be cut and removed where pipes or ducts pass through firestopping,
unless insulation meets requirements specified for firestopping. Thermal insulation shall be
replaced with a material having equal thermal insulating and firestopping characteristics.
3.2.2 Data and Communication Cabling
Cabling for data and communication applications shall be sealed with re-enterable firestopping
products that do not cure over time. Firestopping shall be modular devices, containing built-in
self-sealing intumescent inserts. Firestopping devices shall allow for cable moves, adds or
changes without the need to remove or replace any firestop materials.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 84 00 Page 110 of 367
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Sealants
Primers
Bond breakers
Backstops
Manufacturer's descriptive data including storage requirements, shelf life, curing time,
instructions for mixing and application, and primer data (if required). Provide a copy
of the Material Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.
SD-07 Certificates
Sealant
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to the specified
requirements.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates to which it will be
applied.
2.1.1 Interior Sealant
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 111 of 367
Provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 12.5, Use NT. Location(s) and color(s) of
sealant for the following:
LOCATION
COLOR
a. Small voids between walls or partitions and
adjacent lockers, casework, shelving,
door frames, built-in or surface-mounted
equipment and fixtures, and similar items.
White
b. Perimeter of frames at doors,
and access panels which adjoin exposed
interior concrete and masonry surfaces.
White
c. Joints of interior masonry walls and
partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters,
concrete walls, and exterior walls unless
otherwise detailed.
White
d. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated
or specified, where small voids exist between
materials specified to be painted.
White
e. Joints between items adjoining ceramic tile;
joints between shower receptors and ceramic
tile; joints formed where nonplaner tile
surfaces meet.
White
f. Joints formed between tile floors and tile
base cove; joints between tile and dissimilar
materials; joints occurring where substrates change.
White
g. Behind escutcheon plates at valve pipe
penetrations and showerheads in showers.
White
2.1.2 Exterior Sealant
For joints in vertical surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
For joints in horizontal surfaces, provide ASTM C 920, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
Provide location(s) and color(s) of sealant as follows:
LOCATION
COLOR
a. Joints and recesses formed where frames
and subsills doors, louvers,
and vents adjoin masonry, concrete, or
Match adjacent
surface color
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 112 of 367
metal frames. Use sealant at both exterior
and interior surfaces of exterior wall
penetrations.
b. Voids where items pass through exterior
walls.
Match adjacent
surface color
c. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is
indicated or specified.
Match adjacent
surface color
2.2 PRIMERS
Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for the particular application.
2.3 BOND BREAKERS
Provide the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer to prevent adhesion
of the sealant to backing or to bottom of the joint.
2.4 BACKSTOPS
Provide glass fiber roving or neoprene, butyl, polyurethane, or polyethylene foams free from oil
or other staining elements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Provide 25 to 33 percent
oversized backing for closed cell and 40 to 50 percent oversized backing for open cell material,
unless otherwise indicated. Make backstop material compatible with sealant. Do not use oakum
and other types of absorptive materials as backstops.
2.5 CLEANING SOLVENTS
Provide type(s) recommended by the sealant manufacturer except for aluminum and bronze
surfaces that will be in contact with sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
Clean surfaces from dirt frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter
that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Remove oil and grease with solvent. Surfaces
must be wiped dry with clean cloths. When resealing an existing joint, remove existing caulk or
sealant prior to applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, contact sealant
manufacturer for specific recommendations.
3.1.1 Steel Surfaces
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 113 of 367
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical or would damage
finish work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove protective coatings by sandblasting or using a
residue-free solvent.
3.1.2 Aluminum or Bronze Surfaces
Remove temporary protective coatings from surfaces that will be in contact with sealant. When
masking tape is used as a protective coating, remove tape and any residual adhesive just prior to
sealant application. For removing protective coatings and final cleaning, use nonstaining
solvents recommended by the manufacturer of the item(s) containing aluminum or bronze
surfaces.
3.1.3 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such materials, remove
materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar
from the joint cavity.
3.2 SEALANT PREPARATION
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to the sealant. Mix multicomponent elastomeric
sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
a. Acceptable Ratios:
JOINT WIDTH
JOINT DEPTH
Minimum
Maximum
For metal, or other
nonporous surfaces:
1/4 inch (minimum)
over 1/4 inch
1/4 inch
1/2 of
width
1/4 inch
Equal to
width
For concrete or masonry:
1/4 inch (minimum)
Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch
1/4 inch
1/4 inch
1/4 inch
Equal to
width
Over 1/2 inch to 2 inch
1/2 inch
5/8 inch
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 114 of 367
Over 2 inch.
(As recommended by sealant
manufacturer)
b. Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios have not been
provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut to acceptable widths
without damage to the adjoining work. Grinding is not required on metal surfaces.
3.3.2 Masking Tape
Place masking tape on the finish surface on one or both sides of a joint cavity to protect adjacent
finish surfaces from primer or sealant smears. Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after
joint has been filled and tooled.
3.3.3 Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or bottom of joint cavities
with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth specified. Install backstops in the
following locations:
a. Where indicated.
b. Where backstop is not indicated but joint cavities exceed the acceptable maximum
depths specified in paragraph entitled, "Joint Width-to-Depth Ratios".
3.3.4 Primer
Immediately prior to application of the sealant, clean out loose particles from joints. Where
recommended by sealant manufacturer, apply primer to joints in concrete masonry units, wood,
and other porous surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply
primer to exposed finish surfaces.
3.3.5 Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these
surfaces. Carefully apply the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or
breaking bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.
3.3.6 Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied. Do not use a sealant that
has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and cannot be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun.
Apply the sealant in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a
nozzle that fits the joint width. Force sealant into joints to fill the joints solidly without air
pockets. Tool sealant after application to ensure adhesion. Make sealant uniformly smooth and
free of wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially filled or unfilled
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 115 of 367
joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified. Apply sealer over the sealant when and as
specified by the sealant manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.4.1 Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be used for this purpose
if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled.
3.4.2 Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains and leave the work
in a clean and neat condition.
a. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately scrape off fresh sealant that has been
smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer. Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then remove by wire brushing
or sanding.
b. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a solventmoistened cloth.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 07 92 00 Page 116 of 367
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G
Frames; G
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware provisions, and
installation details.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G
Frames; G
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors and frames. Include data and
details on door construction, panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in lieu of "standard
steel doors," provide additional details and data sufficient for comparison to
SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive door hardware as
specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where indicated. Exterior doors shall have top edge
closed flush and sealed to prevent water intrusion. Doors shall be 1-3/4 inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1 Extra Heavy Duty Doors
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 13 Page 117 of 367
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1 or 2 with core construction
as required by the manufacturer for interior doors and for indicated exterior doors, of size(s) and
design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffener cores are required, the space between the stiffeners
shall be filled with mineral board insulation.
2.2 INSULATION CORES
Insulated cores shall be of type specified, and provide an apparent U-factor of .48 in accordance
with SDI/DOOR 113 and shall conform to:
a. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C 591, Type I or II, foamed-in-place or
in board form, with oxygen index of not less than 22 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 2863; or
b. Rigid Polystyrene Foam Board: ASTM C 578, Type I or II; or
c. Mineral board: ASTM C 612, Type I.
2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 3, except as otherwise specified. Form frames to sizes and shapes
indicated, with welded corners. Provide steel frames for all doors, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or continuously weld
stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural Welding Code
Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with the practice specified by the
producer of the metal being welded.
2.3.2 Stops and Beads
Form stops and beads from 20 gage steel. Provide for glazed and other openings in standard
steel frames. Secure beads to frames with oval-head, countersunk Phillips self-tapping sheet
metal screws or concealed clips and fasteners. Space fasteners approximately 12 to 16 inch on
center. Miter molded shapes at corners. Butt or miter square or rectangular beads at corners.
2.3.3 Interior Window Openings
Fabricate frames for interior window openings of same material, gage, and assembly as specified
for metal door frames.
2.3.4 Anchors
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 13 Page 118 of 367
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide steel anchors, zinccoated or painted with rust-inhibitive paint, not lighter than 18 gage.
2.3.4.1 Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb. For frames which are more than 7.5 feet in height,
provide one additional anchor for each jamb for each additional 2.5 feet or fraction thereof.
a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps or 3/16 inch diameter
steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed masonry with expansion bolts
in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111; and
2.3.4.2 Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each jamb member.
2.4 HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6. Drill and tap
doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors and frames for hardware in
accordance with the applicable requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6.
For additional requirements refer to ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied
hardware at the project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware into the
door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the requirements of SDI/DOOR
A250.8, as applicable. Punch door frames to receive a minimum of two rubber or vinyl door
silencers on lock side of single doors and one silencer for each leaf at heads of double doors. Set
lock strikes out to provide clearance for silencers.
2.5 FINISHES
2.5.1 Factory-Primed Finish
All surfaces of doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, chemically treated and factory
primed with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8, or paintable A25
galvannealed steel without primer. Where coating is removed by welding, apply touchup of
factory primer.
2.5.2 Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Anchors and Accessories
Provide electrolytically deposited zinc-coated steel in accordance with ASTM A 879/A 879M,
Commercial Quality, Coating Class A. Phosphate treat and factory prime zinc-coated surfaces as
specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 13 Page 119 of 367
2.6 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Finished doors and frames shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects,
waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges, holes, warp, and buckle. Molded members shall be clean
cut, straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress
exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door frame sections for use with the wall
construction indicated. Corner joints shall be well formed and in true alignment. Conceal
fastenings where practicable. Design frames in exposed masonry walls or partitions to allow
sufficient space between the inside back of trim and masonry to receive caulking compound.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace securely until
permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with expansion bolts or powder-actuated
fasteners. Build in or secure wall anchors to adjoining construction. Coat inside of frames with
corrosion-inhibiting bituminous material.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8. After erection and
glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.2 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames prior to completion
and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as directed. Wire brush rusted frames until
rust is removed. Clean thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly. Remove mastic
smears and other unsightly marks.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 13 Page 120 of 367
SECTION 08 11 16
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 Structural
Shapes and thicknesses of framing members shall be sufficient to withstand a design wind load
of not less than 50 pounds per square foot of supported area with a deflection of not more than
1/175 times the length of the member and a safety factor of not less than 1.65. Provide glazing
beads, moldings, and trim of not less than 0.050 inch nominal thickness.
1.1.2 Air Infiltration
When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air infiltration shall not exceed 0.30 cubic feet per
minute per square foot of fixed area at a test pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot (50 mile per
hour wind).
1.1.3 Water Penetration
When tested in accordance with ASTM E 331, there shall be no water penetration at a pressure
of 8 pounds per square foot of fixed area, 7.51 psf for doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Windows and frames; G
Show elevations of each window type, size of frames, metal gages, details of window
and frame construction, methods of anchorage, glazing details, weatherstripping,
provisions for and location of hardware, and details of installation.
SD-04 Samples
Finish sample
Insulating Glass
SD-05 Design Data
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 121 of 367
Structural calculations for deflection; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Windows, frames and glazing
Submit detail specifications and instructions for installation, adjustments, cleaning,
and maintenance.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
1.3.1 Shop Drawing Requirements
Drawings shall indicate elevations of windows and frames, full-size sections, thickness and
gages of metal, fastenings, proposed method of anchoring, size and spacing of anchors, details of
construction, method of glazing, mullion details, method and materials for weatherstripping,
material and method of attaching subframes, trim, installation details, and other related items.
1.3.2 Sample Requirements
1.3.2.1 Finish Sample Requirements
Submit color chart of standard factory-finish color coatings.
1.4 WARRANTY
1.4.1 System Warranty
Manufacturer shall provide a Standard two year warranty on thermal framing against failure
resulting from the following:
Longitudinal or transverse thermal barrier shrinkage.
Thermal barrier cracking.
Structural failure of the thermal barrier material.
Loss of adhesion or loss of prescribed edge pressure on the glazed material resulting in excessive
air and water infiltration.
1.4.2 Warranty for Insulating Glass Units
Standard Warranty insulating glass units against development of material obstruction to vision
(such as dust, fogging, or film formation on the inner glass surfaces) caused by failure of the
hermetic seal, other than through glass breakage, for a 10-year period following acceptance of
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 122 of 367
the work. Provide new units for any units failing to comply with terms of this warranty within
45 working days after receipt of notice from the Government.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMES
Fixed aluminum frames of size, design, and location indicated. Provide complete with frames,
glazing, trim, and accessories.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Anchors
Stainless steel.
2.2.2 Aluminum Alloy for Frames
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions. ASTM B 209, alloy and temper best suited for
aluminum sheets and strips.
2.2.3 Fasteners
Stainless steel.
2.2.4 Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.2.5 Aluminum Paint
Aluminum window manufacturer's standard aluminum paint.
2.3 FABRICATION
2.3.1 Aluminum Frames
Extruded aluminum shapes with contours approximately as indicated. Provide removable glass
stops and glazing beads for frames accommodating fixed glass. Use countersunk stainless steel
Phillips screws for exposed fastenings, and space not more than 12 inches on center. Mill joints
in frame members to a hairline fit, reinforce, and secure mechanically.
2.3.2 Welding and Fastening
Where possible, locate welds on unexposed surfaces. Dress welds on exposed surfaces
smoothly. Select welding rods, filler wire, and flux to produce a uniform texture and color in
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 123 of 367
finished work. Remove flux and spatter from surfaces immediately after welding. Exposed
screws or bolts will be permitted only in inconspicuous locations, and shall have countersunk
heads. Weld concealed reinforcements for hardware in place.
2.3.3 Anchors
On the backs of subframes, provide anchors of the sizes and shapes required for securing
subframes to adjacent construction. Place anchors near top and bottom of each jamb and at
points not more than 12 inch apart.
2.3.4 Glazing
2.3.4.1 Insulating Glass Unit
Two panes of glass separated by a dehydrated 1/2 inch airspace, filled with argon and
hermetically sealed. Glazed systems (including frames) shall be Energy Star labeled products as
appropriate to climate zone and as applicable to window type, with a whole-window Solar Heat
Gain Coefficient (SHGC) maximum of 0.31 determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
Glazed panels and curtain walls shall have a U-factor maximum of 0.22 Btu per square foot x hr
x degrees F in accordance with NFRC 100. Glazing shall meet or exceed a luminous efficacy of
1.0. Glazed panels shall be rated for not less than 30 Sound Transmission Class (STC) when
tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM
E 413. Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IGMA TR-1200. The units shall meet
CBA Grade requirement when tested in accordance with ASTM E 773 and ASTM E 774, Class
A. Spacer shall be black, roll-formed, steel-reinforced butyl rubber, with bent or tightly welded
or keyed and sealed joints to completely seal the spacer periphery and eliminate moisture and
hydrocarbon vapor transmission into airspace though the corners. Primary seal shall be
compressed polyisobutylene and the secondary seal shall be a specially formulated silicone.
2.3.4.2 Beads
Provide extruded aluminum snap-in glazing beads on interior surface. Provide extruded
aluminum, theft-proof, snap-in glazing beads or fixed glazing beads on exterior or security side.
Glazing beads shall have vinyl insert glazing gaskets. Design glazing beads to receive glass of
thickness indicated or specified.
2.3.5 Finishes
Provide exposed aluminum surfaces with factory finish of anodic coating or organic coating.
2.3.5.1 Anodic Coating
Clean exposed aluminum surfaces and provide an anodized finish conforming to AA DAF-45.
Finish shall be integral color-anodized, designation AA-M10-C22-A42, Architectural Class I 0.7
mil or thicker. Color shall be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 124 of 367
2.3.5.2 Organic Coating
Clean and prime exposed aluminum surfaces. Provide a high-performance finish in accordance
with AAMA 2604 with total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. The finish color shall
be as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Plumb, square, level, and align frames and framing members to receive glazing. Anchor frames
to adjacent construction as required to meet wind loading and in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions. Anchor bottom of each frame to building construction with 3/32 inch thick
stainless steel angle clips secured to back of each jamb and to floor construction; use stainless
steel bolts and expansion rivets for fastening clip anchors.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
3.2.1 Dissimilar Metals
Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with metals other than stainless steel, zinc, or small
areas of white bronze, protect from direct contact to dissimilar metals.
3.2.1.1 Protection
Provide one of the following systems to protect surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals:
a. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
b. Apply a good quality elastomeric sealant between the aluminum and the dissimilar
metal.
c. Paint the dissimilar metal with one coat of primer and one coat of aluminum paint.
d. Use a nonabsorptive tape or gasket in permanently dry locations.
3.2.2 Drainage from Dissimilar Metals
In locations where drainage from dissimilar metals has direct contact with aluminum, provide
protective paint to prevent aluminum discoloration.
3.2.3 Masonry and Concrete
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with one
coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 125 of 367
3.2.4 Wood or Other Absorptive Materials
Provide aluminum surfaces in contact with absorptive materials subject to frequent moisture, and
aluminum surfaces in contact with treated wood, with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of
heavy-bodied bituminous paint. In lieu of painting the aluminum, the Contractor shall have the
option of painting the wood or other absorptive surface with two coats of aluminum paint and
sealing the joints with elastomeric sealant.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion of installation, clean window surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
written recommended procedure. Do not use abrasive, caustic, or acid cleaning agents.
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect windows from damage and from contamination by other materials such as cement
mortar. Prior to completion and acceptance of the work, restore damaged windows and glazing
to original condition, or replace with new ones.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 11 16 Page 126 of 367
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
Overhead coiling doors to be counterbalanced doors by methods of manufacturer's standard
mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft
and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed
or self-lubricating bearings for rotating members. Doors to be coiling type, with interlocking
slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides, hood, and operating mechanisms, and
designed for use on openings as indicated.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 Wind Loading
Design and fabricate door assembly to withstand the wind loading pressure of at least 30 pounds
per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. Provide test data
showing compliance with ASTM E 330. Sound engineering principles may be used to
interpolate or extrapolate test results to door sizes not specifically tested Complete assembly
must meet or exceed the requirements of ASCE 7-05.
1.2.2 Operational Cycle Life
All portions of the door, hardware and operating mechanism that are subject to movement, wear,
or stress fatigue must be designed to operate through a minimum number of 10 cycles per day.
One complete cycle of door operation is defined as when the door is in the closed position,
moves to the fully open position, and returns to the closed position.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide fabrication drawings that show complete assembly with hardware and framing
details.
Submit Installation Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Overhead
Coiling Door Assemblies," of this section.
SD-03 Product Data
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 127 of 367
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for overhead coiling doors and accessories.
SD-05 Design Data
Submit equipment and performance data for the following items in accordance with
the paragraph entitled, "Performance Requirements," of this section.
Overhead Coiling Doors
Hardware
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Electric Door Operators
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies.
1.4 OVERHEAD COILING DOOR DETAIL SHOP DRAWINGS
Provide installation drawings for overhead coiling door assemblies which show elevations of
each door type, shape and thickness of materials, finishes, details of joints and connections, and
details of guides and fittings, rough opening dimensions, location and description of hardware,
anchorage locations, and counterbalancing mechanism and door operator details. Show locations
of replaceable fusible links wiring diagrams for power, signal and controls. Include a schedule
showing the location of each door with the drawings.
Contractor must submit 6 copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 30 calendar days
prior to testing the Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies. Update and resubmit data for final
approval no later than 30 calendar days prior to contract completion.
Provide operation and maintenance manuals which are consistent with manufacturer's standard
brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions.
Provide test data that is legible and of good quality.
1.5 WARRANTY, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals for Overhead Coiling Door Assemblies, including
the following items:
Materials
Devices
Electric Door Operators
Hood
Counterbalancing Mechanism
Painting
Procedures
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 128 of 367
Manufacture's Brochures
Parts Lists
Contractor must furnish a written guarantee that the helical spring and counterbalance
mechanism are free from defects in material and workmanship and that they will remain so for
not less than two years after completion and acceptance of the project.
Contractor must warrant that upon notification by the Government, he will immediately make
good any defects in material, workmanship, and door operation within the same time period
covered by the guarantee, at no cost to the Government.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
2.1.1 Curtain Materials and Construction
Provide curtain slats which are fabricated from steel sheets conforming to ASTM A 653/A
653M, Grade A, with the additional requirement of a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi.
Provide sheets which are galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A
924/A 924M.
Fabricate doors from interlocking cold-rolled slats, with section profiles as specified, designed to
withstand the specified wind loading. Provide slats which are continuous without splices for the
width of the door.
Provide slats filled with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E
84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces on interior surface of slats.
2.1.2 Insulated Curtains
Form Curtains from manufacturer's standard shapes of interlocking slats. Supply slat system with
a minimum R-value of 4 when calculated in accordance with ASHRAE FUN IP. Slats to consist
of a urethane or polystyrene core not less than 11/16 inch thick, completely enclosed within
metal facings. Exterior face of slats must be the same gauge as specified for curtains. Interior
face must be not lighter than 0.0219 inches. The insulated slat assembly is to have a flame
spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke development factor of not more than 50 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.1.3 Curtain Bottom Bar
Curtain bottom bars must be pairs of angles from the manufacturer's standard steel, stainless and
aluminum extrusions not less than 2.0 by 2.0 inches by 0.188 inch. Steel extrusions must
conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M. Stainless steel extrusions conforming to ASTM A 666, Type
304. Aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B 221 or (ASTM B 221M). Galvanize angles
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 129 of 367
and fasteners in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Coat welds
and abrasions with paint conforming to ASTM A 780.
2.1.4 Locks
Provide end and/or wind locks of cast steel conforming to ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade B;
galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A
924/A 924M and secured at every other curtain slat.
2.1.5 Weather Stripping
Weather-stripping at the door-head and jamb must be 1/8-inch thick sheet of natural or
neoprene rubber with air baffles, secured to the insides of hoods with galvanized-steel fasteners
through continuous galvanized-steel pressure bars at least 5/8-inch wide and 1/8-inch thick.
Threshold weather-stripping must be 1/8-inch thick sheet natural or neoprene rubber secured to
the bottom bars.
Provide weather-stripping of natural or neoprene rubber conforming to ASTM D 2000.
2.1.6 Locking Devices
Slide Bolt to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right
jamb sides, operable from coil side.
Locking Device Assembly which includes cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating
handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
2.1.7 Safety Interlock
Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door
is locked.
2.1.8 Overhead Drum
Fabricate drums from nominal 0.028-inch thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 (Z275)
zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Fabricate drums from nominal 0.040-inch thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209
(ASTM B 209M), of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finish for type of use
and finish indicated.
2.2 HARDWARE
All hardware must conform to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM A 307, ASTM F 568M, and
ASTM A 27/A 27M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 130 of 367
2.2.1 Guides
Fabricate curtain jamb guides from the manufacturer's standard angles or channels of same
material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength
to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes
for track adjustment.
2.2.2 Equipment Supports
Fabricate door-operating equipment supports from the manufacturer's standard steel shapes and
plates conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M
and ASTM A 924/A 924M. Size the shapes and plates in accordance with the industry standards
for the size, weight, and type of door installation.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustabletension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel
connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for
rotating members.
2.3.1 Brackets
Provide the manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel
with one located at each end of the counterbalance barrel conforming to ASTM A 48/A 48M.
2.3.2 Counterbalance Barrels
Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or
seamless carbon-steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, of sufficient diameter and wall
thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to
not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load.
2.3.3 Spring Balance
One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs installed within the barrel
capable of producing sufficient torque to assure easy operation of the door curtain. Provide and
size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.
2.3.4 Torsion Rod for Counter Balance
Fabricate rod from the manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends
and carry torsional load.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 131 of 367
2.4 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
Provide electrical wiring and door operating controls conforming to the applicable requirements
of NFPA 70.
Electric door-operator assemblies must be the sizes and capacities recommended and provided
by the door manufacturer for specified doors. Assemblies must be complete with electric motors
and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear reduction units, solenoid-operated brakes,
clutch, remote-control stations, manual or automatic control devices, and accessories as required
for proper operation of the doors.
Design the operators so that motors may be removed without disturbing the limit-switch
adjustment and affecting the emergency auxiliary operators.
Provide a manual operator of crank-gear or chain-gear mechanisms with a release clutch to
permit manual operation of doors in case of power failure. Arrange the emergency manual
operator so that it may be put into and out of operation from floor level, and its use will not
affect the adjustment of the limit switches. Provide an electrical or mechanical device which will
automatically disconnect the motor from the operating mechanism when the emergency manual
operating mechanism is engaged.
2.4.1 Door-Operator Types
Provide an operator which is suitable for the existing construction constraints at each opening to
receive an overhead coiling door.
2.4.2 Electric Motors
Provide motors which are the high-starting-torque, reversible, constant-duty electrical type with
overload protection of sufficient torque and horsepower to move the door in either direction from
any position and produce a door-travel speed of not less than 8 nor more than 12 inches per
second without exceeding the horsepower rating.
Provide motors which conform to NEMA MG 1 designation, temperature rating, service factor,
enclosure type, and efficiency to the requirements specified.
2.4.3 Motor Bearings
Bearings must be bronze-sleeve or heavy-duty ball or roller antifriction type with full provisions
for the type of thrust imposed by the specific duty load.
Pre-lubricate and factory seal bearings in motors less than 1/2 horsepower.
Equip motors coupled to worm-gear reduction units with either ball or roller bearings.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 132 of 367
Equip bearings in motors 1/2 horsepower or larger with lubrication service fittings. Fit
lubrication fittings with color-coded plastic or metal dust caps.
In any motor, bearings that are lubricated at the factory for extended duty periods do not need to
be lubricated for a given number of operating hours. Display this information on an appropriate
tag or label on the motor with instructions for lubrication cycle maintenance.
2.4.4 Motor Starters, Controls, and Enclosures
Each door motor must have a factory-wired, unfused, disconnect switch; a reversing, across-theline magnetic starter with thermal overload protection; 120-volt operating coils with a control
transformer limit switch; and a safety interlock assembled in a NEMA ICS 6 type enclosure as
specified herein. Control equipment must conform to NEMA ICS 2.
Provide adjustable switches, electrically interlocked with the motor controls and set to stop the
door automatically at the fully open and fully closed position.
2.4.5 Control Enclosures
Provide control enclosures that conform to NEMA ICS 6 for oil-tight and dust-tight NEMA Type
13.
2.4.6 Transformer
Provide starters with 230/460 to 115 volt control transformers with one secondary fuse when it is
required to reduce the voltage on control circuits to 120 volts or less. Provide transformer that
conforms to NEMA ST 1.
2.4.7 Safety-Edge Device
Provide each door with a pneumatic safety device extending the full width of the door and
located within a U-section neoprene or rubber astragal mounted on the bottom rail of the bottom
door section. Device must immediately stop and reverse the door upon contact with an
obstruction in the door opening during downward travel and cause the door to return to full-open
position. Safety device is not a substitute for a limit switch.
Connect safety device to the control circuit through a retracting safety cord and reel.
2.4.8 Remote-Control Stations
Provide interior remote control stations which are full-guarded, momentary-contact three-button,
heavy-duty, surface-mounted NEMA ICS 6 type enclosures as specified. Mark buttons "OPEN,"
"CLOSE," and "STOP." The "CLOSE" button must be the type requiring a constant pressure to
maintain the closing motion of the door. When the door is in motion and the "STOP" button is
pressed, the door must stop instantly and remain in the stopped position; from the stopped
position, the door may then be operated in either direction.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 133 of 367
Provide secure exterior control stations which are full-guarded, momentary-contact three-button
standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosures, keyoperated, with the same operating functions as specified herein for interior remote-control
stations.
2.4.9 Speed-Reduction Units
Provide speed-reduction units consisting of hardened-steel worm and bronze worm gear
assemblies running in oil or grease and encased in a sealed casing, coupled to the motor through
a flexible coupling. Drive shafts must rotate on ball- or roller-bearing assemblies that are
integral with the unit.
Provide minimum ratings of speed reduction units which are in accordance with AGMA
provisions for class of service.
Ground worm gears to provide accurate thread form; machine teeth for all other types of gearing.
Surface harden all gears.
Provide bearings which are the antifriction type equipped with oil seals.
2.4.10 Chain Drives
Provide roller chains that are power-transmission series steel roller type conforming to ASME
B29.400, with a minimum safety factor of 10 times the design load.
Roller-chain side bars, rollers, pins, and bushings must be heat-treated or otherwise hardened.
Provide chain sprockets that are high-carbon steel with machine-cut hardened teeth, finished
bore and keyseat, and hollow-head setscrews.
2.4.11 Brakes
Provide brakes which are 360-degree shoe brakes or shoe and drum brakes, solenoid-operated
and electrically interlocked to the control circuit to set automatically when power is interrupted.
2.4.12 Clutches
Clutches must be the 4-inch diameter, multiple face, externally adjustable friction type or
adjustable centrifugal type.
2.5 SURFACE FINISHING
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Noticeable variations in the same metal
component are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 134 of 367
if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
Install overhead coiling door assembly, anchors and inserts for guides, brackets, motors,
switches, hardware, and other accessories in accordance with approved detail drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions. Upon completion of installation, doors must be free from all
distortion.
Install overhead coiling doors, motors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations as
indicated for each door in the contract documents and as required by the manufacturer.
Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with
regulatory requirements for accessibility and as required by the manufacturer.
3.2 FIELD PAINTED FINISH
Steel doors and frames which are to be field painted must accordance with Section 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS and manufacturer's written instructions. Protect weather stripping
from paint. Finishes must be free of scratches or other blemishes.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
After installation, adjust hardware and moving parts. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as
recommended by manufacturer to provide smooth operating functions for ease movement, free
of warping, twisting, or distortion of the door assembly.
Adjust seals to provide weather-tight fit around entire perimeter.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and checks
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Test the door opening and closing operation when activated by controls or alarm-connected firerelease system. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.
Test and make final adjustment of new doors at no additional cost to the Government.
3.3.1 CLEANING
Clean doors in accordance with manufacturer's approved instructions.
-- End of Section -P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 33 23 Page 135 of 367
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Hardware schedule; G
Keying system
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware items; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Hardware Schedule items, Data Package 1; G
Submit data package in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATING
INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Key Bitting
1.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:
Hardware QuanItem tity
---------
Size
----
Reference
Publication
Type
No.
Finish
-----------
Mfr.
Name
and
Catalog
No.
-------
Key
Control
Symbols
-------
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 136 of 367
UL Mark
(If fire
rated
and
listed)
--------
BHMA
Finish
Designation
---------
1.3 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative prior to
completion of the work. Include:
a. Complete listing of all keys (AA1, AA2, etc.).
b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).
c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.
d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.
e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in each master system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 HARDWARE FOR FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
Provide all hardware necessary to meet the requirements of NFPA 80 for fire doors and NFPA
101 for exit doors, as well as to other requirements indicated, even if such hardware is not
specifically mentioned under paragraph entitled "Hardware Schedule." Provide the label of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for such hardware listed in UL Bld Mat Dir or labeled and listed
by another testing laboratory acceptable to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS
Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark, hinges, pivots, locks,
latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the identifying mark will be visible after the item is
installed. For closers with covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.
2.2.1 Hinges
BHMA A156.1, 4-1/2 by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct loose pin hinges for
exterior doors and reverse-bevel interior doors so that pins will be nonremovable when door is
closed. Other antifriction bearing hinges may be provided in lieu of ball-bearing hinges.
2.2.2 Locks and Latches
2.2.2.1 Mortise Locks and Latches
BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1, Security Grade 2. Install knobs and roses
of mortise locks with screwless shanks and no exposed screws.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 137 of 367
2.2.2.2 Bored Locks and Latches
BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
2.2.3 Exit Devices
BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type and vertical rod devices.
Provide open back strikes for pairs of doors with mortise and vertical rod devices. Provide touch
bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms.
2.2.4 Cylinders and Cores
Provide cylinders for new locks, including locks provided under other sections of this
specification. Provide fully compatible cylinders with products to match the existing base lock
and keying system with interchangeable cores which are removable by a special control key.
Factory set the cores with seven pin tumblers using the A4 system and F keyway. Submit a core
code sheet with the cores. Provide master keyed cores in one system for this project. Provide
construction interchangeable cores.
2.2.5 Keying System
Provide a master keying system to be compatible with the existing lock and cylinder system. The
existing system is a “BEST” lock system.
2.2.6 Lock Trim
Cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain design.
2.2.6.1 Knobs and Roses
Conform to the minimum test requirements of BHMA A156.2 and BHMA A156.13 for knobs,
roses, and escutcheons. For unreinforced knobs, roses, and escutcheons, provide 0.050 inch
thickness. For reinforced knobs, roses, and escutcheons, provide outer shell of 0.035 inch
thickness, and combined thickness of 0.070 inch, except for knob shanks, which are 0.060 inch
thick.
2.2.6.2 Lever Handles
Provide lever handles in lieu of knobs. Conform to the minimum requirements of BHMA
A156.13 for mortise locks of lever handles for exit devices. Provide lever handle locks with a
breakaway feature (such as a weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to
the lock when force in excess of that specified in BHMA A156.13 is applied to the lever handle.
Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of the door face.
2.2.6.3 Texture
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 138 of 367
Provide knurled or abrasive coated knobs or lever handles.
2.2.7 Keys
Furnish one file key, one duplicate key, and one working key for each key change and for each
master keying system. Furnish one additional working key for each lock of each keyed-alike
group. Furnish a quantity of key blanks equal to 20 percent of the total number of file keys.
Stamp each key with appropriate key control symbol and "U.S. property - Do not duplicate." Do
not place room number on keys.
2.2.8 Closers
BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with PT 4C. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting
devices, fasteners, and other features necessary for the particular application. Size closers in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, or provide multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through
6, and list sizes in the Hardware Schedule. Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty.
2.2.8.1 Identification Marking
Engrave each closer with manufacturer's name or trademark, date of manufacture, and
manufacturer's size designation located to be visible after installation.
2.2.9 Overhead Holders
BHMA A156.8.
2.2.10 Door Protection Plates
BHMA A156.6.
2.2.10.1 Sizes of Kick Plates
2 inch less than door width for single doors. Provide 10 inch kick plates for flush doors.
2.2.11 Door Stops and Silencers
BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for
each pair.
2.2.12 Thresholds
BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or silicone rubber insert in face of stop, for exterior
doors opening out, unless specified otherwise.
2.2.13 Weather Stripping Gasketing
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 139 of 367
BHMA A156.22. Provide the type and function designation where specified in paragraph
entitled "Hardware Schedule". Provide a set to include head and jamb seals. Air leakage of
weather stripped doors not to exceed 1.25 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door
area when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Provide weather stripping with one of the
following:
2.2.13.1 Extruded Aluminum Retainers
Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.050 inch wall thickness with vinyl, neoprene,
silicone rubber, or polyurethane inserts. Provide bronze anodized aluminum.
2.2.13.2 Interlocking Type
Zinc or bronze not less than 0.018 inch thick.
2.2.13.3 Spring Tension Type
Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0.008 inch thick.
2.2.14 Rain Drips
Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch thick, bronze anodized. Set drips in sealant and
fasten with stainless steel screws.
2.2.14.1 Door Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 5/8 inch projection. Align bottom with bottom edge of door.
2.2.14.2 Overhead Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection, with length equal to overall width of
door frame. Align bottom with door frame rabbet.
2.2.15 Special Tools
Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to service
and adjust hardware items.
2.3 FASTENERS
Provide fasteners of proper type, quality, size, quantity, and finish with hardware. Provide
stainless steel or nonferrous metal fasteners that are exposed to weather. Provide fasteners of
type necessary to accomplish a permanent installation.
2.4 FINISHES
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 140 of 367
BHMA A156.18. Provide hardware in BHMA 630 finish (satin stainless steel), unless specified
otherwise. Provide items not manufactured in stainless steel in BHMA 626 finish (satin
chromium plated) over brass or bronze, except aluminum paint finish for surface door closers.
Provide hinges for exterior doors in stainless steel with BHMA 630 finish or chromium plated
brass or bronze with BHMA 626 finish. Furnish exit devices in BHMA 626 finish in lieu of
BHMA 630 finish except where BHMA 630 is specified under paragraph entitled "Hardware
Sets". Match exposed parts of concealed closers to lock and door trim. Match hardware finish
for aluminum doors to the doors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation instructions. Provide
machine screws set in expansion shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry
surfaces. Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core construction. Provide
through bolts where necessary for satisfactory installation.
3.1.1 Weather Stripping Installation
Handle and install weather stripping to prevent damage. Provide full contact, weather-tight
seals. Operate doors without binding.
3.1.1.1 Stop-Applied Weather Stripping
Fasten in place with color-matched sheet metal screws not more than 9 inch on center after doors
and frames have been finish painted.
3.1.1.2 Interlocking Type Weather Stripping
Provide interlocking, self-adjusting type on heads and jambs and flexible hook type at sills. Nail
weather stripping to door one inch on center and to heads and jambs at 4 inch on center
3.1.1.3 Spring Tension Type Weather Stripping
Provide spring tension type on heads and jambs. Provide bronze nails with bronze, stainless
steel nails with stainless steel. Space nails not more than 1-1/2 inch on center.
3.1.2 Threshold Installation
Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb stops. Set thresholds in a
full bed of sealant and anchor to floor with cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in
expansion sleeves.
3.2 FIRE DOORS AND EXIT DOORS
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 141 of 367
Install hardware in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire doors, NFPA 101 for exit doors.
3.3 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
a. Kick Plates: Push side of single-acting doors.
b. Mop Plates: Bottom flush with bottom of door.
3.4 HARDWARE SETS
HW-1
3 EACH HINGES
1 EACH EXIT DEVICE
1 EACH CYLINDER
1 EACH CLOSER/STOP
1 EACH KICK PLATE
1 EACH THRESHOLD
1 SET WEATHERSTRIPPING/
RAIN DRIPS
2 EACH SILENCERS
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
A2111 NRP 4.5 INCHES X 4.5 INCHES 630
TYPE 1 F03 630
E19211 I.C. 626
C2021 PT, C, D, G & H 689xTBGN
J102 10 INCHES LDW 630
J35100 x LGT REQD
AS SPECIFIED
BHMA
L03011
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
A2111 NRP 4.5 INCHES X 4.5 INCHES 630
TYPE 1 F03 630
E19211 I.C. 626
C2021 PT, C, D, G & H 689xTBGN
J102 10 INCHES LDW 630
L03011
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
A2112 4.5 INCHES X 4.5 INCHES 630
4000 G-1 F82 630
C02011 OR 2021 PT4C 689xTBGN
J102 10 INCHES LDW 630
L02041 626
L03011
HW-2
3 EACH HINGES
1 EACH EXIT DEVICE
1 EACH CYLINDER
1 EACH CLOSER/STOP
1 EACH KICK PLATE
3 EACH SILENCERS
HW-3
3 EACH HINGES
1 EACH LOCK SET
1 EACH CLOSER
1 EACH KICK PLATE
1 EACH FLOOR STOP
3 EACH SILENCERS
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 142 of 367
HW-4
3 EACH HINGES
1 EACH PUSH PLATE
1 EACH PULL PLATE
1 EACH CLOSER
1 EACH KICK PLATE
1 EACH FLOOR STOP
3 EACH SILENCERS
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
A2112 4.5 INCHES X 4.5 INCHES 630
J301 630
J405 630
C02011 PT4C 689xTBGN
J102 10 INCHES x 2 INCHES LDW 630
L02041 626
L03011
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
BHMA
A2112 4.5 INCHES X 4.5 INCHES 630
4000 GRI F76 626
C02011 PT4C 689xTBGN
J102 10 INCHES LDW 630
L02041 626
L03011
HW-5
3 EACH HINGES
1 EACH PRIVACY SET
1 EACH CLOSER
1 EACH KICK PLATE
1 EACH FLOOR STOP
3 EACH SILENCERS
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 08 71 00 Page 143 of 367
SECTION 09 22 00
SUPPORTS FOR GYPSUM BOARD
01/08
PART 1 GENERAL
Not used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide steel materials for metal support systems with galvanized coating ASTM A 653/A
653M, G-60; aluminum coating ASTM A 463/A 463M, T1-25; or a 55-percent aluminum-zinc
coating.
2.1.1 Materials for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
2.1.1.1 Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C 645.
2.1.1.2 Nonload-Bearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 645, but not thinner than 0.0329 inch minimum thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Systems for Attachment of Gypsum Wallboard
3.1.1.1 Furred Ceiling Systems
ASTM C 754, except provide framing members 16 inches o.c. unless indicated otherwise.
3.1.1.2 Non-loadbearing Wall Framing and Furring
ASTM C 754, except as indicated otherwise.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
Provide framing members which will be covered by finish materials such as wallboard, plaster,
or ceramic tile set in a mortar setting bed, within the following limits:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 22 00 Page 144 of 367
a. Layout of walls and partitions: 1/4 inch from intended position;
b. Plates and runners: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a straight line;
c. Studs: 1/4 inch in 8 feet out of plumb, not cumulative; and
d. Face of framing members: 1/4 inch in 8 feet from a true plane.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 22 00 Page 145 of 367
SECTION 09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-07 Certificates
Asbestos Free Materials; G
Certify that gypsum board types and joint treating materials do not contain asbestos.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Material Safety Data Sheets
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to specifications, standards and requirements specified. Provide gypsum board types,
and joint treating materials manufactured from asbestos free materials only. Submit Material
Safety Data Sheets and manufacturer maintenance instructions for gypsum materials including
adhesives.
2.1.1 Gypsum Board
ASTM C 36/C 36M and ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
2.1.1.1 Type X (Special Fire-Resistant)
48 inch wide, 5/8 inch thick, tapered or tapered and featured edges.
2.1.2 Joint Treatment Materials
ASTM C 475/C 475M. Use all purpose joint and texturing compound containing inert fillers and
natural binders, including lime compound. Pre-mixed compounds shall be free of antifreeze,
vinyl adhesives, preservatives, biocides and other slow releasing compounds.
2.1.2.1 Embedding Compound
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 29 00 Page 146 of 367
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum board joints and
compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.2.2 Finishing or Topping Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use as a finishing compound.
2.1.2.3 All-Purpose Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound
and compatible with tape, substrate and fasteners.
2.1.2.4 Setting or Hardening Type Compound
Specifically formulated and manufactured for use with fiber glass mesh tape.
2.1.2.5 Joint Tape
Use cross-laminated or tapered edge tape recommended by the manufacturer. Paper and
fiberglass joint tape are not permitted.
2.1.3 Fasteners
2.1.3.1 Screws
ASTM C 1002, Type "S" steel drill screws. ASTM C 954 steel drill screws for fastening
gypsum board to steel framing members 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2.1.4 Accessories
ASTM C 1047. Fabricate from corrosion protected steel or plastic designed for intended use.
Accessories manufactured with paper flanges are not acceptable. Flanges shall be free of dirt,
grease, and other materials that may adversely affect bond of joint treatment. Provide
prefinished or job decorated materials.
2.1.5 Water
Provide clean, fresh, and potable water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.1.1 Framing and Furring
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 29 00 Page 147 of 367
Verify that framing and furring are securely attached and of sizes and spacing to provide a
suitable substrate to receive gypsum board. Do not proceed with work until framing and furring
are acceptable for application of gypsum board.
3.2 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA
216 and the requirements specified.
3.2.1 Application of Gypsum Board to Steel Framing and Furring
Apply in accordance with ASTM C 840, System VIII or GA 216.
3.2.2 Floating Interior Angles
Minimize framing by floating corners with single studs and drywall clips. Locate the attachment
fasteners adjacent to ceiling and wall intersections in accordance with ASTM C 840, System XII
or GA 216, for single-ply and two-ply applications of gypsum board to framing.
3.2.3 Control Joints
Install expansion and contraction joints in ceilings and walls in accordance with ASTM C 840,
System XIII or GA 216. Fill control joints between studs in fire-rated construction with fire
safing insulation to match the fire-rating of construction.
3.3 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD
Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and GA 216.
3.3.1 Uniform Surface
Wherever gypsum board is to receive eggshell, semigloss or gloss paint finish, or where severe,
up or down lighting conditions occur, finish gypsum wall surface in accordance to GA 214 Level
5. In accordance with GA 214 Level 5, apply a thin skim coat of joint compound to the entire
gypsum board surface, after the two-coat joint and fastener treatment is complete and dry.
3.4 SEALING
Seal openings around pipes, fixtures, and other items projecting through gypsum board and
cementitious backer units as specified in Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS. Apply material
with exposed surface flush with gypsum board.
3.5 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
Wherever fire-rated construction is indicated, provide materials and application methods,
including types and spacing of fasteners, wall and ceiling framing in accordance with the
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 29 00 Page 148 of 367
specifications contained in UL Fire Resistance for the fire ratings indicated. Joints of fire-rated
gypsum board enclosures shall be closed and sealed in accordance with UL test requirements or
GA requirements. Seal penetrations through rated partitions and ceilings tight in accordance
with tested systems.
3.6 PATCHING
Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform appearance, ready to receive
finishes.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 29 00 Page 149 of 367
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Resilient Flooring Products; G
Manufacturer's descriptive data.
SD-04 Samples
Resilient Flooring Products; G
Samples of manufacturer's standard colors for selection including color and type of
flooring, base, mouldings, and accessories. Provide a minimum 2-1/2 by 4 inch
flooring samples.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Surface Preparation; G
Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all flooring materials, including
preparation of substrate, and recommended adhesives.
1.2 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a one
year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
Conform to ASTM F 1066 Class 2, (through pattern tile), Composition 1, asbestos-free, 12 inch
square and 1/8 inch thick. Provide color and pattern uniformly distributed throughout the
thickness of the tile. Tile shall contain a minimum of 90 percent recycled material.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 65 00 Page 150 of 367
2.2 WALL BASE
Conform to ASTM F 1861, Type TP (thermoplastic rubber), or Type TV (thermoplastic vinyl),
Style B (coved - installed with resilient flooring). Provide 4 inch high and a minimum 1/8 inch
thick wall base. Provide preformed corners in matching height, shape, and color.
2.3 MOULDING
Provide tapered mouldings of vinyl or rubber and types as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for both edges and transitions of flooring materials specified. Provide vertical lip
on moulding of maximum 1/4 inch. Provide bevel change in level between 1/4 and 1/2 inch with
a slope no greater than 1:2.
2.4 ADHESIVES
Provide adhesives for flooring, base and accessories as recommended by the manufacturer and
comply with local indoor air quality standards.
2.5 POLISH/FINISH
Provide polish finish as recommended by the manufacturer and conform to ASTM D 4078 for
polish.
2.6 CAULKING AND SEALANTS
Provide caulking and sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS.
2.7 MANUFACTURER'S COLOR, PATTERN AND TEXTURE
Provide color, pattern and texture for resilient flooring products. Provide flooring in any one
continuous area or replacement of damaged flooring in continuous area from same production
run with same shade and pattern.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.2 PLACING VINYL COMPOSITION TILES
Install tile flooring and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
3.3 PLACING MOULDING
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 65 00 Page 151 of 367
Provide moulding where flooring termination is higher than the adjacent finished flooring and at
transitions between different flooring materials. When required, locate moulding under door
centerline. Moulding is not required at doorways where thresholds are provided. Secure
moulding with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Prepare and apply adhesives in
accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
3.4 PLACING WALL BASE
Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Prepare and
apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions.
3.5 CLEANING
Clean flooring as recommended in accordance with manufacturer's printed maintenance
instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
From the time of installation until acceptance, protect flooring from damage as recommended by
the flooring manufacturer. Remove and replace flooring which becomes damaged, loose,
broken, or curled and wall base which is not tight to wall or securely adhered.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 65 00 Page 152 of 367
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PROVIDE PAINTING AND COATINGS:
1.2 APPLICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
1.2.1 Contractor Qualification
Submit evidence that key personnel have successfully performed surface preparation and
application of coatings on a minimum of three similar projects within the past three years.
1.3 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number,
designation name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of
manufacture, manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any
warnings and special precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints
shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground,
under cover, with sufficient ventilation to prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at
temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.
1.4 COLOR SELECTION
Submit manufacturer's standard color chips for color selections.
1.5 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED
1.5.1 Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless indicated
otherwise.
a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by
removal of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.
b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory
finished surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.
c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 153 of 367
1.5.1.1 Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces.
1.5.1.2 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces.
1.5.2 Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed ductwork, machinery,
and equipment fixed in place.
b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above
suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, elevator shafts and
chases.
c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing coated surfaces.
e. Hardware, fittings, and other factory finished items.
1.5.3 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior new surfaces.
a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items unless
indicated otherwise.
(1) Exposed piping, conduit, and ductwork;
(2) Supports, hangers, air grilles, and registers;
(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
1.5.4 Exterior Painting of Site Work Items
Field coat the following items:
New Surfaces
Existing Surfaces
a. Steel Pipe Bollards
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 154 of 367
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the coating specifications and standards referenced in PART 3. Submit
manufacturer's technical data sheets for specified coatings and solvents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect,
hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures,
public and private property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with
surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved
shall reinstall removed items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original
condition and repair damaged items.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, disintegrated coatings, and other foreign
matter and substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate before
application of paint or surface treatments. Oil and grease shall be removed prior to mechanical
cleaning. Cleaning shall be programmed so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces. Exposed ferrous metals such as nail heads on or in contact with surfaces
to be painted with water-thinned paints, shall be spot-primed with a suitable corrosion-inhibitive
primer capable of preventing flash rusting and compatible with the coating specified for the
adjacent areas.
3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
3.3.1 Ferrous Surfaces
a. Ferrous Surfaces including Shop-coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust,
Mill Scale and Other Foreign Substances: Solvent clean or detergent wash in
accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease. Where shop coat is missing or
damaged, clean according to SSPC SP 3.
3.3.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, the requirements are stated in SSPC SP 2 and SSPC SP 3. As a visual
reference, cleaned surfaces shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3.
3.3.3 Galvanized Surfaces
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 155 of 367
a. Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products: Clean with solvent,
steam, or non-alkaline detergent solution in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If the
galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely
removed by brush-off abrasive blast. New galvanized steel to be coated shall not be
"passivated" or "stabilized" If the absence of hexavalent stain inhibitors is not
documented, test as described in ASTM D 2092, Appendix X2, and remove by one of
the methods described therein.
b. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting: Water
jetting to SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20
percent coating deterioration and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as
recommended by the coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.
3.3.4 Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
Aluminum and aluminum-alloy, lead, copper, and other nonferrous metal surfaces.
a. Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild
non-alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminants.
3.3.5 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, ASTM D 235. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloths.
3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE
3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry
a. Curing: Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be allowed to cure at least 30 days before
painting, except concrete slab on grade, which shall be allowed to cure 90 days before
painting.
b. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.
(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2
cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cuphousehold detergent, and 4 quarts of warm water.
Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Wash existing coated surfaces with a suitable
detergent and rinse thoroughly. For large areas, water blasting may be used.
(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash surfaces with a solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium
phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1 quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite
solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
3.4.2 Gypsum Board
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 156 of 367
a. Surface Cleaning: Gypsum board shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing
with a soft brush, rubbing with a dry cloth, or vacuum-cleaning prior to application of
the first coat material. A damp cloth or sponge may be used if paint will be waterbased.
b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks, holes, surface
irregularities, and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound
and sand smooth.
3.5 APPLICATION
3.5.1 Coating Application
Painting practices shall comply with applicable federal, state and local laws enacted to insure
compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC
PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified herein.
At the time of application, paint shall show no signs of deterioration. Uniform suspension of
pigments shall be maintained during application.
Unless otherwise specified or recommended by the paint manufacturer, paint may be applied by
brush, roller, or spray. Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. Rollers for applying
paints and enamels shall be of a type designed for the coating to be applied and the surface to be
coated. Wear protective clothing and respirators when applying oil-based paints or using spray
equipment with any paints.
Paints, except water-thinned types, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of
moisture as determined by sight or touch.
Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and open spaces. Special attention shall
be given to insure that all edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness
equal to that of adjacent painted surfaces.
Each coat of paint shall be applied so dry film shall be of uniform thickness and free from runs,
drops, ridges, waves, pinholes or other voids, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture,
and finish. Hiding shall be complete.
Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom
clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material.
a. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer,
to permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each
coat in specified condition to receive next coat.
b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry
more than 30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 157 of 367
subsequent coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if
primers or intermediate coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by
manufacturers of subsequent coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat
or surface completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of
successive coats.
c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps,
brush marks, and variations in colors.
3.5.2 Mixing and Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is mandatory to
suit surface, temperature, weather conditions, application methods, or for the type of paint being
used. Obtain written permission from the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative to use
thinners. The written permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
When thinning is allowed, paints shall be thinned immediately prior to application with not more
than 1 pint of suitable thinner per gallon. The use of thinner shall not relieve the Contractor from
obtaining complete hiding, full film thickness, or required gloss. Thinning shall not cause the
paint to exceed limits on volatile organic compounds. Paints of different manufacturers shall not
be mixed.
3.5.3 Coating Systems
a. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the respective specifications
listed in the following Tables:
Table
Division 4. Exterior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5. Exterior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 4. Interior Concrete Masonry Units Paint Table
Division 5. Interior Metal, Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Paint Table
Division 9: Interior Gypsum Board Paint Table
b. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers, varnishes, enamels,
undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat
unless specified otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified, refers to
the minimum dry film thickness.
c. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces which have not been
specified, the same as surfaces having similar conditions of exposure.
3.6 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 158 of 367
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 5 for Exterior and Interior.
a. Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that surface is cleaned, to surfaces
that meet all specified surface preparation requirements at time of application.
b. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use one coat of specified primer on metal
surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection.
c. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and damaged coatings to protect
from rusting prior to applying field primer.
d. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply MPI 101, 1.5 mils DFT
immediately prior to application of epoxy or urethane coatings.
e. Pipes and Tubing: The semitransparent film applied to some pipes and tubing at the mill
is not to be considered a shop coat, but shall be overcoated with the specified ferrousmetal primer prior to application of finish coats.
f. Exposed Nails, Screws, Fasteners, and Miscellaneous Ferrous Surfaces. On surfaces to
be coated with water thinned coatings, spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous
metal with latex primer MPI 107.
3.7 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES
Apply coatings of Tables in Division 4 and 9 for Exterior and Interior.
3.8 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of moving
components, including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with operable sash,
for inspection by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Perform this
demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have elapsed and prior to
invoicing for final payment.
3.9 PAINT TABLES
All DFT's are minimum values.
3.9.1 EXTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 4: EXTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE
A. New concrete masonry on uncoated surface:
1. Latex
New; MPI EXT 4.2A-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI REX 4.2A-G5 (Semigloss)
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 159 of 367
Block Filler:
Primer:
MPI 4
N/A
System DFT: 11 mils
Intermediate:
MPI 11
Topcoat:
MPI 11
DIVISION 5: EXTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. New Steel
1. Alkyd
New; MPI EXT 5.1Q-G6 (Gloss) / Existing; MPI REX 5.1D-G6
Primer:
Intermediate:
Topcoat:
MPI 23
MPI 9
MPI 9
System DFT: 5.25 mils
EXTERIOR GALVANIZED SURFACES
B. New Galvanized surfaces:
1. Cementitious primer / Latex
MPI EXT 5.3A-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer:
Intermediate:
Topcoat:
MPI 26
MPI 11
MPI 11
System DFT: 4.5 mils
EXTERIOR SURFACES, OTHER METALS (NON-FERROUS)
I. Aluminum, aluminum alloy and other miscellaneous non-ferrous metal items
not otherwise specified except hot metal surfaces, roof surfaces, and new
prefinished equipment. Match surrounding finish:
1. Alkyd
MPI EXT 5.4F-G6 (Gloss)
Primer:
Intermediate:
MPI 95
MPI 9
System DFT: 5 mils
Topcoat:
MPI 9
3.9.2 INTERIOR PAINT TABLES
DIVISION 4: INTERIOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PAINT TABLE
A. Concrete masonry:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex
MPI INT 4.2D-G3 (Eggshell)
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 160 of 367
Filler
Primer:
MPI 4
N/A
System DFT: 11 mils
Intermediate:
MPI 139
Topcoat:
MPI 139
Fill all holes in masonry surface
B. Concrete masonry units in toilets, restrooms, shower
areas, and other high humidity areas unless otherwise specified:
1. Waterborne Light Industrial Coating
MPI INT 4.2K-G3(Eggshell)
Filler:
Primer:
Intermediate:
MPI 4
N/A
MPI 151
System DFT: 11 mils
Topcoat:
MPI 151
Fill all holes in masonry surface
DIVISION 5: INTERIOR METAL, FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS PAINT TABLE
INTERIOR STEEL / FERROUS SURFACES
A. Metal:
1. High Performance Architectural Latex
MPI INT 5.1R-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer:
Intermediate:
Topcoat:
MPI 79
MPI 141
MPI 141
System DFT: 5 mils
B. Metal in toilets, restrooms, shower areas, and other high-humidity areas not otherwise specified
except floors, hot metal surfaces, and new prefinished equipment:
1. Alkyd
MPI INT 5.1E-G6 (Gloss)
Primer:
Intermediate:
MPI 79
MPI 48
System DFT: 5.25 mils
Topcoat:
MPI 48
DIVISION 9: INTERIOR PLASTER, GYPSUM BOARD, TEXTURED SURFACES PAINT
TABLE
A. Wallboard not otherwise specified:
1. Latex
New; MPI INT 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell) / Existing; RIN 9.2A-G3 (Eggshell)
Primer:
Intermediate:
Topcoat:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 161 of 367
MPI 50
MPI 52
System DFT: 4 mils
MPI 52
B. Wallboard in toilets, restrooms, shower areas, and other high humidity areas not otherwise
specified.
1. Alkyd
New; MPI INT 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss) / Existing; MPI RIN 9.2C-G5 (Semigloss)
Primer:
Intermediate:
Topcoat:
MPI 50
MPI 47
MPI 47
System DFT: 4 mils
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 09 90 00 Page 162 of 367
SECTION 10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Toilet Partition System and Hardware; G
Manufacturer's technical data and catalog cuts including installation and cleaning
instructions.
SD-04 Samples
Colors and Finishes; G
Manufacturer's standard color charts and color samples.
1.2 WARRANTY
Provide Certification or warranties that toilet partitions will be free of defects in materials,
fabrication, finish, and installation and will remain so for a period of not less than 1 year after
completion.
1.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Take field measurements prior to the preparation of drawing and fabrication to ensure proper fits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Anchoring Devices and Fasteners
Provide steel anchoring devices and fasteners hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, in
conformance with ASTM A 385 and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Conceal all galvanized anchoring
devices.
2.1.2 Brackets
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 21 13 Page 163 of 367
Wall brackets must be two-ear panel brackets, T-style, 1-inch stock. Provide stirrup style panelto-pilaster brackets.
2.1.3 Hardware and Fittings
2.1.3.1 General Requirements
Hardware for the toilet partition system must conform to CID A-A-60003 for the specified type
and style of partitions. Provide hardware finish highly resistant to alkalies, urine, and other
common toilet room acids. Devices and hinges must be chrome-plated steel or stainless steel.
a. Conform cold-rolled sheet steel to ASTM A 336/A 336M, commercial quality.
b. Zinc-base alloy must conform to ASTM B 86, Alloy AC41-A.
c. Brass must conform to ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy C26800.
d. Corrosion-resistant steel must conform to ASTM A 167, Type 302 or 304.
2.1.3.2 Finishes
a. Chrome plating must conform to ASTM B 456.
b. Finish must conform to SAE AMS-QQ-C-320, Class I, Type I or II.
c. Corrosion-resistant steel must have a No. 4 finish.
d. Exposed fasteners must match the hardware and fittings.
2.1.4 Door Hardware
2.1.4.1 Hinges
Hinges must be self-lubricating with the indicated swing. Hinges must be the surface-mounted
type.
2.1.4.2 Latch and Pull
Latch and pull must be a combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper equipped with
emergency access.
2.1.4.3 Coat Hooks
Coat hooks must be combination units with hooks and rubber tipped pins.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 21 13 Page 164 of 367
2.2 PARTITION PANELS AND DOORS
Partition panels and doors must be not less than 1 inch thick.
2.2.1 Toilet Enclosures
Conform toilet enclosures to CID A-A-60003, Type I, Style A, floor supported. Furnish width,
length, and height of toilet enclosures as shown. Finish surface of panels must be solid
polyethylene, Finish 5; graffiti resistant.
2.3 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS
Provide anchoring device standard with the partition manufacturer including devices for securing
to the floor, threaded rods, and leveling-adjustment nuts. Trim piece at the floor must be
minimum 3 inch high and fabricated from not less than 0.030 inch thick corrosion-resistant steel.
2.4 PILASTER SHOES
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal floor-mounted anchorage. Pilaster shoes shall be stainless
steel or one piece molded HDPE. Height shall be minimum 3 inches.
2.5 HARDWARE
Hardware for the toilet partition system shall conform to CID A-A-60003 for the specified type
and style of partitions. Hardware shall be pre-drilled by manufacturer. Hardware finish shall be
highly resistant to alkalies, urine, and other common toilet room acids. Hardware shall include:
chrome plated non ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning;
nylon bearings; door latch, strike and keeper with rubber bumper; and cast alloy chrome plated
coat hook and bumper. Screws and bolts shall be stainless steel, tamper proof type. Wall
mounting brackets shall be continuous, full height, stainless steel, in accordance with toilet
compartment manufacturer's instructions. Floor-mounted anchorage shall consist of corrosionresistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at
pilasters for structural connection to floor.
2.6 COLORS AND FINISHES
2.6.1 Colors
Provide manufacturer's standard color charts for color of finishes for toilet partition system
components. Color of pilaster shoes shall match the core of solid plastic compartments and
screens.
2.6.2 Finish No. 5
Provide solid plastic fabricated of polymer resins (polyethylene) formed under high pressure
rendering a single component section not less than one inch thick. Colors must extend
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 21 13 Page 165 of 367
throughout the panel thickness. Provide exposed finish surfaces: smooth, waterproof, nonabsorbent, and resistant to staining and marking with pens, pencils, or other writing devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to
receive work. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. Verify correct location of built in
framing, anchorage, and bracing. Report in writing to Contracting Officer and the Contracting
Officer’s Technical Representative, prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory
execution of the work of this section. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level, with the panels centered between the fixtures.
Provide a panel clearance of not more than 1/2 inch and secure the panels to walls and pilasters
with not less than two wall brackets attached near the top and bottom of the panel. Locate wall
brackets so that holes for wall bolts occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure Panels to pilasters
with brackets matching the wall brackets. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations.
Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. Install adjacent components for consistency of line
and plane. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align
hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors.
a. Secure panels to hollow plastered walls with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20
screws of the length required for the wall thickness. Toggle bolts must have a load-carrying
strength of not less than 600 pounds per anchor.
b. Secure panels to ceramic tile on hollow plastered walls or hollow concrete-masonry walls
with toggle bolts using not less than 1/4-20 screws of the length required for the wall
thickness. Toggle bolts must have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
c. Secure panels to solid masonry or concrete with lead or brass expansion shields designed
for use with not less than 1/4-20 screws, with a shield length of not less than 1-1/2 inch.
Expansion shields must have a load-carrying strength of not less than 600 pounds per
anchor.
3.3 FLOOR-ANCHORED PARTITIONS
Secure pilasters to the floor with the anchorage device specified. Make all leveling devices
readily accessible for leveling, plumbing, and tightening the installation. Tops of doors must be
level with tops of pilasters when doors are in a closed position. Expansion shields must have a
minimum 2-inch penetration into the concrete slab.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 21 13 Page 166 of 367
3.4 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
After completion of the installation, make final adjustments to the pilaster-leveling devices, door
hardware, and other working parts of the partition assembly. Doors shall have a uniform vertical
edge clearance of approximately 3/16 inch and shall rest open at approximately 30 degrees when
unlatched.
3.5 CLEANING
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces soiled as a result of the work, in an
approved manner compliant with the manufacturers recommended cleaning and protection from
damage procedures until accepted. Remove all equipment, tools, surplus materials, and work
debris from the site.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 21 13 Page 167 of 367
SECTION 10 28 13
TOILET ACCESSORIES
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Finishes; G
Accessory Items; G
Manufacturer's descriptive data and catalog cuts indicating materials of construction,
fasteners proposed for use for each type of wall construction, mounting instructions,
operation instructions, and cleaning instructions.
SD-07 Certificates
Accessory Items
Certificate for each type of accessory specified, attesting that the items meet the
specified requirements.
1.2 WARRANTY
Provide manufacturer's standard performance guarantees or warranties that extend beyond a 1
year period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
Provide toilet accessories shall be provided where indicated. Provide each accessory item shall
be complete with the necessary mounting plates of sturdy construction with corrosion resistant
surface.
2.1.1 Anchors and Fasteners
Provide anchors and fasteners capable of developing a restraining force commensurate with the
strength of the accessory to be mounted and suited for use with the supporting construction.
Provide tamperproof design or oval heads exposed fasteners with finish to match the accessory.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 28 13 Page 168 of 367
2.1.2 Finishes
Except where noted otherwise, provide the following finishes on metal:
Metal
_____
Finish
______
Stainless steel
No. 4 satin finish
Carbon steel, copper alloy,
and brass
Chromium plated, bright
2.2 ACCESSORY ITEMS
Conform to the requirements for accessory items specified below.
2.2.1 Mirrors, Glass (MG)
Provide Type I transparent flat type, Class 1-clear glass for mirrors. Glazing Quality q1 1/4 inch
thick conforming to ASTM C 1036. Coat glass on one surface with silver coating, copper
protective coating, and mirror backing paint.
2.2.2 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle (PTDWR)
Provide recessed or semi-recessed dispenser/receptacle with a minimum capacity of 400 sheets
of C-fold, single-fold, or quarter-fold towel. Design waste receptacle to be locked in unit and
removable for service. Provide tumbler key locking mechanism. Provide waste receptacle
minimum capacity of 12 gallons. Fabricate a minimum 0.30 inch stainless steel welded
construction unit with all exposed surfaces having a satin finish. Provide waste receptacle that
accepts reusable liner standard for unit manufacturer.
2.2.3 Sanitary Napkin Disposer (SND)
Construct a Type 304 stainless steel sanitary napkin disposal with removable leak-proof
receptacle for disposable liners. Provide fifty disposable liners of the type standard with the
manufacturer. Retain receptacle in cabinet by tumbler lock. Provide disposer with a door for
inserting disposed napkins, surface mounted.
2.2.4 Shower Curtain Rods (SCR)
Provide Type 304 stainless steel shower curtain rods 1-1/4 inch OD by 0.049 inch minimum
straight to meet installation conditions.
2.2.5 Soap Dispenser (SD)
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 28 13 Page 169 of 367
Provide soap dispenser surface mounted, liquid type consisting of a vertical Type 304 stainless
steel tank with holding capacity of 40 fluid ounces with a corrosion-resistant all-purpose valve
that dispenses liquid soaps, lotions, detergents and antiseptic soaps.
2.2.6 Soap and Grab Bar Combination, Recessed (SGR)
Provide recessed type, Type 304 stainless steel soap and grab bar combination satin finish.
2.2.7 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (TTD)
Furnish Type II - surface mounted toilet tissue holder with two rolls of standard tissue mounted
horizontally or stacked vertically. Provide stainless steel, satin finish cabinet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide the same finish for the surfaces of fastening devices exposed after installation as the
attached accessory. Provide oval exposed screw heads. Install accessories at the location and
height indicated. Protect exposed surfaces of accessories with strippable plastic or by other
means until the installation is accepted. After acceptance of accessories, remove and dispose of
strippable plastic protection. Coordinate accessory manufacturer's mounting details with other
trades as their work progresses. After installation, thoroughly clean exposed surfaces and restore
damaged work to its original condition or replace with new work.
3.1.1 Recessed Accessories
Fasten accessories with wood screws to studs, blocking or rough frame in wood construction.
Set anchors in mortar in masonry construction. Fasten to metal studs or framing with sheet metal
screws in metal construction.
3.1.2 Surface Mounted Accessories
Mount on concealed backplates, unless specified otherwise. Conceal fasteners on accessories
without backplates. Install accessories with sheet metal screws or wood screws in lead-lined
braided jute, teflon or neoprene sleeves, or lead expansion shields, or with toggle bolts or other
approved fasteners as required by the construction. Install backplates in the same manner, or
provide with lugs or anchors set in mortar, as required by the construction. Fasten accessories
mounted on gypsum board and plaster walls without solid backing into the metal or wood studs
or to solid wood blocking secured between wood studs, or to metal backplates secured to metal
studs.
3.2 CLEANING
Clean material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use alkaline or
abrasive agents. Take precautions to avoid scratching or marring exposed surfaces.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 28 13 Page 170 of 367
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 28 13 Page 171 of 367
SECTION 10 44 16
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
06/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog and warranty data for the following items:
Fire Extinguishers
Accessories
Wall Brackets
Replacement Parts
SD-07 Certificates
Submit Certificates showing the following:
Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with local codes and regulations.
Certification that Fire Extinguishers comply with OSHA, NFPA, and UL
requirements.
Submit Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag on each extinguisher.
Guarantee that Fire Extinguishers are free of defects in materials, fabrication, finish,
and installation and that they will remain so for a period of not less than 2 years after
completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPES
Fire Extinguishers must conform to NFPA 10 Quantity and placement must comply with the
applicable sections of IFC 1414, IFC 906, NFPA 1, NFPA 101, and 29 CFR 1910.157.
Provide dry chemical type fire extinguishers compliant with UL 299.
2.2 MATERIAL
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 44 16 Page 172 of 367
Extinguisher shell must be corrosion-resistant steel or aluminum.
2.3 SIZE
Extinguishers must be 20 pounds.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
Safety release
Pressure gage
2.5 WALL BRACKETS
Provide wall-hook fire extinguisher wall brackets.
Wall bracket and Accessories must be as approved.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install Fire Extinguishers where indicated on the drawings. Verify exact locations prior to
installation.
Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for all installations.
Provide extinguishers which are fully charged and ready for operation upon installation. Provide
extinguishers complete with Manufacturer's Warranty with Inspection Tag attached.
3.2 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.2.1 Repairing
Remove and replace damaged and unacceptable portions of completed work with new work at no
additional cost to the Government.
Provide Replacement Parts list indicating specified items replacement part, replacement cost, and
name, address and contact for replacement parts distributor.
3.2.2 Cleaning
Clean all surfaces of the work, and adjacent surfaces which are soiled as a result of the work.
Remove from the site all construction equipment, tools, surplus materials and rubbish resulting
from the work.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 44 16 Page 173 of 367
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 10 44 16 Page 174 of 367
SECTION 13 34 19
METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
01/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 Structural Performance
Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within the limits and conditions indicated.
1.1.1.1 Engineering
Design metal building systems conforming to procedures described in MBMA MBSM.
1.1.1.2 Design Loads
Conform to the requirements of MBMA MBSM, ASCE 7-05, and the building code applicable to
the project geographical location.
1.1.1.3 Live Loads
Include all vertical loads induced by the building occupancy indicated on the drawings, as well
as loads induced by maintenance workers, materials and equipment for roof live loads.
1.1.1.4 Roof Snow Loads
Include vertical loads induced by the weight of snow, as determined by 50 year MeanRecurrence-Interval (MRI) ground snow load at the project site of Atlantic Beach, NC. Allow for
unbalanced and drift loads.
1.1.1.5 Wind Loads
Include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding to a 10-year, meanrecurrence interval at Project site of Atlantic Beach, NC.
1.1.1.6 Collateral Loads
Include additional dead loads other than the weight of metal building system for permanent items
such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and ceilings.
1.1.1.7 Auxiliary Loads
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 175 of 367
Include dynamic live loads, such as those generated by cranes and materials-handling equipment
indicated on detail drawings.
1.1.1.8 Load Combinations
Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load
combinations as required by MBMA MBSM, ASCE 7-05, and the building code applicable to
the project location.
1.1.1.9 Deflection Limits
Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following:
a. Purlins and Rafters; vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
b. Girts; horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
c. Metal Roof Panels; vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span.
d. Metal Wall Panels; horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span.
Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and
construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. Provide metal panel assemblies
capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 1592.
1.1.2 Seismic Performance
Design and engineer metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE 7-05, AISC 341, and the applicable portions of the
building code in the geographic area where the construction will take place.
1.1.3 Thermal Movements
Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening
of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss as follows:
a. Temperature Change (Range); 120 F, ambient; 180 F, material surfaces.
1.1.4 Thermal Performance
Provide metal building manufacturers standard fiberglass insulation blankets with facing under
the roof panels to control condensation.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 176 of 367
1.1.5 Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86
lbf/sq.ft.
1.1.6 Water Penetration for Metal Wall Panels
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure
of 20 percent of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq.ft.. and not
more than 12 lbf/sq. ft.
1.1.7 Wind-Uplift Resistance
Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
ASTM DEF applies to this definition paragraph.
a. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of
frame) for interior bays, and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame
measured normal to end wall (outside face of end-wall girt) for end bays.
b. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing
from end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt).
c. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to main framing from
sidewall to sidewall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt).
d. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from
lowest level of connecting area of a column and a rafter frame or knee).
e. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the line along the sidewall
formed by intersection of the planes of the roof and wall).
f. Clear Height under Structure: Vertical dimension from finished floor to lowest point of
any part of primary or secondary structure, not including crane supports, located
within clear span.
g. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA "Metal Building Systems Manual" for
definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in
this Section or in referenced standards.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 177 of 367
General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard
mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of
withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary
framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements
indicated.
a. Provide metal building system of size and with spacing, slopes, and spans indicated.
1.3.1 Primary Frame Type
a. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.
1.3.2 Fixed End-Wall Framing
Provide manufacturer's standard fixed end wall, for buildings not required to be expandable.
1.3.3 Secondary Frame Type
Provide manufacturer's standard purlins and joists with flush-framed and exterior-framed
(bypass) girts.
1.3.4 Eave Height
Manufacturer's standard height with a minimum 22 foot eave height, as indicated by nominal
height on Drawings.
1.3.5 Bay Spacing
Bay Spacing must be as indicated on drawings.
1.3.6 Roof Slope
Roof slope must be 1 inch per 12 inches manufacturer's standard for frame type required.
1.3.7 Roof System
Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-rib, standing-seam, trapezoidal-rib standing-seam or
lap-seam metal roof panels with insulation.
1.3.8 Exterior Wall System
Provide manufacturer's standard field-assembled, insulated metal wall panels.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 178 of 367
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Manufacturer's Qualifications; G
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Detail Drawings; G
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's catalog data; G
SD-04 Samples
Manufacturer's color charts and chips,4 by 4 inches; G
SD-05 Design Data
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature; G
Manufacturer's building design analysis; G
SD-06 Test Reports
test reports; G
Coatings and base metals; G
Factory Color Finish Performance Requirements; G
SD-07 Certificates
system components ; G
Qualification of Manufacturer; G
Qualification of Erector; G
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation of Roof and Wall panels; G
shipping, handling, and storage; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 179 of 367
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Manufacturer's Warranty; G
Contractor's Warranty for Installation; G
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The representative must have authorization from manufacturer to approve field changes and be
thoroughly familiar with the products, erection of structural framing and installation of roof and
wall panels in the geographical area where construction will take place.
1.5.2 Manufacturer's Qualifications
Metal building system manufacturer must have a minimum of five (5) years experience as a
quailed manufacturer of metal building systems and accessory products and a member of
MBMA.
Provide engineering services by an authorized currently licensed engineer in the geographical
area where construction will take place, having a minimum of four (4) years experience as an
engineer knowledgeable in building design analysis, protocols and procedures for the "Metal
Building Systems Manual" (MBMA MBSM); ASCE 7-05, the building code in the geographic
area where the construction will take place and ASTM E 1592.
Provide certified engineering calculations using the products submitted for:
a. Roof and Wall Wind Loads with basic wind speed, exposure category, co-efficient,
importance factor, designate type of facility, negative pressures for each zone,
methods and requirements of attachment.
b. Roof Dead and Live Loads
c. Collateral Loads
d. Foundation Loads
e. Roof Snow Load
1.5.3 Qualification of Erection Contractor
An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and must be approved and certified by the
metal building system manufacturer.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 180 of 367
1.5.4 Single Source
Obtain primary and secondary components and structural framing members, each type of metal
roof, wall and liner panel assemblies, clips, closures and other accessories from the standard
products of the single source from a single manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the
intended use.
1.5.5 Welding
Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS A5.1/A5.1M, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, and
AWS D1.3/D1.3M."
1.5.6 Structural Steel
Comply with AISC 325, AISC 350, and AISC 360, for design requirements and allowable
stresses.
1.5.7 Cold-Formed Steel
Comply with AISC/AISI 121 and AISI SG03-3 for design requirements and allowable stresses.
1.5.8 Surface-Burning Characteristics
Provide metal panels having insulation and vapor barrier material with the following surfaceburning characteristics as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency showing:
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.5.9 Fabrication
Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles with dimensional and structural
requirements
Provide metal panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel. Aluminum and aluminum-alloy sheet and plate must conform to ASTM B 209.
Fabricate metal panel side laps with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will seal weather-tight
and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 181 of 367
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA 1793 that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated:
a. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
b. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal
with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
c. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
d. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.
e. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by
SMACNA or by metal building system manufacturer for application, but not less than
thickness of metal being secured.
1.5.10 Finishes
Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
1.6 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
1.6.1 Delivery
Package and deliver components, sheets, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to
be damaged or deformed and protected during transportation and handling.
Stack and store metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Store
in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. Do not store metal wall
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panel for entire period up to metal panel
installation.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction to minimize ultraviolet exposure.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 182 of 367
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Weather Limitations
Proceed with installation preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing panel system or building.
1.7.2 Field Measurements
1.7.2.1 Established Dimensions for Foundations
Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, established foundation
dimensions, and proceed with fabricating structural framing. Do not proceed without verifying
field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage
dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7.2.2 Established Dimensions for Metal Panels
Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing
and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field measurements,
or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building
dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
1.7.2.3 Verification Record
Verify locations of all framing and opening dimensions by field measurements before metal
panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 COORDINATION
Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into
foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
Coordinate installation of mechanical, plumbing and electrical work indicated on the drawings.
Coordinate installation of pipe bollards, railings and other work indicated on the drawings.
Coordinate metal panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of
supports and other adjoining work to provide a leak-proof, secure, and non-corrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
1.9.1 Building System Warranty
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 183 of 367
Furnish manufacturer's standard no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal building system. The
warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date of acceptance of the work and be
issued directly to the Government. The standard warranty must provide that if within the
warranty period, the metal building system shows evidence of deterioration resulting from
defective materials and/or workmanship, correcting of any defects is the responsibility of the
metal building system manufacturer. Repairs that become necessary because of defective
materials and workmanship while metal building system is under warranty are to be performed
within 32 hours after notification, unless additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative. Failure to perform repairs within 32 hours of notification will
constitute grounds for having emergency repairs performed by others and will not void the
warranty.
1.9.2 Roof System Weather-Tightness Warranty
Furnish manufacturer's standard no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal panel system. The
warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date of acceptance of the work and be
issued directly to the Government.
The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the roof panel system shows
evidence of corrosion, perforation, rupture, lost of weather-tightness or excess weathering due to
deterioration of the panel system resulting from defective materials and correction of the
defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer.
Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while roof panel
system is under warranty are to be performed within 24 hours after notification, unless additional
time is approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Failure to perform
repairs within 24 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency repairs
performed by others and not void the warranty. Immediate follow-up and completion of
permanent repairs must be performed within 5 days from date of notification.
1.9.3 Roof and Wall Panel Finish Warranty
Furnish manufacturer's standard no-dollar-limit warranty for the metal panel system. The
warranty period is to be no less than 20 years from the date of acceptance of the work and be
issued directly to the Government.
The warranty is to provide that if within the warranty period the metal panel system shows
evidence of checking, delaminating cracking, peeling, chalk in excess of a numerical rating of
eight, as determined by ASTM D 4214 test procedures; or change colors in excess of five CIE or
Hunter units in accordance with ASTM D 2244 or excess weathering due to deterioration of the
panel system resulting from defective materials and finish or correction of the defective
workmanship is to be the responsibility of the metal building system manufacturer.
Liability under this warranty is exclusively limited to replacing the defective coated materials.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 184 of 367
Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials and workmanship while roof and
wall panel system is under warranty are to be performed within 32 hours after notification, unless
additional time is approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Failure to
perform repairs within 32 hours of notification will constitute grounds for having emergency
repairs performed by others and not void the warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL FRAMING MATERIALS
2.1.1 W-Shapes
ASTM A 992/A 992M; ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.2 Channel, Angles, M-Shapes and S-Shapes
ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.3 Plate and Bar
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.4 Steel Pipe
ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 529/A 529M.
2.1.5 Cold-Formed and Hot Formed Hollow Structural Sections
Cold formed:ASTM A 500/A 500M or ASTM B 221, ASTM B 221M. Hot-formed: ASTM A
501.
2.1.6 Structural-Steel Sheet
Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
2.1.7 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet
ASTM A 653/A 653M, ASTM A 606/A 606M.
2.1.8 Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Pre-painted with Coil Stock Coating
Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process to
comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, and
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 185 of 367
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, and ASTM A 463/A
463M.
2.1.9 High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
ASTM A 325, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers.
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc
coating, ASTM B 695.
Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, heavy-hexhead steel structural bolts with spline.
Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695 or Mechanically deposited
zinc coating, ASTM B 695 baked epoxy coated.
2.1.10 Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers
ASTM A 307, ASTM A 563, and ASTM F 844.
Finish: ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM B 695.
2.1.11 Anchor Rods
ASTM F 1554.
a. Configuration: Straight.
b. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.
c. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
d. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel.
e. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc
coating, ASTM B 695.
2.1.12 Threaded Rods
ASTM A 193/A 193M.
a. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel.
b. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened or ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
c. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M or Mechanically deposited zinc
coating, ASTM B 695.
2.1.13 Primer
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 186 of 367
SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.
2.2 FABRICATION
2.2.1 General
Comply with MBMA MBSM - "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9,
"Fabrication and Erection Tolerances."
2.3 STRUCTURAL FRAMING
2.3.1 General
Clean all framing members to remove loose rust and mill scale. Provide 1 shop coat of primer to
an average dry film thickness of 1 mil according to SSPC SP 2. Balance of painting and coating
procedures must conform to SSPC Paint 15 and SSPC A.
2.3.2 Primary Framing
Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system includes transverse and lean-to
frames; rafter, rakes, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns;
and wind bracing designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Provide
frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Provide frame span and
spacing indicated.
Shop fabricate framing components by welding or by using high-strength bolts to the indicated
size and section with base-plates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required. Cut, form,
punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field erection.
a. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, builtup steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted for building
frame support.
b. Frame Configuration: One-directional sloped.
d. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth.
e. Rafter Type: Uniform depth.
2.3.3 Secondary Framing
Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange
bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural
members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metalliccoated steel sheet pre-painted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 187 of 367
Shop fabricate framing components by roll-forming or break-forming to the indicated size and
section with base-plates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection. Cut,
form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.
a. Purlins: C or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or
structural-steel shapes; minimum depth As required to comply with system performance
requirements.
b. Girts: C or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or
structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees
to flange minimum depth as required to comply with system performance requirements.
c. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from steel sheet, built-up
steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels.
d. Flange Bracing: Structural-steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen
primary frame flanges.
e. Sag Bracing: Structural-steel angles.
f. Base or Sill Angles: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
g. Purlin and Girt Clips: Steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to
galvanized framing members.
h. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from zinccoated (galvanized) steel sheet.
i. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or
structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of
other openings.
j. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from
cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel
sheet; designed to withstand required loads.
2.3.4 Bracing
Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows:
a. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M; or ASTM A 529/A 529M threaded
at each end.
b. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size
required to withstand design loads.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 188 of 367
c. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
d. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structuralsteel shapes to match primary framing; of size required to withstand design loads.
e. Diaphragm Action of Metal Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through
diaphragm action of metal panels.
f. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's
option. Provide bracing system that will not interfere with indicated openings and
added components such as coiling doors.
2.4 PANEL MATERIALS
2.4.1 Aluminum Sheet
Roll-form aluminum roof and wall panels to the specified profile, with minimum .040" thickness
and depth as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within the tolerances listed:
a. Aluminum Sheet conforming to ASTM B 209, AA ADM1 and AA ASD1.
b. Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any roof slope
or wall area with no joints or seams and formed without warping, waviness, or ripples that
are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system.
c. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of
system specified.
1. Profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from manufacturer's
standard for the indicated roof slope or wall area.
2. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with small stiffening ribs, 38
inch overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.
OR
3. Profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 7.2 inches o.c., 38-7/8 inch overall width with
36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.
2.4.2 Steel Sheet
Roll-form steel roof and wall panels to the specified profile, with minimum 24 gauge and depth
as indicated. Material must be plumb and true, and within the tolerances listed:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 189 of 367
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M and AISI SG03-3.
b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-coated Steel Sheet conforming to ASTM A 792/A 792M and
AISI SG03-3.
c. Individual panels to have continuous length to cover the entire length of any unbroken
roof slope or wall area with no joints or seams and formed without warping, waviness, or
ripples that are not part of the panel profile and free of damage to the finish coating system.
d. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with the type of
system specified;
profile and coverage to be a minimum height and width from manufacturer's standard
for the indicated roof slope or wall area.
profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 12 inches o.c. with small stiffening ribs, 38 inch
overall width with 36 inch coverage and exposed fasteners.
OR
profile to be a 1-1/2 inch high rib at 7.2 inches o.c., 38-7/8 inch overall width with 36
inch coverage and exposed fasteners.
2.4.3 Finish
All panels are to receive a factory-applied polyvinylidene fluoride or Kynar 500/Hylar 5000
finish consisting of a baked-on top-coat with a manufacturer's recommended prime coat
conforming to the following:
a. Metal Preparation: All metal is to have the surfaces carefully prepared for painting on a
continuous process coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of
chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with acid rinse, and thorough
drying.
b. Prime Coating: A base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with the
top-coat, is to be applied to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film thickness of
0.20 + 0.05 mils. This prime coat must be oven cured prior to application of finish coat.
c. Exterior Finish Coating: Apply the finish coating over the primer by roll coating to dry
film thickness of 0.80 + 5 mils (3.80 + 0.50 mils for Vinyl Plastisol) for a total dry film
thickness of 1.00 + 0.10 mils (4.00 + 0.10 mils for Vinyl Plastisol). This finish coat must
be oven-cured.
d. Interior Finish Coating: Apply a wash-coat on the reverse side over the primer by roll
coating to a dry film thickness of 0.30 + 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 0.50 +
0.10 mils. The wash-coat must be oven-cured.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 190 of 367
e. Color: The exterior finish chosen from the manufacturer's color charts and chips.
f. Physical Properties: Coating must conform to the industry and manufacturer's standard
performance criteria as listed by the following certified test reports:
Chalking: ASTM DEF
Color Change and Conformity: ASTM D 2244
Weatherometer: ASTM G 23 and ASTM D 822
Humidity: ASTM D 2247 and ASTM D 714
Salt Spray: ASTM B 117
Chemical Pollution: ASTM D 1308
Gloss at 60°: ASTM D 523
Pencil Hardness: ASTM D 3363
Reverse Impact: ASTM D 2794
Flexibility: ASTM D 522
Abrasion: ASTM D 968
Flame Spread: ASTM E 84
2.4.4 Repair Of Finish Protection
Repair paint for color finish enameled metal panel must be compatible paint of the same formula
and color as the specified finish furnished by the metal panel manufacturer, conforming to
ASTM A 780.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
2.5.1 General
Cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.5.2 Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Refer to the following paragraph "FASTENERS".
2.6 FASTENERS
2.6.1 General
Type, material, corrosion resistance, size and sufficient length to penetrate the supporting
member a minimum of 1 inch with other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal
framing members to substrates in accordance with the metal panel manufacturer's and ASCE 705 requirements.
2.6.2 Exposed Fasteners
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 191 of 367
Fasteners for metal panels to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum, stainless steel, or
nylon capped steel compatible with the sheet panel or flashing and of a type and size
recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements and design loads.
Fasteners for accessories to be the manufacturer's standard. Provide an integral metal washer
matching the color of attached material with compressible sealing EPDM gasket approximately
3/32 inch thick.
2.6.3 Screws
Screws to be corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum and/or stainless steel being the type and
size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance requirements.
2.6.4 Rivets
Rivets to be closed-end type, corrosion resistant coated steel, aluminum or stainless steel where
watertight connections are required.
2.6.5 Attachment Clips
Fabricate clips from steel hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M or
Series 300 stainless steel. Size, shape, thickness and capacity as required meeting the insulation
thickness and design load criteria specified.
2.7 FRAMES AND MATERIALS FOR OPENINGS
2.7.1 Coiling Doors
Coordinate with coiling door manufacturer to provide necessary framing for doors beyond the
standard framing provided by the door manufacturer.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
2.8.1 General
All accessories to be compatible with the metal panels; sheet metal flashing, trim, metal closure
strips, caps and similar metal accessories must not be less than the minimum thickness specified
for the metal panels. Exposed metal accessories/finishes to match the panels furnished, except as
otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge and other closure strips to be non-absorbent closedcell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or pre-molded neoprene to match configuration of the panels.
2.8.2 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties
Aluminum or Steel ventilators, wall louvers and other miscellaneous roof and wall equipment or
penetrations conforming to AAMA, ASTM, and UL.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 192 of 367
2.8.3 Insulation
Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II, blankets with non-reflecting
coverings; Class A, membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.8.4 Rubber Closure Strips
Closed-cell, expanded cellular rubber conforming to ASTM D 1056 and ASTM D 1667;
extruded or molded to the configuration of the specified metal panel and in lengths supplied by
the metal panel manufacturer.
2.8.5 Metal Closure Strips
Factory fabricated aluminum or steel closure strips to be the same material gauge (thickness),
color, finish and profile of the specified roof or wall panel.
2.8.6 2.6.6 Joint Sealants
2.8.6.1 Sealants
Sealants are to be an approved gun type for use in hand or air-pressure caulking guns at
temperatures above 40 degrees F 4 degrees C (or frost-free application at temperatures above 10
degrees F minus 12 degrees C) with minimum solid content of 85 percent of the total volume.
Sealant is to dry with a tough, durable surface skin which permits it to remain soft and pliable
underneath, providing a weather-tight joint. No migratory staining is permitted on painted or
unpainted metal, stone, glass, vinyl, or wood.
Prime all joints to receive sealants with a compatible one-component or two-component primer
as recommended by the metal panel manufacturer.
2.8.6.2 Shop-Applied
Sealant for shop-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag one component
polysulfide or silicone conforming to ASTM C 920, Type II, and with a curing time to ensure the
sealant's plasticity at the time of field erection.
2.8.6.3 Field-Applied
Sealant for field-applied caulking must be an approved gun grade, non-sag one component
polysulfide or two-component polyurethane with an initial maximum Shore A durometer
hardness of 25, and conforming to ASTM C 920, Type II. Color to match panel colors.
2.8.6.4 Tape Sealant
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 193 of 367
Pressure sensitive, 100% solid with a release paper backing; permanently elastic, non-sagging,
non-toxic and non-staining as approved by the metal panel manufacturer.
2.9 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.9.1 Fabrication
Shop fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim including gutters and downspouts where practicable
to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before
shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Gutters and
downspouts shall be aluminum with factory finish, color as selected from manufacturer's
standard colors.
2.10 FINISHES
2.10.1 General
Comply with NAAMM AMP 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2.10.2 Appearance of Finished Work
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half
of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Before erection proceeds examine with the erector present the concrete foundation dimensions,
concrete and/or masonry bearing surfaces, anchor bolt size and placement, survey slab elevation,
locations of bearing plates, and other embedment's to receive structural framing with the metal
building manufacturer's templates and drawings before erecting any steel components for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and
other structural and metal panel support members and anchorages have been installed within
alignment tolerances required by metal building manufacturer, UL, ASTM, ASCE 7-05 and as
required by the building code for the geographical area where construction will take place.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 194 of 367
Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof or wall panels to verify
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal roof or
wall panel installation.
Submit to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative and the Contracting Officer, a
written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
Provide temporary shoring, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep the
structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loading or
loads equal in intensity of the building design loads. Remove temporary support systems when
permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of
interfering with insulation attachment and performance.
Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub-purlins, girts, angles, furring, and other miscellaneous
support members or anchorage for the metal roof or wall panels, doors, ventilators and louvers
according to metal building manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING
Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions, approved
shop drawings and other erection documents in accordance with MBMA MBSM - "Metal
Building Systems Manual".
Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building
system manufacturer's professional engineer and the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative.
Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC
325 specifications. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.
Clean and roughen concrete and masonry bearing surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom
surface of plates.
Align and adjust structural framing before permanent bolt-up and connections. Perform
necessary adjustments and alignment to compensate for changes or discrepancies in elevations.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing in accordance with AISC 360.
3.4 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 195 of 367
Provide metal wall panels of full length from sill to eave as indicated, unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, in accordance with MBMA MBSM.
Erect wall panel system in accordance with the approved erection drawings, the printed
instructions and safety precautions of the metal building manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Do not install bent,
chipped, or defective sheets.
Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical
edges of the building, securely anchored, and with the indicated eave, and sill.
Work is to allow for thermal movement of the wall panel, movement of the building structure,
and to provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind pressure.
Field cutting metal wall panels by torch is not permitted.
3.5 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge as indicated, unless otherwise
indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components
of the Work securely in place in accordance with NRCA RWM and MBMA MBSM.
Erect roofing system in accordance with the approved erection drawings, the printed instructions
and safety precautions of the metal building manufacturer.
Sheets are not to be subjected to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Do not install bent,
chipped, or defective sheets.
Sheets must be erected true and plumb and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical
edges of the building, securely anchored, and with the indicated rake and eave overhang.
Work must allow for thermal movement of the roofing, movement of the building structure, and
provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind pressure.
Field cutting metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
Roofing sheets must be laid with corrugations in the direction of the roof slope. End laps of
exterior roofing must not be less than 8 inches; the side laps of standard exterior corrugated
sheets must not be not less than 2-1/2 corrugations.
Do not permit storage, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied roofing materials.
Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of smooth clean boards or planks as
necessary to avoid damage to the installed roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform
to the indicated live load limits of roof construction.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 196 of 367
3.6 METAL PANEL FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's
approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.7 FLASHING, TRIM AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level
as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B. Sheet metalwork is to be accomplished to form weather-tight construction without waves,
warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, and allow for expansion and contraction.
Cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to
accommodate the work of other trades is to be performed by sheet metal mechanics.
3.8 DOOR FRAME INSTALLATION
Install door frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation with metal panel flashings and other
components. Caulk and seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant compatible
with metal panels.
3.9 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
3.9.1 General
Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weather-tight mounting, and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
3.9.2 Dissimilar Metals
Where dissimilar metals contact one another or corrosive substrates are present, protect against
galvanic action by painting dissimilar metal surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying
rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each surface, or by other permanent separation techniques as
recommended by the metal building manufacturer.
3.9.3 Gutters and Downspouts
Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to
SMACNA 1793 recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter
flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 197 of 367
3.9.4 Insulation
Comply with performance requirements and manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire
roof area.
3.9.5 Roof and Wall Accessories and Specialties
Install roof and wall accessories and specialties complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment support.
3.10 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
3.10.1 Structural Framing
Clean all exposed structural framing at completion of installation. Remove metal shavings,
filings, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove grease and oil films, excess sealants, handling
marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean.
Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or weld marks,
and damage to the finish coating.
3.10.2 Metal Panels
Clean all exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal shavings,
filings, nails, bolts, and wires from work area. Remove protective coverings/films, grease and
oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool, fittings and drilling
debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal surfaces to be free of dents, creases, waves,
scratch marks, solder or weld marks, and damage to the finish coating.
3.10.3 Touch-Up Painting
After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field connections, rust spots, and
abraded surfaces of prime-painted structural framing and accessories. Clean and touch-up paint
with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.11 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Separate waste in accordance with the Waste Management Plan, placing copper materials,
ferrous materials, and galvanized sheet metal in designated areas for reuse. Close and seal
tightly all partly used adhesives and solvents; store protected in a well-ventilated, fire-safe area
at moderate temperature.
Collect and place scrap/waste debris in containers. Promptly dispose of scrap/waste debris. Do
not allow scrap/waste debris to accumulate on-site; transport scrap/waste debris from
government property and legally dispose of them.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 198 of 367
3.12 WARRANTY
3.12.1 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
Submit all manufacturers' signed warranties to Contracting Officer prior to final commissioning
and acceptance.
3.12.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY for INSTALLATION
Submit contractor's warranty for installation to the Contracting Officer prior to final
commissioning and acceptance.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 13 34 19 Page 199 of 367
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE
11/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Plumbing System; G
Detail drawings consisting of schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams,
and other information to illustrate the requirements and operations of systems that are
not covered by the Plumbing Code. Detail drawings for the complete plumbing
system including piping layouts and locations of connections; dimensions for
roughing-in, foundation, and support points; schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams
or connection and interconnection diagrams. Detail drawings shall indicate clearances
required for maintenance and operation. Where piping and equipment are to be
supported other than as indicated, details shall include loadings and proposed support
methods. Mechanical drawing plans, elevations, views, and details, shall be drawn to
scale.
SD-03 Product Data
Fixtures
List of installed fixtures with manufacturer, model, and flow rate.
Flush valve water closets
Flush valve urinals
Wall hung lavatories
Service sinks
Drinking-water coolers; G
Plastic shower units
Water heaters; G
Backflow prevention assemblies; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 200 of 367
Shower Faucets; G
Plumbing System
Diagrams, instructions, and other sheets proposed for posting. Manufacturer's
recommendations for the installation of bell and spigot and hubless joints for cast iron
soil pipe.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Plumbing System; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATIING INSTRUCTIONS AND
TRAINING.
1.2 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the manufacture of such products. Specified equipment shall essentially duplicate
equipment that has performed satisfactorily at least two years prior to bid opening. Standard
products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.2.1 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations. Submit a certified list of
qualified permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which includes their
addresses and qualifications. These service organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the
equipment installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and
emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.2.2 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.2.3 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 201 of 367
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Replace damaged or defective items.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise required herein, plumbing work shall be in accordance with ICC IPC. Energy
consuming products and systems shall be in accordance with PL 109-58 and ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and
advise the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative of any discrepancy before performing
any work.
1.6 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full
instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in
operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has
been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of mandays (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for
classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms
of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
1.7 ACCESSIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are
readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment
requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 202 of 367
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLES I and II.
2.1.1 Pipe Joint Materials
Grooved pipe and hubless cast-iron soil pipe shall not be used underground. Solder containing
lead shall not be used with copper pipe. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the
collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Institute. Joints and gasket materials shall conform to
the following:
a. Coupling for Cast-Iron Pipe: for hub and spigot type ASTM A 74, AWWA C606. For
hubless type: CISPI 310
b. Coupling for Steel Pipe: AWWA C606.
c. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets shall be made of non-asbestos material in accordance with ASME
B16.21. Gaskets shall be flat, 1/16 inch thick, and contain Aramid fibers bonded with
Styrene Butadiene Rubber (SBR) or Nitro Butadiene Rubber (NBR). Gaskets shall be the
full face or self centering flat ring type. Gaskets used for hydrocarbon service shall be
bonded with NBR.
d. Brazing Material: Brazing material shall conform to AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5.
e. Brazing Flux: Flux shall be in paste or liquid form appropriate for use with brazing material.
Flux shall be as follows: lead-free; have a 100 percent flushable residue; contain slightly
acidic reagents; contain potassium borides; and contain fluorides.
f. Solder Material: Solder metal shall conform to ASTM B 32.
g. Solder Flux: Flux shall be liquid form, non-corrosive, and conform to ASTM B 813,
Standard Test 1.
h. PTFE Tape: PTFE Tape, for use with Threaded Metal or Plastic Pipe.
i. Rubber Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil-Pipe and Fittings (hub and spigot type and hubless type):
ASTM C 564.
j. Plastic Solvent Cement for PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2564 and ASTM D 2855.
k. Plastic Solvent Cement for CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 493.
l. Flanged fittings including flanges, bolts, nuts, bolt patterns, etc., shall be in accordance with
ASME B16.5 class 150 and shall have the manufacturer's trademark affixed in accordance
with MSS SP-25. Flange material shall conform to ASTM A 105/A 105M. Blind flange
material shall conform to ASTM A 516/A 516M cold service and ASTM A 515/A 515M
for hot service. Bolts shall be high strength or intermediate strength with material
conforming to ASTM A 193/A 193M.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 203 of 367
m. Press fittings for Copper Pipe and Tube: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material
and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22 and performance criteria of
IAPMO PS 117. Sealing elements for copper press fittings shall be EPDM, FKM or
HNBR. Sealing elements shall be factory installed or an alternative supplied fitting
manufacturer. Sealing element shall be selected based on manufacturer's approved
application guidelines.
n. Copper tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88, Type K, L or M.
2.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials
Miscellaneous materials shall conform to the following:
a. Water Hammer Arrester: PDI WH 201. Water hammer arrester shall be diaphragm.
b. Copper, Sheet and Strip for Building Construction: ASTM B 370.
c. Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures: ASME A112.6.1M.
d. Metallic Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M.
e. Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines: AWWA C203.
f. Hypochlorites: AWWA B300.
g. Liquid Chlorine: AWWA B301.
h. Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element: ASME B40.100.
i. Thermometers: ASTM E 1. Mercury shall not be used in thermometers.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS, INSERTS, AND SUPPORTS
Pipe hangers, inserts, and supports shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
2.3 VALVES
Valves shall be provided on supplies to equipment and fixtures. Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller
shall be bronze with threaded bodies for pipe and solder-type connections for tubing. Valves 3
inches and larger shall have flanged iron bodies and bronze trim. Pressure ratings shall be based
upon the application. Grooved end valves may be provided if the manufacturer certifies that the
valves meet the performance requirements of applicable MSS standard. Valves shall conform to
the following standards:
Description
Standard
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 204 of 367
Butterfly Valves
MSS SP-67
Cast-Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-70
Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-71
Ball Valves with Flanged Butt-Welding Ends
for General Service
MSS SP-72
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding,
Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends
MSS SP-110
Cast-Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-78
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle, and Check Valves
MSS SP-80
Steel Valves, Socket Welding and Threaded Ends
ASME B16.34
Cast-Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and
Threaded Ends
MSS SP-85
Backwater Valves
ASME A112.14.1
Vacuum Relief Valves
CSA/AM Z21.22
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
ASSE 1003
Water Heater Drain Valves
ASSE 1005
Trap Seal Primer Valves
ASSE 1018
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
for Hot Water Supply Systems
CSA/AM Z21.22
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves
for Automatically Fired Hot
Water Boilers
ASME CSD-1
Safety Code No., Part CW,
Article 5
2.3.1 Relief Valves
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 205 of 367
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall have a combination pressure and temperature
(P&T) relief valve. The pressure relief element of a P&T relief valve shall have adequate
capacity to prevent excessive pressure buildup in the system when the system is operating at the
maximum rate of heat input. The temperature element of a P&T relief valve shall have a
relieving capacity which is at least equal to the total input of the heaters when operating at their
maximum capacity. Relief valves shall be rated according to CSA/AM Z21.22. Relief valves
for systems where the maximum rate of heat input is less than 200,000 Btuh shall have 3/4 inch
minimum inlets, and 3/4 inch outlets. Relief valves for systems where the maximum rate of heat
input is greater than 200,000 Btuh shall have 1 inch minimum inlets, and 1 inch outlets. The
discharge pipe from the relief valve shall be the size of the valve outlet.
2.3.2 Thermostatic Mixing Valves
Provide thermostatic mixing valve for lavatory faucets. Mixing valves, thermostatic type,
pressure-balanced or combination thermostatic and pressure-balanced shall be line size and shall
be constructed with rough or finish bodies either with or without plating. Each valve shall be
constructed to control the mixing of hot and cold water and to deliver water at a desired
temperature regardless of pressure or input temperature changes. The control element shall be of
an approved type. The body shall be of heavy cast bronze, and interior parts shall be brass,
bronze, corrosion-resisting steel or copper. The valve shall be equipped with necessary stops,
check valves, unions, and sediment strainers on the inlets. Mixing valves shall maintain water
temperature within 5 degrees F of any setting.
2.4 FIXTURES
Fixtures shall be water conservation type, in accordance with ICC IPC. Fixtures for use by the
physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1. Vitreous China, nonabsorbent,
hard-burned, and vitrified throughout the body shall be provided. White. No fixture will be
accepted that shows cracks, crazes, blisters, thin spots, or other flaws. Fixtures shall be equipped
with appurtenances such as traps, faucets, stop valves, and drain fittings. Each fixture and piece
of equipment requiring connections to the drainage system, except grease interceptors, shall be
equipped with a trap. Brass expansion or toggle bolts capped with acorn nuts shall be provided
for supports, and polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where
exposed to view. Fixtures with the supply discharge below the rim shall be equipped with
backflow preventers. Internal parts of flush and/or flushometer valves, shower mixing valves,
shower head face plates, pop-up stoppers of lavatory waste drains, shall be copper alloy with all
visible surfaces chrome plated. Plastic in contact with hot water shall be suitable for 180 degrees
F water temperature.
2.4.1 Automatic Controls
Provide automatic, sensor operated faucets and flush valves to comply with ASSE 1037 and UL
1951 for lavatory faucets, urinals, and water closets. Flushing and faucet systems shall consist of
solenoid-activated valves with light beam sensors. Flush valve for water closet shall include an
override pushbutton. Flushing devices shall be provided as described in paragraph FIXTURES
AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 206 of 367
2.4.2 Flush Valve Water Closets
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, siphon jet, elongated bowl, floor-mounted, floor outlet.
Top of toilet seat height above floor shall be 14 to 15 inches, except 17 to 19 inches for
wheelchair water closets. Provide wax bowl ring including plastic sleeve. Provide white solid
plastic elongated open-front seat.
Water flushing volume of the water closet and flush valve combination shall not exceed1.0
gallons per flush.
Provide large diameter flush valve including angle control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail
pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view components shall be chromium-plated or
polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonhold-open type. Mount flush valves not less
than 11 inches above the fixture. Mounted height of flush valve shall not interfere with the hand
rail in ADA stalls. Provide solenoid-activated flush valves including electrical-operated lightbeam-sensor to energize the solenoid.
2.4.3 Flush Valve Urinals
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, wall-mounted, wall outlet, siphon jet, integral trap, and
extended side shields. Provide urinal with the rim 17 inches above the floor. Provide urinal with
the rim 24 inches above the floor. Water flushing volume of the urinal and flush valve
combination shall not exceed 0.5 gallons per flush. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed chair
carriers with vertical steel pipe supports. Provide large diameter flush valve including angle
control-stop valve, vacuum breaker, tail pieces, slip nuts, and wall plates; exposed to view
components shall be chromium-plated or polished stainless steel. Flush valves shall be nonholdopen type. Mount flush valves not less than 11 inches above the fixture. Provide solenoidactivated flush valves including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.
2.4.4 Wall Hung Lavatories
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china, straight back type, minimum dimensions of 19 inches,
wide by 17 inches front to rear, with supply openings for use with top mounted centerset faucets,
and openings for concealed arm carrier installation. Provide aerator with faucet. Water flow rate
shall not exceed 0.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 60 psi. Provide ASME
A112.6.1M concealed chair carriers with vertical steel pipe supports and concealed arms for the
lavatory. Mount lavatory with the front rim 34 inches above floor and with 29 inches minimum
clearance from bottom of the front rim to floor. Provide top-mounted solenoid-activated lavatory
faucets including electrical-operated light-beam-sensor to energize the solenoid.
2.4.5 Service Sinks
ASME A112.19.2, white vitreous china with integral back and wall hanger supports, minimum
dimensions of 22 inches wide by 20 inches front to rear, with two supply openings in 10 inch
high back. Provide floor supported wall outlet cast iron P-trap and stainless steel rim guards as
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 207 of 367
recommended by service sink manufacturer. Provide back mounted washerless service sink
faucets with vacuum breaker and 0.75 inch external hose threads.
2.4.6 Drinking-Water Coolers
AHRI 1010 with more than a single thickness of metal between the potable water and the
refrigerant in the heat exchanger, wall-hung, bubbler style, air-cooled condensing unit, 4.75 gph
minimum capacity, stainless steel splash receptor and basin, and stainless steel cabinet. Bubblers
shall be controlled by push levers or push bars, front mounted or side mounted near the front
edge of the cabinet. Bubbler spouts shall be mounted at maximum of 36 inches above floor and
at front of unit basin. Spouts shall direct water flow at least 4 inches above unit basin and
trajectory parallel or nearly parallel to the front of unit. Provide ASME A112.6.1M concealed
steel pipe chair carriers.
2.4.7 Plastic Shower Units
IAPMO Z124.1.2 four piece white solid acrylic pressure molded fiberglass reinforced plastic
shower units. Units shall be scratch resistant, waterproof, and reinforced. Showerhead water
flow rate shall not exceed 1.5 gpm when measured at a flowing water pressure of 80 psi. Provide
recessed type units approximately 60 inches wide, 30 inches front to rear, 72 inches high with 15
inches high rim for through-the-floor drain installation with unit bottom or feet firmly supported
by a smooth level floor. Provide left or right drain outlet units as required. Units shall have
built-in soap dish and minimum of 12 inch long stainless steel horizontal grab bar located on
back wall for standing use. Units shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO Z124.1.2 and
shall be labeled by NAHB Research Foundation, Inc. for compliance. Install unit in accordance
with the manufacturer's written instructions. Finish installation by covering unit attachment
flanges with wall board in accordance with unit manufacturer's recommendation. Provide
smooth 100 percent silicone rubber white bathtub calk between the unit and the adjacent walls
and floor surfaces.
2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
Backflow prevention devices must be approved by the State or local regulatory agencies. If there
is no State or local regulatory agency requirements, the backflow prevention devices must be
listed by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control & Hydraulic Research, or any other
approved testing laboratory having equivalent capabilities for both laboratory and field
evaluation of backflow prevention devices and assemblies.
Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, atmospheric
(nonpressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be meet the above
requirements.
Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall conform to ASSE 1012. Reduced
pressure principle backflow preventers shall conform to ASSE 1013. Hose connection vacuum
breakers shall conform to ASSE 1011. Pipe applied atmospheric type vacuum breakers shall
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 208 of 367
conform to ASSE 1001. Pressure vacuum breaker assembly shall conform to ASSE 1020. Air
gaps in plumbing systems shall conform to ASME A112.1.2.
2.6 DRAINS
2.6.1 Floor and Shower Drains
Shower drains shall consist of a galvanized body, integral seepage pan, and adjustable perforated
or slotted chromium-plated bronze, nickel-bronze, or nickel-brass strainer, consisting of grate
and threaded collar. Drains shall be of double drainage pattern for embedding in the floor
construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels for drainage to the drainpipe.
The strainer shall be adjustable to floor thickness. A clamping device for attaching flashing or
waterproofing membrane to the seepage pan without damaging the flashing or waterproofing
membrane shall be provided when required. Drains shall be provided with threaded connection.
Between the drain outlet and waste pipe, a neoprene rubber gasket conforming to ASTM C 564
may be installed, provided that the drain is specifically designed for the rubber gasket
compression type joint. Floor and shower drains shall conform to ASME A112.6.3.
2.6.2 Shower Faucets and Drain Fittings
Provide single control pressure equalizing shower faucets with body mounted from behind the
wall with threaded connections. Provide ball joint self-cleaning shower heads. Provide shower
heads which deliver a maximum of 2.2 GPM at 80 PSI per Energy Star requirements. Provide
tubing mounted from behind the wall between shower heads. Provide separate globe valves or
angle valves with union connections in each supply to faucet. Provide trip-lever pop-up drain
fittings for above-the-floor drain installations. The top of drain pop-ups, drain outlets, tub
overflow outlet, and; control handle for pop-up drain shall be chromium-plated or polished
stainless steel. Linkage between drain pop-up and pop-up control handle at bathtub overflow
outlet shall be copper alloy or stainless steel. Provide 1.5 inch copper alloy adjustable tubing
with slip nuts and gaskets between bathtub overflow and drain outlet; chromium-plated finish is
not required.
2.7 TRAPS
Unless otherwise specified, traps shall be plastic per ASTM F 409 or copper-alloy adjustable
tube type with slip joint inlet and swivel. Traps shall be with a cleanout. Provide traps with
removable access panels for easy clean-out at sinks and lavatories. Tubes shall be copper alloy
with walls not less than 0.032 inch thick within commercial tolerances, except on the outside of
bends where the thickness may be reduced slightly in manufacture by usual commercial
methods. Inlets shall have rubber washer and copper alloy nuts for slip joints above the
discharge level. Swivel joints shall be below the discharge level and shall be of metal-to-metal
or metal-to-plastic type as required for the application. Nuts shall have flats for wrench grip.
Outlets shall have internal pipe thread, except that when required for the application, the outlets
shall have sockets for solder-joint connections. The depth of the water seal shall be not less than
2 inches. The interior diameter shall be not more than 1/8 inch over or under the nominal size,
and interior surfaces shall be reasonably smooth throughout. A copper alloy "P" trap assembly
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 209 of 367
consisting of an adjustable "P" trap and threaded trap wall nipple with cast brass wall flange shall
be provided for lavatories. The assembly shall be a standard manufactured unit and may have a
rubber-gasketed swivel joint.
2.8 WATER HEATERS
Water heater types and capacities shall be as indicated. Each water heater shall have replaceable
anodes. Each primary water heater shall have controls with an adjustable range that includes 90
to 160 degrees F. A factory pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water
supply to each water heater. Expansion tanks shall be specifically designed for use on potable
water systems and shall be rated for 200 degrees F water temperature and 150 psi working
pressure. The expansion tank size and acceptance volume shall be 3 gallons.
2.8.1 Automatic Storage Type
Heaters shall be complete with control system, temperature gauge, and pressure gauge, and shall
have ASME rated combination pressure and temperature relief valve.
2.8.1.1 Electric Type
Electric type water heaters shall conform to UL 174 with dual heating elements. Each element
shall be 4.5 KW. The elements shall be wired so that only one element can operate at a time.
2.9 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE METER
Cold water meters 2 inches and smaller shall be positive displacement type conforming to
AWWA C700. Cold water meters 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be turbine type conforming to
AWWA C701. Meter register may be round or straight reading type, as provided by the local
utility. Meter shall be provided with a pulse generator, remote readout register and all necessary
wiring and accessories.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical motor driven equipment specified complete with motors, motor starters, and
controls as specified herein and in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the
equipment. Provide high efficiency type, single-phase, fractional-horsepower alternating-current
motors, including motors that are part of a system, corresponding to the applications in
accordance with NEMA MG 11. Provide motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and of
sufficient size to drive the load at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating
of the motor.
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty with the enclosure specified. Motor duty requirements
shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum encountered interval
between start and stop. Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within
20 seconds with 80 percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 210 of 367
period. Motor bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of
the enclosure.
Controllers and contactors shall have auxiliary contacts for use with the controls provided.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified
and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided. For packaged equipment, the manufacturer shall provide controllers, including the
required monitors and timed restart.
Power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment shall be provided under and conform to
the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ITEMS
2.11.1 Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge metal plates for piping entering floors, walls, and ceilings in
exposed spaces. Provide chromium-plated on copper alloy plates or polished stainless steel
finish in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces.
2.11.2 Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors. Sleeves are not
required where supply drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs
located on grade, except where penetrating a membrane waterproof floor.
2.11.2.1 Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete
Provide steel pipe sleeves or schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe sleeves. Sleeves are not required
where drain, waste, and vent (DWV) piping passes through concrete floor slabs located on grade.
Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in
the core-drilled hole are completely grouted smooth.
2.11.2.2 Sleeves Not in Masonry and Concrete
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet or PVC plastic pipe sleeves.
2.11.3 Pipe Hangers (Supports)
Provide MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69, Type 1 with adjustable type steel support rods, except as
specified or indicated otherwise. Attach to steel joists with Type 19 or 23 clamps and retaining
straps. Attach to Steel W or S beams with Type 21, 28, 29, or 30 clamps. Attach to steel angles
and vertical web steel channels with Type 20 clamp with beam clamp channel adapter. Attach to
horizontal web steel channel and wood with drilled hole on centerline and double nut and
washer. Attach to concrete with Type 18 insert or drilled expansion anchor. Provide Type 40
insulation protection shield for insulated piping.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 211 of 367
2.11.4 Nameplates
Provide 0.125 inch thick melamine laminated plastic nameplates, black matte finish with white
center core, for equipment, gages, thermometers, and valves; valves in supplies to faucets will
not require nameplates. Accurately align lettering and engrave minimum of 0.25 inch high
normal block lettering into the white core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be 1.0 by 2.5
inches. Key nameplates to a chart and schedule for each system. Frame charts and schedules
under glass and place where directed near each system. Furnish two copies of each chart and
schedule.
2.11.5 Labels
Provide labels for sensor operators at flush valves and faucets. Include the following
information on each label:
a. Identification of the sensor and its operation with written description.
b. Range of the sensor.
c. Battery replacement schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The plumbing system shall be installed complete with necessary fixtures, fittings, traps, valves,
and accessories. Water and drainage piping shall be extended 5 feet outside the building, unless
otherwise indicated. A gate valve and drain shall be installed on the water service line inside the
building approximately 6 inches above the floor from point of entry. Piping shall be connected
to the exterior service lines or capped or plugged if the exterior service is not in place. Sewer
and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches, except when otherwise shown. Exterior
underground utilities shall be at least 12 inches below the average local frost depth. If trenches
are closed or the pipes are otherwise covered before being connected to the service lines, the
location of the end of each plumbing utility shall be marked with a stake or other acceptable
means. Valves shall be installed with control no lower than the valve body.
3.1.1 Water Pipe, Fittings, and Connections
3.1.1.1 Utilities
The piping shall be extended to fixtures, outlets, and equipment. The hot-water and cold-water
piping system shall be arranged and installed to permit draining. The supply line to each item of
equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves, or other control valves which are supplied
with integral stops, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for
repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 212 of 367
piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants, shower heads, and flushing devices shall be anchored to
prevent movement.
3.1.1.2 Cutting and Repairing
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and unnecessary cutting of construction shall be
avoided. Damage to building, piping, wiring, or equipment as a result of cutting shall be
repaired by mechanics skilled in the trade involved.
3.1.1.3 Protection of Fixtures, Materials, and Equipment
Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Fixtures and equipment shall
be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemicals, and mechanical injury. Upon
completion of the work, the fixtures, materials, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned,
adjusted, and operated. Safety guards shall be provided for exposed rotating equipment.
3.1.1.4 Mains, Branches, and Runouts
Piping shall be installed as indicated. Pipe shall be accurately cut and worked into place without
springing or forcing. Structural portions of the building shall not be weakened. Aboveground
piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes
from service lines may be taken from top, bottom, or side of main, using crossover fittings
required by structural or installation conditions. Supply pipes, valves, and fittings shall be kept a
sufficient distance from other work and other services to permit not less than 1/2 inch between
finished covering on the different services. Bare and insulated water lines shall not bear directly
against building structural elements so as to transmit sound to the structure or to prevent flexible
movement of the lines. Water pipe shall not be buried in or under floors unless specifically
indicated or approved. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing fittings. Use of
bushings will not be permitted except for use in situations in which standard factory fabricated
components are furnished to accommodate specific accepted installation practice. Change in
direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 4 inches and smaller will be
permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide sweep bends are formed. The center-line
radius of bends shall be not less than six diameters of the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks,
wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be acceptable.
3.1.1.5 Pipe Drains
Pipe drains indicated shall consist of 3/4 inch hose bibb with renewable seat and gate valve
ahead of hose bibb. At other low points, 3/4 inch brass plugs or caps shall be provided.
Disconnection of the supply piping at the fixture is an acceptable drain.
3.1.1.6 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees, valves and bends deflecting 11.25 degrees or more, either vertically or
horizontally, in waterlines 4 inches in diameter or larger shall be provided with thrust blocks,
where indicated, to prevent movement. Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 213 of 367
than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi
after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored.
Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of the thrust block shall
be poured against undisturbed earth. The side of the thrust block not subject to thrust shall be
poured against forms. The area of bearing will be as shown. Blocking shall be placed so that the
joints of the fitting are accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or
by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust
blocks.
3.1.1.7 Commercial-Type Water Hammer Arresters
Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall be provided on hot- and cold-water supplies and
shall be located as generally indicated, with precise location and sizing to be in accordance with
PDI WH 201. Water hammer arresters, where concealed, shall be accessible by means of access
doors or removable panels. Commercial-type water hammer arresters shall conform to ASSE
1010. Vertical capped pipe columns will not be permitted.
3.1.2 Joints
Installation of pipe and fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Mitering of joints for elbows and notching of straight runs of pipe for tees
will not be permitted. Joints shall be made up with fittings of compatible material and made for
the specific purpose intended.
3.1.2.1 Threaded
Threaded joints shall have American Standard taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
Only male pipe threads shall be coated with graphite or with an approved graphite compound, or
with an inert filler and oil, or shall have a polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied.
3.1.2.2 Unions and Flanges
Unions, flanges and mechanical couplings shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions.
Unions shall be used on pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller; flanges shall be used on pipe sizes 3
inches and larger.
3.1.2.3 Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipe
Bell and spigot compression and hubless gasketed clamp joints for soil, waste and vent piping
shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.2.4 Copper Tube and Pipe
a. Brazed. Brazed joints shall be made in conformance with AWS B2.2, MSS SP-73, and CDA
A4015 with flux and are acceptable for all pipe sizes. Copper to copper joints shall include
the use of copper-phosphorus or copper-phosphorus-silver brazing metal without flux.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 214 of 367
Brazing of dissimilar metals (copper to bronze or brass) shall include the use of flux with
either a copper-phosphorus, copper-phosphorus-silver or a silver brazing filler metal.
b. Soldered. Soldered joints shall be made with flux and are only acceptable for piping 2 inches
and smaller. Soldered joints shall conform to ASME B31.5 and CDA A4015. Soldered
joints shall not be used in compressed air piping between the air compressor and the
receiver.
c. Copper Tube Extracted Joint. Mechanically extracted joints shall be made in accordance with
ICC IPC.
d. Press connection. Copper press connections shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions for manufactured rated size. The joints shall be
pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer of that joint. Minimum distance
between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
3.1.2.5 Plastic Pipe
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement. PVC
and CPVC pipe shall have joints made with solvent cement elastomeric, threading, (threading of
Schedule 80 Pipe is allowed only where required for disconnection and inspection; threading of
Schedule 40 Pipe is not allowed), or mated flanged.
3.1.3 Dissimilar Pipe Materials
Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous copper water pipe shall be made with dielectric
unions or flange waterways. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating
equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal
connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping. Dielectric waterways shall be
internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar
metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for
dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with
transition fitting for the specific purpose.
3.1.4 Pipe Sleeves and Flashing
Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set in their proper and permanent location.
3.1.4.1 Sleeve Requirements
Unless indicated otherwise, provide pipe sleeves meeting the following requirements:
Secure sleeves in position and location during construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length
to pass through entire thickness of walls, ceilings, roofs, and floors.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 215 of 367
A modular mechanical type sealing assembly may be installed in lieu of a waterproofing
clamping flange and caulking and sealing of annular space between pipe and sleeve. The seals
shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space
between the pipe and sleeve using galvanized steel bolts, nuts, and pressure plates. The links
shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a
pressure plate under each bolt head and each nut. After the seal assembly is properly positioned
in the sleeve, tightening of the bolt shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide
a watertight seal between the pipe and the sleeve. Each seal assembly shall be sized as
recommended by the manufacturer to fit the pipe and sleeve involved.
Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved.
Rectangular and square openings shall be as detailed. Each sleeve shall extend through its
respective floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except for special
circumstances. Pipe sleeves passing through floors in wet areas such as mechanical equipment
rooms, lavatories, kitchens, and other plumbing fixture areas shall extend a minimum of 4 inches
above the finished floor.
Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of 1/4 inch clearance
between bare pipe or insulation and inside of sleeve or between insulation and inside of sleeve.
Sleeves in bearing walls and concrete slab on grade floors shall be steel pipe or cast-iron pipe.
Sleeves in nonbearing walls or ceilings may be steel pipe, cast-iron pipe, galvanized sheet metal
with lock-type longitudinal seam, or plastic.
Except as otherwise specified, the annular space between pipe and sleeve, or between jacket over
insulation and sleeve, shall be sealed as indicated with sealants conforming to ASTM C 920 and
with a primer, backstop material and surface preparation. The annular space between pipe and
sleeve, between bare insulation and sleeve or between jacket over insulation and sleeve shall not
be sealed for interior walls which are not designated as fire rated.
3.1.4.2 Waterproofing
Waterproofing at floor-mounted water closets shall be accomplished by forming a flashing guard
from soft-tempered sheet copper. The center of the sheet shall be perforated and turned down
approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit between the outside diameter of the drainpipe and the inside
diameter of the cast-iron or steel pipe sleeve. The turned-down portion of the flashing guard
shall be embedded in sealant to a depth of approximately 1-1/2 inches; then the sealant shall be
finished off flush to floor level between the flashing guard and drainpipe. The flashing guard of
sheet copper shall extend not less than 8 inches from the drainpipe and shall be lapped between
the floor membrane in a solid coating of bituminous cement. If cast-iron water closet floor
flanges are used, the space between the pipe sleeve and drainpipe shall be sealed with sealant and
the flashing guard shall be upturned approximately 1-1/2 inches to fit the outside diameter of the
drainpipe and the inside diameter of the water closet floor flange. The upturned portion of the
sheet fitted into the floor flange shall be sealed.
3.1.4.3 Pipe Penetrations of Slab on Grade Floors
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 216 of 367
Where pipes, fixture drains, floor drains, cleanouts or similar items penetrate slab on grade
floors, except at penetrations of floors with waterproofing membrane as specified in paragraphs
Flashing Requirements and Waterproofing, a groove 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide by 1/4 to 3/8 inch deep
shall be formed around the pipe, fitting or drain. The groove shall be filled with a sealant as
specified.
3.1.4.4 Pipe Penetrations
Provide sealants for all pipe penetrations. All pipe penetrations shall be sealed to prevent
infiltration of air, insects, and vermin.
3.1.5 Supports
3.1.5.1 General
Hangers used to support piping 2 inches and larger shall be fabricated to permit adequate
adjustment after erection while still supporting the load. Pipe guides and anchors shall be
installed to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement, and to prevent
buckling, swaying, and undue strain. Piping subjected to vertical movement when operating
temperatures exceed ambient temperatures shall be supported by variable spring hangers and
supports or by constant support hangers. In the support of multiple pipe runs on a common base
member, a clip or clamp shall be used where each pipe crosses the base support member.
Spacing of the base support members shall not exceed the hanger and support spacing required
for an individual pipe in the multiple pipe run. Threaded sections of rods shall not be formed or
bent.
3.1.5.2 Structural Attachments
Attachment to building structure concrete and masonry shall be by cast-in concrete inserts, builtin anchors, or masonry anchor devices. Inserts and anchors shall be applied with a safety factor
not less than 5. Supports shall not be attached to metal decking. Supports shall not be attached
to the underside of concrete filled floor or concrete roof decks unless approved by the
Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative. Masonry anchors for overhead applications
shall be constructed of ferrous materials only.
3.1.6 Pipe Cleanouts
Pipe cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than 4 inches
will not be required. A cleanout installed in connection with cast-iron soil pipe shall consist of a
long-sweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place shown. An extra-heavy castbrass or cast-iron ferrule with countersunk cast-brass head screw plug shall be caulked into the
hub of the fitting and shall be flush with the floor. Cleanouts in connection with other pipe,
where indicated, shall be T-pattern, 90-degree branch drainage fittings with cast-brass screw
plugs, except plastic plugs shall be installed in plastic pipe. Plugs shall be the same size as the
pipe up to and including 4 inches. Cleanout tee branches with screw plug shall be installed at the
foot of soil and waste stacks, at the foot of interior downspouts, on each connection to building
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 217 of 367
storm drain where interior downspouts are indicated, and on each building drain outside the
building. Cleanouts on pipe concealed in partitions shall be provided with chromium plated
bronze, nickel bronze, nickel brass or stainless steel flush type access cover plates. Round access
covers shall be provided and secured to plugs with securing screw. Square access covers may be
provided with matching frames, anchoring lugs and cover screws. Cleanouts in finished walls
shall have access covers and frames installed flush with the finished wall. Cleanouts installed in
finished floors subject to foot traffic shall be provided with a chrome-plated cast brass, nickel
brass, or nickel bronze cover secured to the plug or cover frame and set flush with the finished
floor. Heads of fastening screws shall not project above the cover surface. Where cleanouts are
provided with adjustable heads, the heads shall be cast iron.
3.2 WATER HEATERS AND HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
3.2.1 Relief Valves
No valves shall be installed between a relief valve and its water heater or storage tank. The P&T
relief valve shall be installed where the valve actuator comes in contact with the hottest water in
the heater. Whenever possible, the relief valve shall be installed directly in a tapping in the tank
or heater; otherwise, the P&T valve shall be installed in the hot-water outlet piping. A vacuum
relief valve shall be provided on the cold water supply line to the hot-water storage tank or water
heater and mounted above and within 6 inches above the top of the tank or water heater.
3.2.2 Heat Traps
Piping to and from each water heater and hot water storage tank shall be routed horizontally and
downward a minimum of 2 feet before turning in an upward direction.
3.2.3 Connections to Water Heaters
Connections of metallic pipe to water heaters shall be made with dielectric unions or flanges.
3.2.4 Expansion Tank
A pre-charged expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply between the water
heater inlet and the cold water supply shut-off valve. The Contractor shall adjust the expansion
tank air pressure, as recommended by the tank manufacturer, to match incoming water pressure.
3.3 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE TRIMMINGS
Polished chromium-plated pipe, valves, and fittings shall be provided where exposed to view.
Angle stops, straight stops, stops integral with the faucets, or concealed type of lock-shield, and
loose-key pattern stops for supplies with threaded, sweat or solvent weld inlets shall be furnished
and installed with fixtures. Where connections between copper tubing and faucets are made by
rubber compression fittings, a beading tool shall be used to mechanically deform the tubing
above the compression fitting. Exposed traps and supply pipes for fixtures and equipment shall
be connected to the rough piping systems at the wall, unless otherwise specified under the item.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 218 of 367
Floor and wall escutcheons shall be as specified. Drain lines and hot water lines of fixtures for
handicapped personnel shall be insulated and do not require polished chrome finish. Plumbing
fixtures and accessories shall be installed within the space shown.
3.3.1 Fixture Connections
Where space limitations prohibit standard fittings in conjunction with the cast-iron floor flange,
special short-radius fittings shall be provided. Connections between earthenware fixtures and
flanges on soil pipe shall be made gastight and watertight with a closet-setting compound or
neoprene gasket and seal. Use of natural rubber gaskets or putty will not be permitted. Fixtures
with outlet flanges shall be set the proper distance from floor or wall to make a first-class joint
with the closet-setting compound or gasket and fixture used.
3.3.2 Height of Fixture Rims Above Floor
Lavatories shall be mounted with rim 31 inches above finished floor. Wall-hung drinking
fountains and water coolers shall be installed with rim 42 inches above floor. Wall-hung service
sinks shall be mounted with rim 28 inches above the floor. Installation of fixtures for use by the
physically handicapped shall be in accordance with ICC A117.1.
3.3.3 Shower Outfits
The area around the water supply piping to the mixing valves and behind the escutcheon plate
shall be made watertight by caulking or gasketing.
3.3.4 Fixture Supports
Fixture supports for off-the-floor lavatories, urinals, water closets, and other fixtures of similar
size, design, and use, shall be of the chair-carrier type. The carrier shall provide the necessary
means of mounting the fixture, with a foot or feet to anchor the assembly to the floor slab.
Adjustability shall be provided to locate the fixture at the desired height and in proper relation to
the wall. Support plates, in lieu of chair carrier, shall be fastened to the wall structure only
where it is not possible to anchor a floor-mounted chair carrier to the floor slab.
3.3.4.1 Support for Steel Stud Frame Partitions
Chair carrier shall be used. The anchor feet and tubular uprights shall be of the heavy duty
design; and feet (bases) shall be steel and welded to a square or rectangular steel tube upright.
Wall plates, in lieu of floor-anchored chair carriers, shall be used only if adjoining steel partition
studs are suitably reinforced to support a wall plate bolted to these studs.
3.3.5 Backflow Prevention Devices
Plumbing fixtures, equipment, and pipe connections shall not cross connect or interconnect
between a potable water supply and any source of nonpotable water. Backflow preventers shall
be installed where indicated and in accordance with ICC IPC all other locations necessary to
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 219 of 367
preclude a cross-connect or interconnect between a potable water supply and any nonpotable
substance. In addition backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations where the potable
water outlet is below the flood level of the equipment, or where the potable water outlet will be
located below the level of the nonpotable substance. Backflow preventers shall be located so
that no part of the device will be submerged. Backflow preventers shall be of sufficient size to
allow unrestricted flow of water to the equipment, and preclude the backflow of any nonpotable
substance into the potable water system. Bypass piping shall not be provided around backflow
preventers. Access shall be provided for maintenance and testing. Each device shall be a
standard commercial unit.
3.3.6 Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided for concealed valves and controls, or any item requiring
inspection or maintenance. Access panels shall be of sufficient size and located so that the
concealed items may be serviced, maintained, or replaced.
3.3.7 Traps
Each trap shall be placed as near the fixture as possible, and no fixture shall be double-trapped.
Traps installed on cast-iron soil pipe shall be cast iron. Traps installed on steel pipe or copper
tubing shall be recess-drainage pattern, or brass-tube type. Traps installed on plastic pipe may be
plastic conforming to ASTM D 3311. Traps for acid-resisting waste shall be of the same
material as the pipe.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
3.4.1 Identification Tags
Identification tags made of brass, engraved laminated plastic, or engraved anodized aluminum,
indicating service and valve number shall be installed on valves, except those valves installed on
supplies at plumbing fixtures. Tags shall be 1-3/8 inch minimum diameter, and marking shall be
stamped or engraved. Indentations shall be black, for reading clarity. Tags shall be attached to
valves with No. 12 AWG, copper wire, chrome-plated beaded chain, or plastic straps designed
for that purpose.
3.4.2 Pipe Color Code Marking
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND
COATINGS.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Escutcheons shall be provided at finished surfaces where bare or insulated piping, exposed to
view, passes through floors, walls, or ceilings, except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms.
Escutcheons shall be fastened securely to pipe or pipe covering and shall be satin-finish,
corrosion-resisting steel, polished chromium-plated zinc alloy, or polished chromium-plated
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 220 of 367
copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be either one-piece or split-pattern, held in place by internal
spring tension or setscrew.
3.6 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
Framed instructions under glass or in laminated plastic, including wiring and control diagrams
showing the complete layout of the entire system, shall be posted where directed. Condensed
operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the system
shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified above for the wiring and control diagrams
and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance
testing of the systems.
3.7 TABLES
TABLE I
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR
DRAINAGE, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Item # Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
C
D
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, hub
and spigot, ASTM A 74 with
compression gaskets. Pipe and
fittings shall be marked with the
CISPI trademark.
X
X
X
X
2 Wrought copper and wrought
alloy solder-joint drainage
fittings. ASME B16.29
X
X
X
X
3 Cast copper alloy solder joint
drainage fittings, DWV,
ASME B16.23
X
X
X
X
4 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
plastic drain, waste, and vent pipe
and fittings ASTM D 2661,
ASTM F 628
X
X
X
X
SERVICE:
A - Underground Building Soil, Waste and Storm Drain
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 221 of 367
B - Aboveground Soil, Waste, Drain In Buildings
C - Underground Vent
D - Aboveground Vent
E - Interior Rainwater Conductors Aboveground
F - Corrosive Waste And Vent Above And Belowground
* - Hard Temper
TABLE II
PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS FOR PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Item No. Pipe and Fitting Materials
A
B
D
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Malleable-iron threaded fittings,
a. Galvanized, ASME B16.3
for use with Item 4a
X
X
X
X
X
X
3 Bronze flanged fittings,
ASME B16.24 for use with
Items 5 and 7
X
X
X
4 Seamless copper pipe, ASTM B 42
X
X
X
5 Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint
pressure fittings,
ASME B16.22 for
use with Items 5
X
X
X
6 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, based on
outside diameter ASTM D 2447
X
X
7 Butt fusion polyethylene (PE) plastic
X
X
b. Same as "a" but not galvanized
for use with Item 4b
2 Steel pipe:
a. Seamless, galvanized,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B
b. Seamless, black,
ASTM A 53/A 53M,
Type S, Grade B
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 222 of 367
pipe fittings, ASTM D 3261
for use with Items 14
8 Polyethylene (PE) plastic tubing,
ASTM D 2737
X
9 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic hot and cold
water distribution system,
ASTM D 2846/D 2846M
X
X
X
10 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe, Schedule 40
and 80, ASTM F 441/F 441M
X
X
X
11 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 442/F 442M
X
X
X
12 Threaded chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(chloride CPVC) plastic pipe fittings,
Schedule 80, ASTM F 437,
for use with Items 20, and 21
X
X
X
13 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM F 438
for use with Items 20, 21, and 22
X
X
X
14 Socket-type chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe fittings
Schedule 80, ASTM F 439
for use with Items 20, 21, and 22
X
X
X
15 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120,
ASTM D 1785
X
X
16 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure-rated
pipe (SDR Series), ASTM D 2241
X
X
17 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
fittings, Schedule 40, ASTM D 2466
X
X
18 Socket-type polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
X
X
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 223 of 367
X
ASTM D 2467 for use with Items 26 and 27
19 Threaded polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
plastic pipe fittings, schedule 80,
ASTM D 2464
X
X
20 Joints for IPS pvs pipe using solvent
cement, ASTM D 2672
X
X
21 Steel pipeline flanges, MSS SP-44
X
22 Fittings: brass or bronze;
ASME B16.15, and ASME B16.18
ASTM B 828
X
X
23 Carbon steel pipe unions,
socket-welding and threaded,
MSS SP-83
X
X
24 Malleable-iron threaded pipe
unions ASME B16.39
X
X
25 Nipples, pipe threaded ASTM A 733
X
X
26 Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX)
Plastic Pipe ASTM F 877
X
X
27 Press Fittings
X
X
A - Cold Water Service Aboveground
B - Hot and Cold Water Distribution 180 degrees F Maximum
Aboveground
C - Compressed Air Lubricated
D - Cold Water Service Belowground
Indicated types are minimum wall thicknesses.
** - Type L - Hard
*** - Type K - Hard temper with brazed joints only or type K-soft temper
without joints in or under floors
**** - In or under slab floors only brazed joints
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 22 00 00 Page 224 of 367
X
SECTION 23 03 00
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections 22, PLUMBING; and 23, HEATING, VENTILATING, AND
AIR CONDITIONING of this project specification, unless specified otherwise in the individual
section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.2.1 Material and Equipment Qualifications
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged
in the manufacture of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
Standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
bid opening. The 2-year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been for sale on the commercial
market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2 year period.
1.2.2 Service Support
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations.
1.2.3 Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.2.4 Modification of References
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction", or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.2.4.1 Definitions
For the International Code Council (ICC) Codes referenced in the contract documents, advisory
provisions shall be considered mandatory, the word "should" shall be interpreted as "shall."
Reference to the "code official" shall be interpreted to mean the "Contracting Officer's Technical
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 03 00 Page 225 of 367
Representative." For Coast Guard owned property, references to the "owner" shall be interpreted
to mean the "Contracting Officer." For leased facilities, references to the "owner" shall be
interpreted to mean the "lessor." References to the "permit holder" shall be interpreted to mean
the "Contractor."
1.2.4.2 Administrative Interpretations
For ICC Codes referenced in the contract documents, the provisions of Chapter 1,
"Administrator," do not apply. These administrative requirements are covered by the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) included in this contract and by the authority granted to
the Contracting Officer to administer the construction of this project. References in the ICC
Codes to sections of Chapter 1, shall be applied appropriately by the Contracting Officer as
authorized by his administrative cognizance and the FAR.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Replace damaged or defective items.
1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.
1.4.1 New Work
Provide electrical components of mechanical equipment, such as motors, motor starters (except
starters/controllers which are indicated as part of a motor control center), control or push-button
stations, float or pressure switches, solenoid valves, integral disconnects, and other devices
functioning to control mechanical equipment, as well as control wiring and conduit for circuits
rated 100 volts or less, to conform with the requirements of the section covering the mechanical
equipment. Extended voltage range motors shall not be permitted. The interconnecting power
wiring and conduit, control wiring rated 120 volts (nominal) and conduit, the motor control
equipment forming a part of motor control centers, and the electrical power circuits shall be
provided under Division 26, except internal wiring for components of package equipment shall
be provided as an integral part of the equipment. When motors and equipment furnished are
larger than sizes indicated, provide any required changes to the electrical service as may be
necessary and related work as a part of the work for the section specifying that motor or
equipment.
1.4.2 High Efficiency Motors
1.4.2.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall
be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 03 00 Page 226 of 367
1.4.2.2 High Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Unless otherwise specified, polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency
characteristics relative to the applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. Additionally, polyphase
squirrel-cage medium induction motors with continuous ratings shall meet or exceed energy
efficient ratings in accordance with Table 12-6C of NEMA MG 1.
1.4.3 Three-Phase Motor Protection
Provide controllers for motors rated one one horsepower and larger with electronic phase-voltage
monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide
protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay.
1.5 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
When specified in other sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full
instruction to the designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the specified equipment or system.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in
operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work.
Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has
been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of mandays (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately half of the time for
classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction with the equipment or system.
When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms
of the contract, provide additional instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
1.6 ACCESSIBILITY
Install all work so that parts requiring periodic inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair are
readily accessible. Install concealed valves, expansion joints, controls, dampers, and equipment
requiring access, in locations freely accessible through access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 03 00 Page 227 of 367
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 03 00 Page 228 of 367
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
a. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
b. COTR: Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
c. HVAC: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning; or heating, ventilating, and cooling.
d. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau
e. Out-of-tolerance data: Pertains only to field acceptance testing of Final DALT or TAB
report. When applied to TAB work this phase means "a measurement taken during TAB
field acceptance testing which does not fall within the range of plus 5 to minus 5 percent of
the original measurement reported on the TAB Report for a specific parameter."
f. Season of maximum heating load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the
project site remains within plus or minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's winter
outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.
g. Season of maximum cooling load: The time of year when the outdoor temperature at the
project site remains within plus or minus 5 degrees Fahrenheit of the project site's summer
outdoor design temperature, throughout the period of TAB data recording.
h. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing (of HVAC systems).
i. TAB'd: HVAC Testing/Adjusting/Balancing procedures performed.
j. TAB Agency: TAB Firm
k. TAB team field leader: TAB team field leader
l. TAB team supervisor: TAB team engineer.
m. TAB team technicians: TAB team assistants.
n. TABB: Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau.
1.2 WORK DESCRIPTION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 05 93 Page 229 of 367
The work includes testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of new heating, ventilating, and
cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems including equipment and performance data, ducts, and
piping which are located within, on, under, between, and adjacent to buildings.
Perform TAB in accordance with the requirements of the TAB procedural standard
recommended by the TAB trade association that approved the TAB Firm's qualifications.
Comply with requirements of AABC MN-1, NEBB PROCEDURAL STANDARDS, or
SMACNA 1780 (TABB) as supplemented and modified by this specification section. All
recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB procedural standards are
considered mandatory.
1.2.1 TAB SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS
Show the following information on TAB Schematic Drawings:
1. A unique number or mark for each piece of equipment or terminal.
2. Air quantities at air terminals.
3. Air quantities and temperatures in air handling unit schedules.
The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Specialist must review the Contract Plans and
Specifications and advise the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative of any deficiencies
that would prevent the effective and accurate TAB of the system, and systems readiness check.
The TAB Specialist must provide a Design Review Report individually listing each deficiency
and the corresponding proposed corrective action necessary for proper system operation.
Submit three copies of the TAB Schematic Drawings and Report Forms to the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative, no later than 21 days prior to the start of TAB field
measurements.
1.2.2 Related Requirements
Specific requirements relating to Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) principals and
Predictive Testing and Inspection (PTI), by the construction contractor to detect latent
manufacturing and installation defects must be followed as part of the Contractor's Quality
Control program. Refer to the paragraph titled "Sustainability" for detailed requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-06 Test Reports
TAB report for Season 1; CO
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 05 93 Page 230 of 367
SD-07 Certificates
Independent TAB agency and personnel qualifications; CO
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Independent Tab Agency and Personnel Qualifications
To secure approval for the proposed agency, submit information certifying that the TAB agency
is a first tier subcontractor who is not affiliated with any other company participating in work on
this contract, including design, furnishing equipment, or construction. Further, submit the
following, for the agency, to Contracting Officer for approval:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 05 93 Page 231 of 367
SECTION 23 07 00
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
11/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified herein;
factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be insulated.
1.1.2 Surface Burning Characteristics
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall have a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a
maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame
spread, and smoke developed indexes, shall be determined by ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL
723. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness as the material to be
used in the actual construction. Test specimens shall be prepared and mounted according to
ASTM E 2231. Insulation materials located exterior to the building perimeter are not required to
be fire rated.
1.1.3 Recycled Materials
Provide thermal insulation containing recycled materials to the extent practicable, provided that
the materials meets all other requirements of this section. The minimum recycled material
content of the following insulation are:
Rock Wool - 75 percent slag of weight
Fiberglass - 20-25 percent glass cullet by weight
Rigid Foam - 9 percent recovered material
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08
Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 232 of 367
A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature,
performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The product number, kvalue, thickness and furnished accessories including adhesives, sealants and jackets for
each mechanical system requiring insulation shall be included. The product data must
be copywrited, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been
published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation. Materials furnished under this
section of the specification shall be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction
with the MICA plates booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which
MICA plate is applicable.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Pipe Insulation Systems; G
Duct Insulation Systems; G
Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions for the
insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation Stds plates
booklet. Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which product data and
which MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be copywrited, have an
identifying or publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance
date of this solicitation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualified installers shall have successfully completed three or more similar type jobs within the
last 5 years.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials delivered and
placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity, dirt, dust and other
contaminants. The Contracting Officer's Technical Representative may reject insulation material
and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means. Packages or
standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and coatings delivered for
use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's stamp or label attached giving
the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a description of the material. Insulation packages
and containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory
use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide field-applied insulation for heating,
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 233 of 367
ventilating, and cooling (HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are located
within, on, under, and adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Insulation
exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be
compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which
applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless steel surfaces shall meet
ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and conform to the following:
2.2.1 Adhesives
2.2.1.1 Adhesives
Adhesive shall be a nonflammable, fire-resistant adhesive conforming to ASTM C 916, Type I.
2.2.2 Caulking
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use A.
2.2.3 Corner Angles
Nominal 0.016 inch aluminum 1 by 1 inch with factory applied kraft backing. Aluminum shall
be ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3105, or 5005.
2.2.4 Finishing Cement
ASTM C 449: Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal insulating and finishing cement. All
cements that may come in contact with Austenitic stainless steel must comply with ASTM C
795.
2.2.5 Fibrous Glass Cloth and Glass Tape
Fibrous glass cloth, with 20X20 maximum mesh size, and glass tape shall have maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84. Tape shall be 4 inch wide rolls. Class 3 tape shall be 4.5 ounces/square yard.
2.2.6 Staples
Outward clinching type monel.
2.2.7 Jackets
2.2.7.1 Aluminum Jackets
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 234 of 367
Aluminum jackets shall be corrugated, embossed or smooth sheet, 0.016 inch nominal thickness;
ASTM B 209, Temper H14, Temper H16, Alloy 3003, 5005, or 3105. Corrugated aluminum
jacket shall not be used outdoors. Aluminum jacket securing bands shall be Type 304 stainless
steel, 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide for pipe under 12 inch diameter and 3/4 inch wide for pipe
over 12 inch and larger diameter. Aluminum jacket circumferential seam bands shall be 2 by
0.016 inch aluminum matching jacket material. Bands for insulation below ground shall be 3/4
by 0.020 inch thick stainless steel, or fiberglass reinforced tape. The jacket may, at the option of
the Contractor, be provided with a factory fabricated Pittsburgh or "Z" type longitudinal joint.
When the "Z" joint is used, the bands at the circumferential joints shall be designed by the
manufacturer to seal the joints and hold the jacket in place.
2.2.7.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Jackets
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket and fitting covers shall have high impact strength, UV resistant
rating or treatment and moderate chemical resistance with minimum thickness 0.030 inch.
2.2.8 Vapor Retarder Required
ASTM C 921, Type I, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces except
concealed ductwork, where a minimum puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable.
Minimum tensile strength, 35 pounds/inch width. ASTM C 921, Type II, minimum puncture
resistance 25 Beach units, tensile strength minimum 20 pounds/inch width. Jackets used on
insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.
Based on the application, insulation materials that require factory applied jackets are mineral
fiber, cellular glass, polyisocyanurate, and phenolic foam. Insulation materials that do not
require jacketing are flexible elastomerics. All non-metallic jackets shall have a maximum flame
spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
2.2.8.1 White Vapor Retarder All Service Jacket (ASJ)
Standard reinforced fire retardant jacket for use on hot/cold pipes, ducts, or equipment. Vapor
retarder jackets used on insulation exposed in finished areas shall have white finish suitable for
painting without sizing.
2.2.8.2 Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings
a. The vapor barrier shall be self adhesive (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed)
greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed white jacket for use on
hot/cold pipes. Less than 0.02 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E
96M. Meeting UL 723 or ASTM E 84 flame and smoke requirements; UV resistant.
2.2.8.3 Vapor Barrier
The vapor barrier shall be greater than 3 ply self adhesive laminate -white vapor barrier jacketsuperior performance (less than 0.0000 permeability when tested in accordance with ASTM E
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 235 of 367
96/E 96M). Vapor barrier shall meet UL 723 or ASTM E 84 25 flame and 50 smoke
requirements; and UV resistant. Minimum burst strength 185 psi in accordance with ASTM D
774/D 774M. Tensile strength 68 lb/inch width (PSTC-1000). Tape shall be as specified for
laminated film vapor barrier above.
2.2.9 Vapor Retarder Not Required
ASTM C 921, Type II, Class D, minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all surfaces
except ductwork, where Type IV, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.10, a minimum
puncture resistance of 25 Beach units is acceptable. Jacket shall have a maximum flame spread
index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E 84.
2.2.10 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A 580/A 580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.
2.2.11 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.12 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type, or the
butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission of 0.02
perms, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index of 50
when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall be as listed in Table 2
and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 - IP. Pipe insulation materials shall be
limited to those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline (-30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications shall be as follows:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade 1, Type I or II.
Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the insulation.
Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 236 of 367
2.3.2 Below-ground Pipeline Insulation
For below-ground pipeline insulation the following requirements shall be met.
2.3.2.1 Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552, type II.
2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1 Duct Insulation
Provide factory-applied insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fireretardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal resistance (R) value and out-ofpackage R value.
2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface temperature
400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB, II, III, and IV.
2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-3, 3/4 pcf
nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F. Also ASTM C 1290 Type III may be
used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts, hangers,
etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation found to pull apart
after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until tests specified in other
sections of this specification are completed. Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall
be removed from surfaces to receive insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry.
Insulation shall not be removed from its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and
shall be returned to like containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each
workday. Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation
becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the insulation will
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 237 of 367
be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints shall be staggered on
multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with
demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces.
3.1.2 Installation of Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall be installed with seams and joints sealed with
rubberized contact adhesive. Flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be used on
surfaces greater than 200 degrees F. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of
insulation. Insulation exposed to weather and not shown to have jacketing shall be protected
with two coats of UV resistant finish or PVC or metal jacketing as recommended by the
manufacturer after the adhesive is dry and cured. A brush coating of adhesive shall be applied to
both butt ends to be joined and to both slit surfaces to be sealed. The adhesive shall be allowed
to set until dry to touch but tacky under slight pressure before joining the surfaces. Insulation
seals at seams and joints shall not be capable of being pulled apart one hour after application.
Insulation that can be pulled apart one hour after installation shall be replaced.
3.1.3 Welding
No welding shall be done on piping, duct or equipment without written approval of the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. The capacitor discharge welding process may be
used for securing metal fasteners to duct.
3.1.4 Pipes/Ducts which Require Insulation
Insulation is required on all pipes or ducts except for omitted items, as specified.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground cold pipeline systems as specified below to
form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs, fittings and appurtenances
unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full length units of insulation and using a
single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or scraps abutting each other shall not be used.
Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the physically
handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap, insulated where
exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 238 of 367
d. ASME stamps.
3.2.1.2 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches and less.
Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be stretched around
the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be adhered directly to the pipe on
the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation.
Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut pieces the same size as on adjacent piping.
Screwed fittings shall be insulated with sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces
and shall be overlapped and sealed to the adjacent pipe insulation.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 239 of 367
3.2.1.3 Pipe Insulation Material and Thickness
TABLE 1
Insulation Material For Piping (°F)
__________________________________________________________________________
Service
Material
Spec.
Type Class Vapor Retarder/
Vapor Barrier
Required
___________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic
Water Piping,
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II 2
No
Flex Elast Cell'r
ASTM C 534/C 534M
I
No
Polyofin Clos'cell
ASTM C 1427
I
No
___________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant
Flex Elast Cell'r
ASTM C 534/C 534M
I
No
Suction Piping
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II 1
Yes
(35°F nominal)
___________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate
Drain Located
Cellular Glass
ASTM C 552
II 2
No
Inside Bldg.
Flex Elast Cell'r
ASTM C 534/C 534M
I
No
___________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 2
Piping Insulation Thickness (inch and °F)
_______________________________________________________________________________
Tube And Pipe Size (Inches)
Service
Material
<1
1- <1.5
1.5- <4
4- <8 >or =
to 8
_______________________________________________________________________________
Cold Domestic
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
Water Piping,
Flex Elas Cell'r
1
1
___________________________________________________________________________
Refrigerant
Flex Elas Cell'r
0.5
0.5
Suction Piping
Cellular Glass
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
(35°F nominal)
_________________________________________________________________________
A/C condensate
Cellular Glass
1.5
Drain Located
Flex Elas Cell'r
1
Inside Bldg.
___________________________________________________________________________
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 240 of 367
3.2.2 Aboveground Cold Pipelines
The following cold pipelines for minus 30 to plus 60 degrees F, shall be insulated in accordance
with Table 2 except those piping listed in subparagraph Pipe Insulation in PART 3 as to be
omitted. This includes but is not limited to the following:
a. Domestic cold.
b. Refrigerant suction lines.
c. Air conditioner condensate drains.
3.2.2.1 Insulation Material and Thickness
Insulation thickness for cold pipelines shall be determined using Table 2.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Corner angles shall be installed on external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed
finished spaces before covering with jacket.
3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
Cold Air Ducts
Relief Ducts
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
Warm Air Ducts
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
3.3.2 Insulation and Vapor Retarder/Vapor Barrier for Cold Air Duct/Hot Air Duct
Insulation and vapor retarder/vapor barrier shall be provided for the following cold air ducts and
associated equipment.
a. Supply ducts.
b. Return air ducts.
c. Flexible run-outs (field-insulated).
d. Plenums.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 241 of 367
e. Fresh air intake ducts.
Insulation for rectangular ducts shall be flexible type where concealed, minimum density 3/4 pcf,
and rigid type where exposed, minimum density 3 pcf. Insulation for both concealed or exposed
round/oval ducts shall be flexible type, minimum density 3/4 pcf or a semi rigid board, minimum
density 3 pcf, formed or fabricated to a tight fit, edges beveled and joints tightly butted and
staggered. Insulation for all exposed ducts shall be provided with either a white, paint-able,
factory-applied Type I jacket or a field applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier jacket coating finish
as specified, the total field applied dry film thickness shall be approximately 1/16 inch.
Insulation on all concealed duct shall be provided with a factory-applied Type I or II vapor
retarder/vapor barrier jacket. Duct insulation shall be continuous through sleeves and prepared
openings except firewall penetrations. Duct insulation terminating at fire dampers, shall be
continuous over the damper collar and retaining angle of fire dampers, which are exposed to
unconditioned air and which may be prone to condensate formation. Duct insulation and vapor
retarder/vapor barrier shall cover the collar, neck, and any un-insulated surfaces of diffusers,
registers and grills. Vapor retarder/vapor barrier materials shall be applied to form a complete
unbroken vapor seal over the insulation.
3.3.2.1 Installation on Concealed Duct
a. For rectangular or round ducts, flexible insulation shall be attached by applying adhesive
around the entire perimeter of the duct in 6 inch wide strips on 12 inch centers.
b. For rectangular ducts, 24 inches and larger insulation shall be additionally secured to
bottom of ducts by the use of mechanical fasteners. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch
centers and not more than 16 inches from duct corners.
c. For rectangular and round ducts, mechanical fasteners shall be provided on sides of duct
risers for all duct sizes. Fasteners shall be spaced on 16 inch centers and not more than 16
inches from duct corners.
d. Insulation shall be impaled on the mechanical fasteners (self stick pins) where used and
shall be pressed thoroughly into the adhesive. Care shall be taken to ensure vapor
retarder/vapor barrier jacket joints overlap 2 inches. The insulation shall not be compressed
to a thickness less than that specified. Insulation shall be carried over standing seams and
trapeze-type duct hangers.
e. Where mechanical fasteners are used, self-locking washers shall be installed and the pin
trimmed and bent over.
f. Jacket overlaps shall be secured with staples and tape as necessary to ensure a secure
seal. Staples, tape and seams shall be coated with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or
PVDC adhesive tape or greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 242 of 367
g. Breaks in the jacket material shall be covered with patches of the same material as the
vapor retarder jacket. The patches shall extend not less than 2 inches beyond the break or
penetration in all directions and shall be secured with tape and staples. Staples and tape
joints shall be sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating or PVDC adhesive tape or
greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) - less than 0.0000
perm adhesive tape.
h. At jacket penetrations such as hangers, thermometers, and damper operating rods, voids
in the insulation shall be filled and the penetration sealed with a brush coat of vapor retarder
coating or PVDC adhesive tape greater than 3 ply laminate (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3
mils embossed) - less than 0.0000 perm adhesive tape.
i. Insulation terminations and pin punctures shall be sealed and flashed with a reinforced
vapor retarder coating finish or tape with a brush coat of vapor retarder coating.. The
coating shall overlap the adjoining insulation and un-insulated surface 2 inches. Pin
puncture coatings shall extend 2 inches from the puncture in all directions.
j. Where insulation standoff brackets occur, insulation shall be extended under the bracket
and the jacket terminated at the bracket.
3.3.3 Duct Test Holes
After duct systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced, breaks in the insulation and jacket
shall be repaired in accordance with the applicable section of this specification for the type of
duct insulation to be repaired.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 07 00 Page 243 of 367
SECTION 23 31 13
METAL DUCTS
02/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
Encompass low-pressure systems ductwork and plenums where maximum air velocity is
2,000 feet per minute(fpm) and maximum static pressure is 2 inches water gage (wg),
positive or negative.
Submit Connection Diagrams for low pressure ductwork systems indicating the relation and
connection of devices and apparatus by showing the general physical layout of all controls,
the interconnection of one system (or portion of system) with another, and internal tubing,
wiring, and other devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists and Records of Existing Conditions in
accordance with paragraph entitled, "General Requirements," of this section.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Duct Supports
Submit the following in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Drawings," of this
section.
Connection Diagrams
Record Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Turning Vanes
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 244 of 367
Flexible Connectors
Flexible Duct Materials
Power Operated Dampers
Manual Volume Dampers
SD-06 Test Reports
Ductwork Leakage Tests
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates, showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in
this section for:
Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Mill-Rolled Reinforcing and Supporting Materials
Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Turning Vanes
Dampers
Flexible Connectors
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Power Operated Dampers
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of Contractor's survey of work
area conditions and features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite.
Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Include the manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference
numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site information within Material, Equipment, and
Fixture Lists.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Galvanized Steel Ductwork Materials
Galvanized steel ductwork sheet metal shall be carbon steel, of lock-forming quality, hot-dip
galvanized, with regular spangle-type zinc coating, conforming to ASTM A 924/A 924M and
ASTM A 653/A 653M, Designation G90. Treat duct surfaces to be painted by phosphatizing.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 245 of 367
Conform to ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and
SMACNA 1966 for sheet metal gages and reinforcement thickness.
Low pressure ductwork minimum standards are as follows:
MINIMUM SHEET METAL GAGE
DUCT WIDTH
INCHES
GAGE
0 - 12
13 - 30
31 - 60
26
24
22
2.1.2 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Conform to ASTM A 36/A 36Mfor mill-rolled structural steel and, wherever in contact with
sheet metal ducting galvanize to commercial weight of zinc or coated with materials conforming
to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Equivalent strength, proprietary design, rolled-steel structural support systems may be submitted
for approval in lieu of mill-rolled structural steel.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Round Sheet Metal Duct Fittings
Shop fabricate fittings.
Manufacture as separate fittings, not as tap collars welded or brazed into duct sections.
Submit for approval offset configurations.
Miter elbows shall be two-piece type for angles less than 31 degrees, three-piece type for angles
31 through 60 degrees, and five-piece type for angles 61 through 90 degrees. Centerline radius
of elbows shall be 1-1/2 times fitting cross section diameter.
Crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees shall be conical type.
Cutouts in fitting body shall be equal to branch tap dimension or, where smaller, excess material
shall be flared and rolled into smooth radius nozzle configuration.
2.2.2 Reinforcement
Support inner liners of both duct and fittings by metal spacers welded in position to maintain
spacing and concentricity.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 246 of 367
2.2.3 Fittings
Make divided flow fittings as separate fittings, not tap collars into duct sections, with the
following construction requirements:
Sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap
Tap liner securely welded to inner liner, with weld spacing not to exceed 3 inches
Pack insulation around the branch tap area for complete cavity filling.
Carefully fit branch connection to cutout openings in inner liner without spaces for air
erosion of insulation and without sharp projections that cause noise and airflow disturbance.
Continuously braze seams in the pressure shell of fittings. Protect galvanized areas that have
been damaged by welding with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
Submit for approval offset configurations.
Elbows shall be two-piece type for angles through 35 degrees, three-piece type for angles 36
through 71 degrees, and five-piece type for angles 72 through 90 degrees.
Crosses, increasers, reducers, reducing tees, and 90-degree tees shall be conical type.
2.2.4 Turning Vanes
Turning vanes shall be double-wall type, commercially manufactured for high-velocity system
service.
2.2.5 Dampers
Low pressure drop, high-velocity manual volume dampers, and high-velocity fire dampers shall
be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
2.2.6 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Connectors shall be UL listed, 30-ounce per square foot, waterproof, fire-retardant, airtight,
woven fibrous-glass cloth, double coated with chloroprene. Clear width, not including clamping
section, shall be 6 to 8 inches.
2.2.7 Duct Hangers
Duct hangers in contact with galvanized duct surfaces shall be galvanized steel painted with
inorganic zinc.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 247 of 367
2.2.8 Mill-Rolled Reinforcing And Supporting Materials
Mill-rolled structural steel shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M and, whenever in contact with
sheet metal ducting, shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Equivalent strength, proprietary-design, rolled-steel structural support systems may be submitted
for approval in lieu of mill-rolled structural steel.
2.2.9 Flexible Duct Materials
Flexible duct connectors shall be in accordance with UL 181, Class 1 material and shall comply
with NFPA 90A.
Wire-reinforced cloth duct shall consist of a chloroprene fibrous-glass cloth bonded to and
supported by a corrosion-protected spring steel helix. Fabric may be a laminate of metallic film
and fibrous glass. Working pressure rating of ducting shall be not less than three times
maximum system pressure, and temperature range shall be minus 20 to plus 175 degrees F.
2.2.10 Manual Volume Dampers
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for volume damper construction.
Equip dampers with an indicating quadrant regulator with a locking feature externally located
and easily accessible for adjustment and standoff brackets to allow mounting outside external
insulation. Where damper rod lengths exceed 30 inches, provide a regulator at each end of
damper shaft.
All damper shafts shall have two-end bearings.
Damper shaft shall be full length and shall extend beyond damper blade. A 3/8 inch square shaft
shall be used for damper lengths up to 20 inches and a 1/2 inch square shaft shall be used for
damper lengths 20 inches and larger. Where necessary to prevent damper vibration or slippage,
adjustable support rods with locking provisions external to duct shall be provided at damper
blade end.
Dampers in ducts having a width perpendicular to the axis of the damper that is greater than 12
inches shall be multiblade type having a substantial frame with blades fabricated of 16-gage
metal. Blades shall not exceed 10 inches in width and 48 inches in length and shall be pinned to
1/2 inch diameter shafts. Dampers greater than 48 inches in width shall be made in two or more
sections with intermediate mullions, each section being mechanically interlocked with the
adjoining section or sections. Blades shall have graphite-impregnated nylon bearings and shall
be connected so that adjoining blades rotate in opposite directions.
2.2.11 Power-Operated Dampers
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 248 of 367
Shall be indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Provide sheet metal construction in accordance with the recommendations for best practices in
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, SMACNA 1966, NFPA 90A, and ASHRAE FUN IP,
Chapter 32.
Where construction methods for certain items are not described in the referenced standards or
herein, perform the work in accordance with recommendations for best practice defined in
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK.
Clean free of oil, grease, and deleterious substances sheet metal surfaces to be painted and
surfaces to which adhesives are to be applied.
Duct strength shall be adequate to prevent failure under service pressure or vacuum created by
fast closure of duct devices. Provide leaktight, automatic relief devices.
Supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC 360and AISC
325.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Fabricate airtight and include reinforcements, bracing, supports, framing, gasketing, sealing, and
fastening to provide rigid construction and freedom from vibration, airflow-induced motion and
noise, and excessive deflection at specified maximum system air pressure and velocity.
Enclose dampers located behind architectural intake or exhaust louvers by a rigid sheet metal
collar and sealed to building construction with elastomers for complete air tightness.
Provide outside air-intake ducts and plenums made from sheet metal with soldered watertight
joints.
Provide offsets and transformations as required to avoid interference with the building
construction, piping, or equipment.
Make plenum anchorage provisions, sheet metal joints, and other areas airtight and watertight by
calking mating galvanized steel and concrete surfaces with a two-component elastomer.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Low Pressure Sheet Metal Ducts
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 249 of 367
Weld angle iron frames at corners and ends, whenever possible. Angle iron reinforcements shall
be riveted or welded to ducts not more than 6 inches on center, with not less than two points of
attachment. Spot welding, where used, shall be 3 inches on center.
Standard seam joints shall be sealed with an elastomer compound to comply with SMACNA
1966 Seal Class A, B or C as applicable.
Crossbreaking shall be limited to 4 feet and shall be provided on all ducts 8 inches wide and
wider. Bead reinforcement shall be provided in lieu of crossbreaking where panel popping may
occur. Where rigid insulation will be applied, crossbreaking is not required.
3.3.1.1 Longitudinal Duct Seams
Corner seams shall be Pittsburg lock.
3.3.1.2 Joints and Gaskets
Companion angle flanges shall be bolted together with 1/4 inch diameter bolts and nuts spaced 6
inches on center. Flanged joints shall be gasketed with chloroprene full-face gaskets 1/8 inch
thick, with Shore A 40 durometer hardness. Gaskets shall be one piece and vulcanized at joints.
3.3.1.3 Flexible Duct Joints
Joints between flexible duct without sheet metal collars and round metal ductwork connections
shall be made by trimming the ends, coating the inside of the flexible duct for a distance equal to
depth of insertion with elastomer calk, and by securing with sheet metal screws or binding with a
strap clamp.
3.3.1.4 Square Elbows
Provide single-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966, and may be used on ducts 12
inches wide and narrower.
Provide double-vane duct turns in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.5 Radius Elbows
Conform to SMACNA 1966 for radius elbows. Provide an inside radius equal to the width of the
duct. Where installation conditions preclude use of standard elbows, the inside radius may be
reduced to a minimum of 0.25 times duct width and install turning vanes in accordance with the
following schedule.
WIDTH OF ELBOWS
INCHES
RADIUS OF TURNING
VANES IN PERCENT OF DUCT WIDTH
VANE NO. 1 VANE NO. 2 VANE NO. 3
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 250 of 367
Up to 16
56
--
--
17 to 48
43
73
--
49 and over
37
55
83
Where two elbows are placed together in the same plane in ducts 30 inches wide and larger, the
guide vanes shall be continuous through both elbows rather than spaced in accordance with
above schedule.
3.3.1.6 Outlets, Inlets, And Duct Branches
Install branches, inlets, and outlets so that air turbulence will be reduced to a minimum and air
volume properly apportioned. Install adjustable splitter dampers at all supply junctions to permit
adjustment of the amount of air entering the branch.
3.3.1.7 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, the angle of the side of the transition piece shall not exceed
15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.
3.3.1.8 Branch Connections
Construct radius tap-ins in accordance with SMACNA 1966.
3.3.1.9 Access Openings
Install access doors and panels in ductwork at controls or at any item requiring periodic
inspection, adjustment, maintenance, or cleaning, and every 20 feet 6.1M for indoor air quality
housekeeping purposes.
Construct access door in accordance with SMACNA 1966, except that sliding doors may be used
only for special conditions upon prior approval. Insulated doors shall be double-panel type.
Access doors that leak shall be made airtight by adding or replacing hinges and latches or by
construction of new doors adequately reinforced, hinged, and latched.
3.3.1.10 Plenum Construction
Intake and discharge plenum shall have companion angle joints with the following minimum
thickness of materials:
LONGEST
ANGLES
SIDE
INCHES
SHEET
METAL
USS GAGE
ALL SIDES
COMPANION ANGLES
INCHES
REINFORCEMENT
INCHES, 24 INCHES ON
CENTER MAXIMUM
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 251 of 367
To 48
20
1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
49 to 84
18
2 by 2 by 1/8
2 by 2 by 3/16
85 to 120
16
2 by 2 by 1/8
2 by 2 by 1/8
121 and larger
14
2 by 2 by 3/16
2 by 2 by 3/16
At the floor line and other points where plenums join masonry construction, panels shall be
bolted 12 inches on center to 2- by 2- by 3/16 inch thick hot-dip galvanized steel angle that has
been secured to the masonry with masonry anchors and bolts 24 inches on center and calked tight
to the masonry.
3.3.1.11 Manual Volume Dampers
Balancing dampers of the splitter, butterfly, or multilouver type, shall be provided to balance
each respective main and branch duct.
Dampers regulated through ceilings shall have regulator concealed in box mounted in the ceiling,
with a cover finish aesthetically compatible with ceiling surface. Where ceiling is of removable
construction, regulators shall be above ceiling, and location shall be marked on ceiling in a
manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
3.3.1.12 Flexible Connectors For Sheet Metal
Air handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets shall
be connected to upstream and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Connectors shall be installed only after system fans are operative, and vibration isolation
mountings have been adjusted. When system fans are operating, connectors shall be free of
wrinkle caused by misalignment or fan reaction. Width of surface shall be curvilinear.
3.3.2 Round Sheet Metal Ducts
3.3.2.1 Duct Gages, Joints, And Reinforcement
Sheet metal minimum thickness, joints, and reinforcement between joints shall be in accordance
with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA
1966.
Longitudinal duct joint shall be manufactured by machine, with spiral lockseams to and
including 60 inch diameters, and to dimensional tolerances compatible with fittings provided.
Ducts shall have supplemental girth angle supports, riveted with solid rivets 6 inches on center to
duct. Girth angles shall be located as follows:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 252 of 367
DIAMETER, INCHES
REINFORCEMENT-MAXIMUM SPACING, INCHES
25 to 36
1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 72
inches on center
37 to 50
1-1/4 by 1-1/4, 1/8 thick, 60
inches on center
51 to 60
1-1/2 by 1-1/2, 1/8 thick, 48
inches on center
Draw band girth joints are not acceptable.
Slip joints shall be made up by coating the male fitting with elastomer sealing materials,
exercising care to prevent mastic from entering fitting bore, leaving only a thin annular mastic
line exposed internally. Sheet metal screws shall be used to make assembly rigid, not less than
four screws per joint, maximum spacing 6 inches. Pop rivets shall not be used. All joints shall
be taped and heat sealed.
Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex-shaped, 5/16 inch diameter for ducts up to 50 inch diameter, and
3/8 inch diameter for 51 inch diameter ducts and larger.
Flanges shall be continuously welded to duct on outside of duct and intermittently welded with 1
inch welds every 4 inches on inside joint face. Excess filler metal shall be removed from inside
face. Galvanized areas that have been damaged by welding shall be protected with
manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant coating.
3.3.2.2 Duct Transitions
Where the shape of a duct changes, the angle of the side of the transition piece shall not exceed
15 degrees from the straight run of duct connected thereto.
3.3.3 Duct Supports
Install duct support in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN
IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966. Duct hangers shall meet the minimum size specified in
ASHRAE EQUIP IP HDBK, Chapter 16, ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 32 and SMACNA 1966.
Provide two hangers where necessary to eliminate sway. Support attachment to duct surfaces,
shall be by solid rivet 4 inches on center.
Hanger rods, angles, and straps shall be attached to beam clamps. Concrete inserts, masonry
anchors, and fasteners shall be approved for the application.
Hardened high-carbon spring-steel fasteners fitted onto beams and miscellaneous structural steel
are acceptable upon prior approval of each proposed application and upon field demonstration of
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 253 of 367
conformance to specification requirements. Fasteners shall be made from steel conforming to
AISI Type 1055, treated and finished in conformance with SAE AMS 2480, Type Z (zinc
phosphate base), Class 2 (supplementary treatment). A 72-hour load-carrying capacity shall be
verified by a certified independent laboratory.
Hanger spacing shall provide a 20-to-1 safety factor for supported load.
Maximum load supported by any two fasteners shall be 100 pounds.
Friction rod assemblies are not acceptable.
Ductwork and equipment shall not be hung from roof deck, piping, or other ducts or equipment.
Maximum span between any two points shall be 10 feet, with lesser spans as required by duct
assemblies, interferences, and permitted loads imposed.
There shall be not less than one set of hangers for each point of support. Hangers shall be
installed on both sides of all duct turns, branch fittings, and transitions.
Hangers shall be sufficiently cross braced to eliminate sway vertically and laterally.
Rectangular ducts up to 36 inches shall be supported by strap-type hangers attached at not less
than three places to not less than two duct surfaces in different planes.
Perforated strap hangers are not acceptable.
Rectangular ducting, 36 inches and larger, shall be supported by trapeze hangers. Ducts situated
in unconditioned areas and required to have insulation with a vapor-sealed facing shall be
supported on trapeze hangers. Hangers shall be spaced far enough out from the side of the duct
to permit the duct insulation to be placed on the duct inside the trapeze. Duct hangers shall not
penetrate the vapor-sealed facing.
Where trapeze hangers are used, the bottom of the duct shall be supported on angles sized as
follows:
WIDTH OF DUCT, INCHES
MINIMUM BOTTOM ANGLE SIZE, INCHES
30 and smaller
1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 1/8
31 to 48
1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8
49 to 72
1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16
73 to 96
2 by 2 by 1/4
97 and wider
3 by 3 by 1/4
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 254 of 367
Ducting, when supported from roof purlins, shall not be supported at points greater than onesixth of the purlin span from the roof truss. Load per hanger shall not exceed 400 pounds when
support is from a single purlin or 800 pounds when hanger load is applied halfway between
purlins by means of auxiliary support steel provided under this section. When support is not
halfway between purlins, the allowable hanger load shall be the product of 400 times the inverse
ratio of the longest distance to purlin-to-purlin spacing.
When the hanger load exceeds the above limits, provide reinforcing of purlin(s) or additional
support beam(s). When an additional beam is used, the beam shall bear on the top chord of the
roof trusses, and bearing shall be over gusset plates of top chord. Beam shall be stabilized by
connection to roof purlin along bottom flange.
Purlins used for supporting fire-protection sprinkler mains, electrical lighting fixtures, electrical
power ducts, or cable trays shall be considered fully loaded, and supplemental reinforcing or
auxiliary support steel shall be provided for these purlins.
3.3.4 Flexible Connectors For Steel Metal
Air-handling equipment, ducts crossing building expansion joints, and fan inlets and outlets shall
be connected to upstream and downstream components by treated woven-cloth connectors.
Install connectors only after system fans are operative and all vibration isolation mountings have
been adjusted. When system fans are operating, connectors shall be free of wrinkles caused by
misalignment or fan reaction. Width of surface shall be curvilinear.
3.3.5 Insulation Protection Angles
Galvanized 20-gage sheet, formed into an angle with a 2 inch exposed long leg with a 3/8 inch
stiffening break at outer edge, and with a variable concealed leg, depending upon insulation
thickness, shall be provided.
Install angles over all insulation edges terminating by butting against a wall, floor foundation,
frame, and similar construction. Fasten angles in place with blind rivets through the protection
angle, insulation, and sheet metal duct or plenum. Install angles after final insulation covering
has been applied.
3.3.6 Duct Probe Access
Provide holes with neat patches, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on caps for air-balancing
pitot tube access. Provide extended-neck fittings where probe access area is insulated.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Ductwork Leakage Tests
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 255 of 367
Contractor shall conduct complete leakage test of new ductwork in accordance with Section 23
05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. Tests shall be performed
prior to installing ductwork insulation.
3.4.2 Inspection
Ductwork shall be inspected in accordance with SMACNA 1987.
3.5 DUCTWORK CLEANING PROVISIONS
Open ducting shall be protected from construction dust and debris in a manner approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Dirty assembled ducting shall be cleaned by
subjecting all main and branch interior surfaces to airstreams moving at velocities two times
specified working velocities, at static pressures within maximum ratings. This may be
accomplished by: filter-equipped portable blowers which remain the Contractor's property;
wheel-mounted, compressed-air operated perimeter lances which direct the compressed air and
which are pulled in the direction of normal airflow; and other means approved by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Compressed air used for cleaning ducting shall
be water- and oil- free. After construction is complete, and prior to acceptance of the work,
construction dust and debris shall be removed from exterior surfaces. SMACNA 1987.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be consistent with manufacturer's standard brochures,
schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures and safety precautions.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 31 13 Page 256 of 367
SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLS
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Certify air diffusion devices s having been tested and rated in accordance with ASHRAE EQUIP
IP HDBK, Chapter 17; ASHRAE FUN IP, Chapter 31, and ASHRAE 113, where such
certification is required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit the following in accordance with this section.
Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
Records of Existing Conditions
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit Fabrication Drawings for air-diffusion devices in accordance with this section.
Submit Installation Drawings for air-diffusion devices in accordance with the
paragraph entitled, "Installation," of this section.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Provide operation and maintenance manuals consistent with manufacturer's standard
brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures and safety
precautions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
Preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration on air-diffusion device construction and mounting. Modify
devices and provide accessories necessary for mounting in indicated surface construction.
Match color with architectural background.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 37 13 Page 257 of 367
Provide supply diffusers with combination damper and equalizing grid. Ensure dampers are
extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
Ensure air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments can be made from the face of the
device. Make volume adjustments by removable key.
Provide gaskets for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.
Include within the Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists the manufacturer's style or catalog
numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication
site information.
Submit Records of Existing Conditions consisting of the results of Contractor's survey of work
area conditions and features of existing structures and facilities within and adjacent to the jobsite.
Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
Submit Fabrication Drawings for air-diffusion devices consisting of fabrication and assembly
details to be performed in the factory.
2.2 TYPES OF AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICES
2.2.1 Type DP Series
Provide type DP series supply diffuser with a square, perforated, hinged, face plate with opposed
blade volume control, white baked enamel exterior finish, and black matte finish on exposed-toview interior surface.
Provide four-way deflection.
2.2.2 Type GR
Provide type GR return grilles, single deflection type with fixed face bars.
Provide grilles installed in vertical surfaces with horizontal face bars set downward at 35 degrees
from vertical.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
2.2.3 Type GCE
Provide type GCE with an individually adjustable, vertical and horizontal, curved-blade grille
and a three-way pattern.
Provide a baked enamel finish.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 37 13 Page 258 of 367
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment as indicated and specified and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
Submit installation Drawings for air-diffusion devices. Indicate on drawings overall physical
features, dimensions, ratings, service requirements, and equipment weights.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 37 13 Page 259 of 367
SECTION 23 82 02
UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
04/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide electrical equipment, motors, motor efficiencies, and wiring which are in accordance
with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Electrical motor driven
equipment specified shall be provided complete with motors, motor starters, and controls.
Electrical characteristics shall be as shown, and unless otherwise indicated, all motors of 1
horsepower and above with open, dripproof, totally enclosed, or explosion proof fan cooled
enclosures, shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1. Field wiring
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each motor shall conform to NEMA
MG 1 and NEMA MG 2 and be of sufficient size to drive the equipment at the specified capacity
without exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor. Motors shall be continuous duty with the
enclosure specified. Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection
and other appurtenances necessary for the motor control indicated. Motors shall be furnished
with a magnetic across-the-line or reduced voltage type starter as required by the manufacturer.
Motor duty requirements shall allow for maximum frequency start-stop operation and minimum
encountered interval between start and stop. Motors shall be sized for the applicable loads.
Motor torque shall be capable of accelerating the connected load within 20 seconds with 80
percent of the rated voltage maintained at motor terminals during one starting period. Motor
bearings shall be fitted with grease supply fittings and grease relief to outside of enclosure.
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified
and any control wiring required for controls and devices specified, but not shown, shall be
provided.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
Drawings provided in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with contract
requirements, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Materials and Equipment
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 260 of 367
Manufacturer's standard catalog data, at least 5 weeks prior to the purchase or
installation of a particular component, highlighted to show material, size, options,
performance charts and curves, etc. in adequate detail to demonstrate compliance with
contract requirements. Data shall include manufacturer's recommended installation
instructions and procedures. If vibration isolation is specified for a unit, vibration
isolator literature shall be included containing catalog cuts and certification that the
isolation characteristics of the isolators provided meet the manufacturer's
recommendations. Data shall be submitted for each specified component.
Spare Parts
Spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified.
Posted Instructions
Posted instructions, at least 2 weeks prior to construction completion, including
equipment layout, wiring and control diagrams, piping, valves and control sequences,
and typed condensed operation instructions. The condensed operation instructions
shall include preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the system
for normal and safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and stopping the
system. The posted instructions shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic and
be posted where indicated by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
Verification of Dimensions
A letter, at least 2 weeks prior to beginning construction, including the date the site
was visited, confirmation of existing conditions, and any discrepancies found.
Coil Corrosion Protection
Product data on the type coating selected, the coating thickness, the application
process used, the estimated heat transfer loss of the coil, and verification of
conformance with the salt spray test requirement.
System Performance Tests
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the start of related testing, for the system
performance tests. The schedules shall identify the proposed date, time, and location
for each test.
A schedule, at least 2 weeks prior to the date of the proposed training course, which
identifies the date, time, and location for the training.
SD-06 Test Reports
Refrigerant Tests, Charging, and Start-Up; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 261 of 367
Six copies of each test containing the information described below in bound 8-1/2 by
11 inch booklets. Individual reports shall be submitted for the refrigerant system tests.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The date the tests were performed.
A list of equipment used, with calibration certifications.
Initial test summaries.
Repairs/adjustments performed.
Final test results.
System Performance Tests; G
Six copies of the report provided in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets. The report
shall document compliance with the specified performance criteria upon completion
and testing of the system. The report shall indicate the number of days covered by the
tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system.
SD-07 Certificates
Materials and Equipment
Where the system, components, or equipment are specified to comply with
requirements of AHRI, ASHRAE, ASME, or UL, proof of such compliance shall be
provided. The label or listing of the specified agency shall be acceptable evidence. In
lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized
testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have
been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of the specified
agency may be submitted. When performance requirements of this project's drawings
and specifications vary from standard AHRI rating conditions, computer printouts,
catalog, or other application data certified by AHRI or a nationally recognized
laboratory as described above shall be included. If AHRI does not have a current
certification program that encompasses such application data, the manufacturer may
self certify that his application data complies with project performance requirements in
accordance with the specified test standards.
Service Organization
A certified list of qualified permanent service organizations, which includes their
addresses and qualifications, for support of the equipment. The service organizations
shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment installation and be able to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the
warranty period of the contract.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 262 of 367
Six complete copies of an operation manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11 inch booklets
listing step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, abnormal
shutdown, emergency shutdown, and normal shutdown at least 4 weeks prior to the
first training course. The booklets shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, and parts list. The manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model
number, service manual, and a brief description of all equipment and their basic
operating features. Six complete copies of maintenance manual in bound 8-1/2 by 11
inch booklets listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and
repairs, and a trouble shooting guide. The manuals shall include piping and equipment
layouts and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. Carefully investigate the plumbing, fire protection, electrical,
structural and finish conditions that would affect the work to be performed and arrange such
work accordingly, furnishing required offsets, fittings, and accessories to meet such conditions.
Submit drawings consisting of:
a. Equipment layouts which identify assembly and installation details.
b. Plans and elevations which identify clearances required for maintenance and operation.
c. Wiring diagrams which identify each component individually and interconnected or
interlocked relationships between components.
d. Foundation drawings, bolt-setting information, and foundation bolts prior to concrete
foundation construction for equipment indicated or required to have concrete foundations.
e. Details, if piping and equipment are to be supported other than as indicated, which
include loadings and type of frames, brackets, stanchions, or other supports.
f. Automatic temperature control diagrams and control sequences.
g. Installation details which includes the amount of factory set superheat and corresponding
refrigerant pressure/temperature.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Stored items shall be protected from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and
dust, or other contaminants. Proper protection and care of all material both before and during
installation shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Replace any materials found to be damaged
at the Contractor's expense. During installation, piping and similar openings shall be capped to
keep out dirt and other foreign matter.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 263 of 367
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment specified, after approval of detail
drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. Include in the
data a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, a
recommended spare parts list for 1 year of operation, and a list of the parts recommended by the
manufacturer to be replaced on a routine basis.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Standard Products
Provide Materials and equipment that are standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged
in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years
prior to bid opening. The 2 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under
similar circumstances and of similar size. The 2 years experience shall be satisfactorily
completed by a product which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market
through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 2
year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation, for
not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. Products
shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be environmentally
suitable for the indicated locations.
2.1.2 Nameplates
Major equipment including compressors, condensers, receivers, heat exchanges, fans, and motors
shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog
number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. Plates shall be durable and legible
throughout equipment life and made of anodized aluminum. Plates shall be fixed in prominent
locations with nonferrous screws or bolts.
2.1.3 Safety Devices
Exposed moving parts, parts that produce high operating temperature, parts which may be
electrically energized, and parts that may be a hazard to operating personnel shall be insulated,
fully enclosed, guarded, or fitted with other types of safety devices. Safety devices shall be
installed so that proper operation of equipment is not impaired. Welding and cutting safety
requirements shall be in accordance with AWS Z49.1.
2.2 UNITARY EQUIPMENT, SPLIT SYSTEM
Unit shall be an air-cooled, split system which employs a remote condensing unit, a separate
indoor unit, and interconnecting refrigerant piping. Unit shall be the heat pump type conforming
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 264 of 367
to applicable Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards including UL 1995. Unit shall be rated
in accordance with AHRI 210/240. Unit shall be provided with necessary fans, air filters, coil
frost protection, internal dampers, mixing boxes, supplemental heat, and cabinet construction as
specified in paragraph "Unitary Equipment Components". The remote unit shall be as specified
in paragraph REMOTE CONDENSER OR CONDENSING UNIT. Evaporator or supply fans
shall be double-width, double inlet, forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blade,
centrifugal scroll type. Condenser or outdoor fans shall be the manufacturer's standard for the
unit specified and may be either propeller or centrifugal scroll type. Fan and condenser motors
shall have totally enclosed enclosures.
2.2.1 Air-to-Refrigerant Coil
Coils shall have copper or aluminum tubes of 3/8 inch minimum diameter with copper or
aluminum fins that are mechanically bonded or soldered to the tubes. Coil shall be protected in
accordance with paragraph COIL CORROSION PROTECTION. Casing shall be galvanized
steel or aluminum. Contact of dissimilar metals shall be avoided. Coils shall be tested in
accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34 at the factory and be suitable for the working pressure of the
installed system. Each coil shall be dehydrated and sealed after testing and prior to evaluation
and charging. Each unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of refrigerant and oil
or a holding charge. Unit shipped with a holding charge shall be field charged. Separate
expansion devices shall be provided for each compressor circuit.
2.2.2 Compressor
Compressor shall be direct drive, semi-hermetic or hermetic reciprocating, or scroll type capable
of operating at partial load conditions. Compressor shall be capable of continuous operation
down to the lowest step of unloading as specified. Compressors of 10 tons and larger shall be
provided with capacity reduction devices to produce automatic capacity reduction of at least 50
percent. If standard with the manufacturer, two or more compressors may be used in lieu of a
single compressor with unloading capabilities, in which case the compressors will operate in
sequence, and each compressor shall have an independent refrigeration circuit through the
condenser and evaporator. Each compressor shall start in the unloaded position. Each
compressor shall be provided with vibration isolators, crankcase heater, thermal overloads,
lubrication pump, high and low pressure safety cutoffs and protection against short cycling.
2.2.3 Refrigeration Circuit
Refrigerant-containing components shall comply with ASHRAE 15 & 34 and be factory tested,
cleaned, dehydrated, charged, and sealed. Refrigerant charging valves and connections, and
pumpdown valves shall be provided for each circuit. Filter-drier shall be provided in each liquid
line and be reversible-flow type. Refrigerant flow control devices shall be an adjustable
superheat thermostatic expansion valve with external equalizer matched to coil, capillary or
thermostatic control, and a pilot solenoid controlled, leak-tight, four-way refrigerant flow
reversing valve. A refrigerant suction line thermostatic control shall be provided to prevent
freeze-up in event of loss of water flow during heating cycle.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 265 of 367
2.2.4 Unit Controls
Unit shall be internally prewired with a 24 volt control circuit powered by an internal
transformer. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring and external control wiring.
Unit shall have cutoffs for high and low pressure, and low oil pressure for compressors with
positive displacement oil pumps, supply fan failure, and safety interlocks on all service panels.
Head pressure controls shall sustain unit operation with ambient temperature of 37 degrees F.
Adjustable-cycle timers shall prevent short-cycling. Multiple compressors shall be staged by
means of a time delay. Unit shall be internally protected by fuses or a circuit breaker in
accordance with UL 1995. Low cost cooling shall be made possible by means of a control
circuit which will modulate dampers to provide 100 percent outside air while locking out
compressors.
2.3 EQUIPMENT EFFICIENCY
Unit shall have an efficiency as indicated on the drawings.
2.4 UNITARY EQUIPMENT COMPONENTS
2.4.1 Refrigerant and Oil
Refrigerant shall be one of the fluorocarbon gases. Refrigerants shall have number designations
and safety classifications in accordance with ASHRAE 15 & 34. Refrigerants shall meet the
requirements of AHRI 700 as a minimum. Refrigerants shall have an Ozone Depletion Potential
(ODP) of less than or equal to 0.05. Provide and install a complete charge of refrigerant for the
installed system as recommended by the manufacturer. Lubricating oil shall be of a type and
grade recommended by the manufacturer for each compressor. Where color leak indicator dye is
incorporated, charge shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
2.4.2 Fans
Fan wheel shafts shall be supported by either maintenance-accessible lubricated antifriction
block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated ball bearings. Unit fans shall be selected to
produce the cfm required at the fan total pressure. Motor starters, if applicable, shall be
magnetic across-the-line type with a totally enclosed enclosure. Thermal overload protection
shall be of the manual or automatic-reset type. Fan wheels or propellers shall be constructed of
aluminum or galvanized steel. Centrifugal fan wheel housings shall be of galvanized steel, and
both centrifugal and propeller fan casings shall be constructed of aluminum or galvanized steel.
Steel elements of fans, except fan shafts, shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication or
fabricated of mill galvanized steel. Mill-galvanized steel surfaces and edges damaged or cut
during fabrication by forming, punching, drilling, welding, or cutting shall be recoated with an
approved zinc-rich compound. Fan wheels or propellers shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. Direct-drive fan motors shall be of the multiple-speed variety. Belt-driven fans shall
have adjustable sheaves to provide not less than 33 percent fan-speed adjustment. The sheave
size shall be selected so that the fan speed at the approximate midpoint of the sheave adjustment
will produce the specified air quantity. Centrifugal scroll-type fans shall be provided with
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 266 of 367
streamlined orifice inlet and V-belt drive. Each drive will be independent of any other drive. Vbelt driven fans shall be mounted on a corrosion protected drive shaft supported by either
maintenance-accessible lubricated antifriction block-type bearings, or permanently lubricated
ball bearings. Each drive will be independent of any other drive. Drive bearings shall be
protected with water slingers or shields. V-belt drives shall be fitted with guards where exposed
to contact by personnel and adjustable pitch sheaves.
2.4.3 Primary/Supplemental Heating
2.4.3.1 Electric Heating Coil
Coil shall be an electric duct heater in accordance with UL 1995 and NFPA 70. Coil shall be
unit-mounted. Coil shall be of the nickel chromium resistor, single stage, strip type. Coil shall
be provided with a built-in or surface-mounted high-limit thermostat interlocked electrically so
that the coil cannot be energized unless the fan is energized. Coil casing and support brackets
shall be of galvanized steel or aluminum. Coil shall be mounted to eliminate noise from
expansion and contraction and be completely accessible for service.
2.4.4 Air Filters
Air filters shall be listed in accordance with requirements of UL 900, except high efficiency
particulate air filters of 99.97 percent efficiency by the DOP Test Method shall be as listed under
the label service and shall meet the requirements of UL 586.
2.4.5 Coil Frost Protection
Each circuit shall be provided with a coil frost protection system which is a manufacturer's
standard. The coil frost protection system shall use a temperature sensor in the suction line of
the compressor to shut the compressor off when coil frosting occurs. Timers shall be used to
prevent the compressor from rapid cycling.
2.4.6 Mixing Boxes
Mixing boxes shall match the base unit in physical size and shall include equally-sized flanged
openings, each capable of full air flow. Arrangement shall be as indicated.
2.4.7 Cabinet Construction
Casings for the specified unitary equipment shall be constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum
sheet metal and galvanized or aluminum structural members. Minimum thickness of single wall
exterior surfaces shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel or 0.071 inch thick aluminum on units with a
capacity above 20 tons and 20 gauge galvanized steel or 0.064 inch thick aluminum on units with
a capacity less than 20 tons. Casing shall be fitted with lifting provisions, access panels or doors,
fan vibration isolators, electrical control panel, corrosion-resistant components, structural support
members, insulated condensate drip pan and drain, and internal insulation in the cold section of
the casing. Where double-wall insulated construction is proposed, minimum exterior galvanized
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 267 of 367
sheet metal thickness shall be 20 gauge. Provisions to permit replacement of major unit
components shall be incorporated. Penetrations of cabinet surfaces, including the floor, shall be
sealed. Unit shall be fitted with a drain pan which extends under all areas where water may
accumulate. Drain pan shall be fabricated from Type 300 stainless steel, galvanized steel with
protective coating as required, or an approved plastic material. Pan insulation shall be water
impervious. Extent and effectiveness of the insulation of unit air containment surfaces shall
prevent, within limits of the specified insulation, heat transfer between the unit exterior and
ambient air, heat transfer between the two conditioned air streams, and condensation on surfaces.
Insulation shall conform to ASTM C 1071. Paint and finishes shall comply with the
requirements specified in paragraph FACTORY COATING.
2.4.7.1 Indoor Cabinet
Indoor cabinets shall be suitable for the specified indoor service and enclose all unit components.
2.4.7.2 Outdoor Cabinet
Outdoor cabinets shall be suitable for outdoor service with a weathertight, insulated and
corrosion-protected structure. Cabinets constructed exclusively for indoor service which have
been modified for outdoor service are not acceptable.
2.5 FINISHES
2.5.1 Factory Coating
2.5.1.1 Coil Corrosion Protection
Provide coil with a uniformly applied phenolic type coating to all coil surface areas without
material bridging between fins. Coating shall be applied at either the coil or coating
manufacturer's factory. Coating process shall encure complete coil encapsulation. Coating shall
be capable of withstanding a minimum 1,000 hours exposure to the salt spray test specified in
ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution.
2.5.1.2 Equipment and Components
Unless otherwise specified, equipment and component items, when fabricated from ferrous
metal, shall be factory finished with the manufacturer's standard finish, except that items located
outside of buildings shall have weather resistant finishes that will withstand 125 hours exposure
to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 using a 5 percent sodium chloride solution.
Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show no signs of blistering,
wrinkling, cracking, or loss of adhesion and no sign of rust creepage beyond 1/8 inch on either
side of the scratch mark. Cut edges of galvanized surfaces where hot-dip galvanized sheet steel
is used shall be coated with a zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM D 520, Type I.
2.5.2 Factory Applied Insulation
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 268 of 367
Refrigeration equipment shall be provided with factory installed insulation on surfaces subject to
sweating including the suction line piping. Where motors are the gas-cooled type, factory
installed insulation shall be provided on the cold-gas inlet connection to the motor in accordance
with manufacturer's standard practice. Factory insulated items installed outdoors are not
required to be fire-rated. As a minimum, factory insulated items installed indoors shall have a
flame spread index no higher than 75 and a smoke developed index no higher than 150. Factory
insulated items (no jacket) installed indoors and which are located in air plenums, in ceiling
spaces, and in attic spaces shall have a flame spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke
developed index no higher than 50. Flame spread and smoke developed indexes shall be
determined by ASTM E 84. Insulation shall be tested in the same density and installed thickness
as the material to be used in the actual construction. Material supplied by a manufacturer with a
jacket shall be tested as a composite material. Jackets, facings, and adhesives shall have a flame
spread index no higher than 25 and a smoke developed index no higher than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, perform Verification of Dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative of any discrepancy before
performing any work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's published diagrams,
recommendations, and equipment warranty requirements. Where equipment is specified to
conform to the requirements of ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1and ASME BPVC SEC IX, the
design, fabrication, and installation of the system shall conform to ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1
and ASME BPVC SEC IX.
3.2.1 Equipment
Refrigeration equipment and the installation thereof shall conform to ASHRAE 15 & 34.
Necessary supports shall be provided for all equipment, appurtenances, and pipe as required,
including frames or supports for compressors, pumps, cooling towers, condensers, and similar
items. Compressors shall be isolated from the building structure. If mechanical vibration
isolators are not provided, vibration absorbing foundations shall be provided. Each foundation
shall include isolation units consisting of machine and floor or foundation fastenings, together
with intermediate isolation material. Isolators shall be selected and sized based on load-bearing
requirements and the lowest frequency of vibration to be isolated.
3.2.2 Field Painting
Painting required for surfaces not otherwise specified, and finish painting of items only primed at
the factory are specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 269 of 367
3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
Equipment shall be wiped clean, with all traces of oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed.
Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction, and new
filters shall be installed after all construction dirt has been removed from the building. System
shall be maintained in this clean condition until final acceptance. Bearings shall be properly
lubricated with oil or grease as recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be tightened to
proper tension. Control valves and other miscellaneous equipment requiring adjustment shall be
adjusted to setting indicated or directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the
manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
3.4 REFRIGERANT TESTS, CHARGING, AND START-UP
3.4.1 Contractor's Responsibility
Take steps, at all times during the installation and testing of the refrigeration system, to prevent
the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere. The steps shall include, but not be limited to,
procedures which will minimize the release of refrigerants to the atmosphere and the use of
refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system and store the refrigerant for
reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than 3 ounces of refrigerant be released to the
atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be repaired in
accordance with the requirements herein at no cost to the Government including material, labor,
and refrigerant if the leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or installation.
3.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TESTS
Before each refrigeration system is accepted, conduct tests to demonstrate the general operating
characteristics of all equipment by a registered professional engineer or an approved
manufacturer's start-up representative experienced in system start-up and testing, at such times as
directed. Tests shall cover a period of not less than 48 hours for each system and shall
demonstrate that the entire system is functioning in accordance with the drawings and
specifications. Make corrections and adjustments, as necessary, tests shall be re-conducted to
demonstrate that the entire system is functioning as specified. Prior to acceptance, service valve
seal caps and blanks over gauge points shall be installed and tightened. Any refrigerant lost
during the system startup shall be replaced. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory system
performance, deficiencies shall be corrected and the system shall be retested. Tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Water and
electricity required for the tests will be furnished by the Government. Provide all material,
equipment, instruments, and personnel required for the test. Submit a report including the
following information (where values are taken at least three different times at outside dry-bulb
temperatures that are at least 5 degrees F apart):
a. Date and outside weather conditions.
b. The load on the system based on the following:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 270 of 367
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
The refrigerant used in the system.
Condensing temperature and pressure.
Suction temperature and pressure.
Ambient, condensing and coolant temperatures.
Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors.
c. The actual on-site setting of operating and safety controls.
d. Thermostatic expansion valve superheat - value as determined by field test.
e. Subcooling.
f. High and low refrigerant temperature switch set-points
g. Low oil pressure switch set-point.
h. Defrost system timer and thermostat set-points.
i. Moisture content.
j. Capacity control set-points.
k. Field data and adjustments which affect unit performance and energy consumption.
l. Field adjustments and settings which were not permanently marked as an integral part of
a device.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 23 82 02 Page 271 of 367
SECTION 26 00 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to certain sections of Divisions 22 and 23, PLUMBING and HEATING
VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all sections of Division
26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified
otherwise in the individual sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these
specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe
products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this
section for detailed description of submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe
products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.
1.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 120/208 volts, three phase, four wire. Final
connections to the power distribution system at the transformer shall be made by the the local
power company.
1.4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following
additional requirements as applicable.
1.4.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location,
layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must
be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each
item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and
replacement of operating equipment devices.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 00 00 Page 272 of 367
1.4.2 Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship
shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more
stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
1.5.2 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The
2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or
more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same
manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1.5.2.1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless
specified otherwise.
1.6 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably
convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment
on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for
use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the
following:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 00 00 Page 273 of 367
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and
item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item
of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.
Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide
weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade
when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay,
switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each
nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates
shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte
finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum
size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high
normal block style.
1.10 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum,
meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 00 00 Page 274 of 367
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the
indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates
to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side, but space the
signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 00 00 Page 275 of 367
SECTION 26 20 00
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these
specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Panelboards; G
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed
location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and
other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of
equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall
indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
SD-03 Product Data
Receptacles; G
Switches; G
Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves.
SD-06 Test Reports
600-volt wiring test; G
Grounding system test; G
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Electrical Systems; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 276 of 367
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 73 00,
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING and as specified herein.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship
shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more
stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
1.3.2 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The
2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or
more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same
manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.3.2.1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless
specified otherwise.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
1.4.1 Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating
to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building.
This shall include:
a. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system.
b. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere).
c. Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 277 of 367
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL
standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70.
2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following:
2.2.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit
2.2.1.1 Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
NEMA C80.1, UL 6.
2.2.2 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651.
2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only.
2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, NEMA C80.3.
2.2.5 Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1.
2.2.5.1 Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel
UL 360.
2.2.6 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B.
2.2.6.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Threaded-type. Split couplings unacceptable.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 278 of 367
2.2.6.2 Fittings for EMT
Steel compression type.
2.2.7 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. UL 514C, if nonmetallic.
2.4 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel.
2.5 WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation,
jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12
months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used.
2.5.1 Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No. 10 AWG and
smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal
circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor
sizes and capacities shown are based on copper, unless indicated otherwise. All conductors shall
be copper.
2.5.1.1 Equipment Manufacturer Requirements
When manufacturer's equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires
copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment, provide copper conductors
or splices, splice boxes, and other work required to satisfy manufacturer's requirements.
2.5.1.2 Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1 remote-control and signal
circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG;
and for Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG.
2.5.2 Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors. Color shall be
green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 279 of 367
system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different
colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems
shall be as follows:
a. 208/120 volt, three-phase
(1) Phase A - black
(2) Phase B - red
(3) Phase C - blue
2.5.3 Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and lighting wires shall
be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83, except that grounding wire may be type
TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF,
conforming to UL 83. Where lighting fixtures require 90-degree Centigrade (C) conductors,
provide only conductors with 90-degree C insulation or better.
2.5.4 Bonding Conductors
ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B 8, Class
B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter.
2.6 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10
AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded
conductors.
2.7 DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed. For metal
outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having
round or beveled edges. Plates on finished walls shall be satin finish stainless steel or brushedfinish aluminum, minimum 0.03 inch thick. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk
heads in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. Plates
installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations."
2.8 SWITCHES
2.8.1 Toggle Switches
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 280 of 367
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset
plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be white thermoplastic. Wiring
terminals shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm
shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, with
current rating and number of poles indicated.
2.8.2 Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches where indicated, where switches are rated
higher than 240 volts, and for double-throw switches. Switches serving as motor-disconnect
means shall be horsepower rated. Provide switches in NEMA 3R, enclosure per NEMA ICS 6.
2.9 RECEPTACLES
UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, grounding-type. Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated.
Bodies shall be of white as per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported
on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6. Provide
screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The
receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts.
2.10 PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated. Panelboards for use as
service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be
circuit breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as
means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific breaker placement" is required in
panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the
drawings. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise.
Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" branch breakers. Where "space only" is
indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load
served by each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of service to
panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Type directories and mount in holder
behind transparent protective covering. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended
use. Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED
NAMEPLATES.
2.10.1 Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet
steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted or mounted outdoors, and not less than No.
12 gauge if surface-mounted indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted
outdoors or flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets shall be
painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged
or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard
front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 281 of 367
deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor
surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets
with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface. Flush doors
shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed. Each
door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall
be provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two
keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap
screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets.
2.10.2 Panelboard Buses
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be
designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide
isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate
ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding
conductors; bond to steel cabinet.
2.10.3 Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the shortcircuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker
terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit
breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable.
2.10.3.1 Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design shall be such that
overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence
throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and
C, respectively.
2.10.3.2 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) shall be marked for
use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type.
2.11 MOTORS
NEMA MG 1. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of
these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified.
Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and
overload heaters. Motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage
rating of 200 volts. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of
plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating. Unless otherwise indicated, motors rated 1 HP
and above shall be continuous duty type.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 282 of 367
Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide
fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated.
2.11.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types
corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven
equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide
equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated.
2.11.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical
characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated,
polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium
efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load
efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall
efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall
system rating indicated.
2.11.3 Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when
driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be
encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make
adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate
equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with
electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and
overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart
relay.
2.11.4 Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the
equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment as specified herein.
Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring
shall be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated
equipment.
2.12 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to
prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147.
Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements
of Division 23, "Mechanical."
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 283 of 367
2.13 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT
2.13.1 Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be sectional type, copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4
inch and minimum length of 10 feet.
2.14 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
2.15 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay,
switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription
shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine
plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners
shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of
nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
2.16 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum,
meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as
specified herein. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly
cleaned and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting.
Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other
imperfections. Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint
in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces shall be primed, filled
where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish.
Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors shall be
ANSI Light Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in
paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and
other air-handling spaces, shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to
requirements specified herein.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 284 of 367
3.1.1 Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as
permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing, shall be labeled as one of several
enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate
number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of
enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming
to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in
height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more
than one enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
3.1.2 Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or
EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be
installed otherwise. Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral
conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in
conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch in diameter for low voltage
lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with
metal conduit in fire-rated shafts.
3.1.2.1 Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200-pound force
tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
3.1.3 Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings,
and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot
water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural
members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after
completion of project.
3.1.3.1 Restrictions Applicable to EMT
a. Do not install underground.
b. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials.
c. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to
equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the
EMT.
d. Do not use outdoors.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 285 of 367
e. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of Highaltitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.3.2 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
a. PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80
(1) Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not
limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power
plants, missile magazines, and other such areas.
(2) Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through
floor slab or indicated otherwise.
(3) Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of
High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.3.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed
conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP).
3.1.3.4 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40. Convert nonmetallic
conduit, other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80, to plastic-coated rigid, or IMC, steel conduit before
rising through floor slab. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor.
3.1.3.5 Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws
to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on
concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on
steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or
pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-fourth proof test
load. Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant.
Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more
than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In
partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction,
run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box
systems shall be supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system,
and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be
shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation shall be
coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all
systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in
suspended ceilings in dry locations. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter,
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 286 of 367
provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times
the equipment weight in the downward direction.
3.1.3.6 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make fieldmade bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or
deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in
conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of
obstructions.
3.1.3.7 Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA
70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact
with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have
sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and
provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70.
3.1.3.8 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed
lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size
shall be 3/4 inch diameter. Provide liquid tight flexible nonmetallic conduit in wet and damp
locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, movement or motors. Provide
separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
3.1.4 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making
connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be castmetal, hub-type when located in wet locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior
surfaces, when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and
walkways. Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors
enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square, or
octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as
approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or
standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes
installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide
separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating
temperature; fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels
are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings
independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with
bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and
with machine screws or welded studs on steel. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 287 of 367
raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet
metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used,
attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type
fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid
cutting reinforcing steel.
3.1.4.1 Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 galvanized sheet steel, except where
cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened
covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly
electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
3.1.4.2 Extension Rings
Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on existing boxes in concealed
conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish.
3.1.5 Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest
position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished
floor. Mount receptacles 18 inches above finished floor.
3.1.6 Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made.
For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, color coding shall be by factory-applied,
color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding
shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat
shrink-type sleeves.
3.1.7 Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller
diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and
larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to
conductor insulation.
3.1.8 Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or
similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16
inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in
wet locations.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 288 of 367
3.1.9 Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of
electrical equipment, and neutral conductor of wiring systems.
3.1.9.1 Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-ofpotential method described in IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall
not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a
single rod, 6 additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25
ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative who will decide on the number of ground rods to add.
3.1.9.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by
exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written
recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces
indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not
required at exothermic welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the
correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible
indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.10 Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of
the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring,
control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this
section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated
equipment.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates
to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 289 of 367
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the
indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00, PAINTS
AND COATINGS.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative 5 working days notice prior to each tests.
3.4.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times, demonstrating
satisfactory operation each time.
3.4.2 600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist.
Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument
which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance.
Minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms.
3.4.3 Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test
each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system
together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not
earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions
at time measurements were made.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 20 00 Page 290 of 367
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
07/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories
mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these
specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have
survived under normal conditions.
c. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic
components divided by the total fundamental current.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods
prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting system specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Fluorescent lighting fixtures; G
Fluorescent electronic ballasts; G
Fluorescent lamps; G
High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting fixtures; G
HID ballasts; G
Metal-halide lamps; G
Photocell switch; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 291 of 367
Exit signs; G
Energy Efficiency
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 73 00
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING and as specified herein, showing
all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level
sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting
control wire, conduit, and associated hardware.
Submit documentation that includes contact information, summary of procedures,
and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project. Indicate manufacturer's
commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and/or reuse.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4.1 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic
Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic
ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This
information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information
required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This
information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors
with vendor part numbers.
1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory,
as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret
references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar
meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory
provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
1.4.3 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The
2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances
and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through
advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 292 of 367
more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same
manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1.4.3.1 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless
specified otherwise.
1.4.3.2 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products.
Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under this section.
Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
2.1.1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics:
a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA C82.11, NFPA 70, and CEC Title 24 unless
specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high frequency type with no magnetic
core and coil components. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by
IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps
used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage
system to which they are connected.
b. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum).
c. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20,000 Hertz (minimum). Ballast shall be compatible
with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared
control systems. Provide ballasts operating at or above 40,000 Hertz where available.
d. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or
minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum)
using any compatible lamp.
e. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor
shall be 1.7 (maximum).
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 293 of 367
f. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A."
g. Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast.
h. Ballasts shall be instant start unless otherwise indicated. Ballasts shall be programmed start
where indicated. Instant start ballasts shall operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration
that permits the operation of remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are removed.
Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide
series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available.
i. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start.
j. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F
unless otherwise indicated.
k. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture
as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein.
2.1.1.1 T-8 Lamp Ballast
a. Total harmonic distortion (THD): Shall be 20 percent (maximum).
b. Input wattage.
1. 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
c. Ballast efficacy factor.
1. 1.44 (minimum) when operating two F32T8 lamps
2.1.2 Fluorescent Lamps
a. T-8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum), 2800 initial lumens
(minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K, and an average rated life
of 20,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic
Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure
described in NEMA LL 1.
2.2 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE (HID) LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Provide HID fixtures with tempered glass lenses when using metal-halide lamps.
2.2.1 HID Ballasts
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 294 of 367
UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator,
high power factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp ballasts which shall have a
minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be:
a. Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.
b. Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.
c. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life.
2.2.2 Metal-Halide Lamps
a. Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA C78.43
2.2.2.1 Luminaire Efficiency Rating (LER)
a. Upward efficiency of 0%
1. 150-399 watts: minimum 41 LER for closed fixture
b. Upward efficiency of 1%-10%
1. 150-399 watts: minimum 56 LER for closed fixture
c. Upward efficiency greater than 20%
1. 150-399 watts: minimum 62 LER for closed fixture; minimum 77 for open fixture
2.3 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES
Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom.
Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated.
2.4 SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by
hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be
cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall
allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit
swinging.
2.5 SWITCHES
2.5.1 Toggle Switches
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 295 of 367
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM.
2.6 PHOTOCELL SWITCH
UL 773 or UL 773A, hermetically sealed cadmium-sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120
volts ac, 60 Hz with single-throw contacts. Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and
off at 2 to 10 footcandles. A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light
sources. Provide switch:
a. Integral to the luminaire, rated 1000W minimum. Provide a directional lens in front of the
cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition.
2.7 EXIT SIGNS
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Exit signs shall be self-powered type. Exit signs shall use
no more than 5 watts.
2.7.1 Self-Powered LED Type Exit Signs (Battery Backup)
Provide with automatic power failure device, test switch, pilot light, and fully automatic
high/low trickle charger in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type,
shall operate unattended, and require no maintenance, including no additional water, for a period
of not less than 5 years. LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1/2 hours (minimum).
The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70,000 hours (minimum).
2.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated.
2.8.1 Emergency Lighting Unit
Provide as indicated. Emergency lighting units shall be rated for 12 volts, except units having no
remote-mounted lamps and having no more than two unit-mounted lamps may be rated 6 volts.
2.9 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS
2.9.1 Wires
ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12
gage).
2.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
2.10.1 Manufacturer's Nameplate
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 296 of 367
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model
number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the
distributing agent will not be acceptable.
2.10.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires shall be
clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The
following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____":
a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type,
and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.
b. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID
luminaires.
c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent
luminaires.
d. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
e. Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.
All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service
personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have
clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various
outputs.
2.11 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum,
meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified
herein.
3.1.1 Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the
original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for
working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more
than 15 percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 297 of 367
to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer.
Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer.
3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent
lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved
drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or
indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for
wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job
before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style,
and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be
independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and
located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to
independently supported light fixtures. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.
Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical
panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels
spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires
for lighting fixture support in this section.
3.1.3 Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and
shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem,
canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or
longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree
separation. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match
the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall
be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless
otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as
recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less.
3.1.4 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units ahead of the switch to the normal lighting circuit
located in the same room or area.
3.1.4.1 Exit Signs
Wire exit signs on separate circuits and serve from.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 26 51 00 Page 298 of 367
SECTION 28 31 63
ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
10/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 00 00 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS, applies to this
section, with the additions and modifications specified herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.2.1 Scope
This work includes designing and providing a new, complete, analog/addressable fire alarm
system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the Atlantic Beach, USCG project.
The system shall include wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting
boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification
appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and
miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not
specifically mentioned or described. Provide system complete and ready for operation.
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing shall be in strict
accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72 except as modified herein.
The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested
locations. Final quantity, layout, and coordination is the responsibility of the Contractor.
Existing Base system is Honeywell Notifier, Model MSSZ 320 Network Radio System.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Fire alarm control panel (FACP); G
Manual stations; G
Transmitters (including housing); G
Batteries; G
Battery chargers; G
Notification appliances; G
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 299 of 367
Addressable interface devices; G
Graphic annunciator; G
Amplifiers; G
Radio transmitter and interface panels; G
Submit data on proposed equipment, including, but not limited to the items listed
above. Include UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of installer
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Record drawing software
1.4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Battery Power Calculations
Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements.
a. Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power
requirements. Ampere hour requirements for each system component shall be
submitted with the calculations.
b. Provide data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for
notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data
for each circuit on the drawings.
c. Provide a detailed description of the final acceptance testing procedures (including
equipment nencessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke).
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system
and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm
system. Existing supervising station fire alarm system is Monoco.
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 300 of 367
Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by
FM P7825.
1.5.1.1 Requirements for Fire Protection Service
Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved
by FM and listed in FM P7825. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this
specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825. The omission of these
terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving
this requirement.
1.5.1.2 Testing Services or Laboratories
Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot
Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM P7825.
1.5.2 Standard Products
Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory, such as UL or FM, and listed or approved for fire protection service when so
required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where
possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature
variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants.
1.7 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
1.7.1 Spare Parts
Furnish the following spare parts and accessories:
a. 2 audiovisual devices of each type installed
b. 4 fuses for each fused circuit
c. 1 manual stations
d. 3 break rods for manual stations
1.7.2 Parts List
Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and accessories which the manufacturer of the
system recommends to be stocked for maintenance.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 301 of 367
1.8 KEYS
Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type
required. Keys shall be CAT 60.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EXISTING FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Manufacturer Qualifications
Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the
time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm
system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.
2.2 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN
2.2.1 Definitions
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and
functions shall be defined as follows:
a. Analog/Addressable System: A system in which multiple signals are transmitted via the
same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel,
decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response.
b. Hard Wired System: A system in which alarm and supervisory initiating devices are
directly connected, through individual dedicated conductors, to a central control panel
without the use of analog/addressable circuits or devices.
c. Interface Device: An addressable device which interconnects hard wired systems or
devices to an analog/addressable system.
d. Fire Alarm Control Unit: A control panel, remote from the fire alarm control panel, that
receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to
detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the
notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices
connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm
control panel.
e. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): A master control panel having the features of a fire
alarm control unit and to which fire alarm control units are interconnected. The panel
has central processing, memory, input and output terminals.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 302 of 367
f. Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door in which terminal
strips are securely mounted.
2.2.2 System Operation
The system shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm system
conforming to NFPA 72. The system shall have an interconnected riser loop or network having
Style 6 supervision that shall not be located in the same room or shaft. The return portion of the
loop shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop. The system shall operate in the alarm
mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode
until initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored
to normal. The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:
a. The FACP and fire alarm control units, if used, shall provide power, annunciation,
supervision, and control for the system.
b. Provide Style B initiating device circuits for conductor lengths of 10 feet or less.
c. Provide Style 6 signaling line circuits for the network.
d. Provide Style Z notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances
shall have the flash rates synchronized.
e. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the
battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.
f. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open
condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary
power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of
alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature which
shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After
the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound
until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for
the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.
g. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch which, when activated, will silence the
audible signal appliance, but will not affect the visual alarm indicator, the liquid
crystal display, or the automatic notification of the fire department. This switch shall
be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.
h. Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors. Alarm verification shall
initially be set for 30 seconds.
i. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the
automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting system, air handler shutdown
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 303 of 367
features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP
display and printer output.
j. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire
department.
k. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions
shall override trouble functions.
l. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panel’s keyboard.
Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
m. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both
addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.
n. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of
addressable devices which may be in alarm simultaneously.
o. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency
control device or system, such as an HVAC system, the addressable fire alarm relay
shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device.
p. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device
and its indication at the FACP shall be 15 seconds.
q. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its
indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds.
2.2.3 System Monitoring
a. Valves: Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including
automatic sprinkler control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, whether supplied
under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper
position. Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address, unless they
are within the same room, then a maximum of 5 feet can use the same address.
2.2.4 Addressable Interface Devices
The addressable interface (AI) device shall provide an addressable input interface to the FACP
for monitoring normally open or normally closed contact devices such as waterflow switches,
valve supervisory switches, relays for output function actuation, etc.
2.2.5 Smoke Sensors
2.2.5.1 Duct Smoke Sensors
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 304 of 367
Duct smoke sensors shall be analog/addressable photoelectric type as described in paragraph
entitled "Photoelectric Smoke Sensors," and shall be provided in ductwork in accordance with
NFPA 90A and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.2.6 Electric Power
2.2.6.1 Primary Power
Provide primary power for the FACP from the normal AC service to the building where shown
on the drawings. Power shall be 120 VAC service, transformed through a two-winding, isolation
type transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of circuits and devices. Make the
service connection for the FACP at the a main distribution panel where shown. Provide
appropriate equipment to protect against power surges. Provide a separate NEMA 1 "general
purpose enclosure" for the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker enclosure shall be painted red,
marked "FIRE ALARM SYSTEM," provided with a red and white engraved plastic sign
permanently affixed to the face of the switch, and provided with a lockable handle or cover.
2.2.7 Emergency Power Supply
Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal
to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic
and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm.
2.2.7.1 Batteries
Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to
the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained
in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic
transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power.
2.2.7.2 Capacity
Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under supervisory and trouble
conditions, including audible trouble signal devices for 60 hours and audible and visual signal
devices under alarm conditions for an additional 30 minutes. Batteries to be located in bottom of
cabinet, fire alarm panel or separate battery storage.
2.2.7.3 Battery Chargers
Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall
be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries
at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged, the charger shall recharge the
batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours. Provide pilot light to indicate when
batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate
switch is provided.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 305 of 367
2.2.8 System Field Wiring
2.2.8.1 Wiring Within Cabinets, Enclosures, Boxes, Junction Boxes, and Fittings
Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right
angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors which are terminated,
spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be
connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the
system. Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks, which are securely
mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited.
2.2.8.2 Alarm Wiring
Signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be copper, No. 16 AWG size
conductors at a minimum. Notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm
devices, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall
be copper No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent
voltage drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts.
Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of
nominal voltage. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be No. 12 AWG solid
copper having similar insulation. Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit. Conceal conduit in
finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of
flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits.
Run conduit concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring
shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall
be grounded at only one point, which shall be in or adjacent to the FACP. T-taps are not. Color
coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit.
2.2.8.3 Conductor Terminations
Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, and remote fire alarm
control units shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have
a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP,
and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing which indicates each conductor, its
label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering
minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with
the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing
equipment. All conductor termianl connections shall be screw terminals.
2.2.9 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein.
Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be
performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to
form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Each control unit shall
provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 306 of 367
components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable
for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with
supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation. Visual
indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by
liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters of which at least 32 are
field changeable.
2.2.9.1 Cabinet
Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and
also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The
enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on
the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm Control Panel" and shall not be less than one inch high.
Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses,
and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box,
hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
2.2.9.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible
signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be
different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to
screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if
any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than
21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10
percent of nominal voltage.
2.2.9.3 Silencing Switches
a. Alarm Silencing Switch: Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP which shall
silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator. This switch shall be
overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.
b. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch: Provide supervisory and trouble silencing
switch which shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not
extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition.
2.2.9.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt
of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the FACP
after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
2.2.9.5 Fire Alarm Signal
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 307 of 367
A fire alarm shall activate notification appliances throughout the building. Audible devices shall
be fire alarm horns which produce a three-pulse temporal pattern. Visual devices shall be strobes
operating in accordance with NFPA 72.
2.2.9.6 Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long
life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to nonvolatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS.
2.2.9.7 Field Programmability
Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation,
notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program
configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be
accomplished using personal computer based equipment.
2.2.9.8 Input/Output Modifications
The FACP shall contain features which allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or
the modification of system outputs. These control features shall consist of a panel mounted
keypad. Any bypass or modification to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the
FACP.
2.2.9.9 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble
signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists.
2.2.9.10 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass
cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location
observable from the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a
signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal,
alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative before being posted.
2.2.9.11 Walk Test
The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices
shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few
seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.
2.2.9.12 History Logging
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 308 of 367
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a
minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and
shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of
the control panel shall not clear the memory.
2.2.9.13 RS-232-C Output
Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type cathode ray tubes
(CRTs), printers, and/or modems. The output shall be paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C
connection with a baud rate of 1200 or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT,
printer, or modem.
2.2.10 Amplifiers
Any amplifiers, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete,
operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm
control unit, terminal cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically
operate and control all building fire alarm speakers. Each amplifier shall have two channels; one
to broadcast a message and the other for paging. Provide a backup amplifier that will
automatically activate in event of a failure of the primary event. No amplifier shall be loaded
more than 50 percent.
2.2.10.1 Construction
Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output
protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the
highest rated voltage in the system.
2.2.10.2 Inputs
Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the digitalized voice driver and panel
mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type.
Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.
2.2.10.3 Protection Circuits
Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition which could render the amplifier
inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a
designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control
panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and other actions for trouble
conditions as specified.
2.2.11 Graphic Annunciator
2.2.11.1 Annunciator Panel
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 309 of 367
Provide a graphic annunciator which indicates the building floor plan, including the locations of
stairs and elevators. Alarm circuit boundaries shall be clearly marked on the floor plan.
Annunciator shall include a north arrow, location of the fire alarm control panel, and a "you are
here" indicator. The graphic annunciator shall be a minimum size of 3 by 3 feet.
2.2.11.2 Indicating Lights
Provide the graphic annunciator with individual light emitting diode (LED) indicating lights for
each type of alarm and supervisory device. Provide an amber LED for indicating a system
trouble condition and a separate amber LED for indicating a supervisory condition. Provide a
green LED to indicate presence of power and a red LED to indicate an alarm condition. The
actuation of any alarm signal shall cause the illumination of a boundary LED, a floor LED, and a
device LED. System supervisory or trouble shall cause the illumination of a trouble LED. In
addition to all of these LED indicators, provide normal power and emergency power indicating
LEDs. Provide a push button LED test switch. The test switch shall not require key operation.
Annunciator LEDs shall only be extinguished by operation of the system reset switch on the
FACP.
2.2.11.3 Material
Construct the graphic annunciator face plate of smoked Plexiglas. The LEDs shall be backlit.
Control equipment and wiring shall be housed in a surface mounted back box. The exposed
portions of the back box shall be chrome plated with knockouts.
2.2.11.4 Programming
Where programming for the operation of the proper LEDs is accomplished by a separate
software program than the software for the FACP, the software program shall not require
reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field.
2.2.12 Manual Stations
Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, which
are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw
terminals for each conductor. Stations which require the replacement of any portion of the
device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with
molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench
shall be required to reset the station.
2.2.13 Notification Appliances
2.2.13.1 Visual Alarm Signals
Provide strobe light visual alarm signals which operate on a supervised 24 volt DC circuit. The
strobe lens shall comply with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act.
The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 310 of 367
degree angle on both sides of the strobe. The strobe flash output shall be a minimum of 15
candela based on the UL 1971 test. The strobe shall have a xenon flash tube. Visible appliances
may be part of an audio-visual assembly. Where more than two appliances are located in the
same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation.
2.2.13.2 Fire Alarm Horns
Provide surface mounted electronic multi-tone horns that produce a minimum of four distinct
sounds, suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Horns shall have a rating of 90 dBA
at 10 feet when tested in accordance with UL 464 while emitting a slow whoop tone. Output
from the horn shall be three-pulse temporal pattern. Where horns and strobes are provided in the
same location, they may be combined into a single unit.
2.2.13.3 Connections
Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall be designed to accept
the size conductors used in this project without modification.
2.2.14 Automatic Transmitters
2.2.14.1 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
Provide radio transmitter with antenna that is compatible with the existing supervising station
fire alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions via a single transmitter. Provide transmitters in accordance with applicable portions
of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90. Protect the antenna from
physical damage. Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation which conforms to
NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time.
2.2.14.2 Signals To Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station:
a. Manual pull stations
b. Duct smoke detectors
2.3 NAMEPLATES
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style,
model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and
address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or
equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. FACPs
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 311 of 367
b. Automatic transmitter
Furnish to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative before
installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative for
installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by
screws to panels or adjacent walls.
2.4 WIRING
Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES
a. FACP: Locate the FACP where indicated on the drawings. Recess the enclosure with
the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor. Conductor terminations shall be
labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their
interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.
b. Manual Stations: Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 101 and NFPA 72.
Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor.
Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve,
measured horizontally.
c. Notification Appliance Devices: Locate notification appliance devices as required by
NFPA 72. Mount assemblies on walls 80 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches
below the ceiling whichever is lower.
d. Graphic Annunciator: Locate the graphic annunciator as shown on the drawings.
Surface mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or
center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower.
3.2 PAINTING
Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes
in exposed areas. Paint junction boxes and conduit red in unfinished areas. Painting shall
comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.3 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
3.3.1 Required Instruction Time
Provide 16 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be
given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 312 of 367
Officer's Technical Representative. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at
the discretion of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. The training shall allow for
rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 28 31 63 Page 313 of 367
SECTION 31 11 00
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Nonsaleable Materials; G
Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall be filed with
the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Roads and Walks
Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.
3.1.2 Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities
Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing,
grubbing, and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the
circumstances require.
3.1.3 Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown
existing utility line. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing
utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and
grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area
of operations, notify the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative in ample time to
minimize interruption of the service.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 11 00 Page 314 of 367
3.2 CLEARING
Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the
satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed
timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Trees, stumps, roots,
brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off 18 inches below the original
ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left
standing. Trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead
branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter and shall be trimmed of all branches the heights of 5
above grade or directed. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the bole
of the tree or main branches. Cuts more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be painted with an
approved tree-wound paint.
3.3 TREE REMOVAL
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from
areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing. This work shall include the
felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph
GRUBBING. Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF
MATERIALS.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
3.4.1 Nonsaleable Materials
Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing
operations, except for salable timber, shall be disposed of outside the limits of Governmentcontrolled land at the Contractor's responsibility, except when otherwise directed in writing.
Such directive will state the conditions covering the disposal of such products and will also state
the areas in which they may be placed.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 11 00 Page 315 of 367
SECTION 31 23 00
EXCAVATION AND FILL
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Capillary Water Barrier
A layer of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, stone, or natural sand or gravel having a high
porosity which is placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the
capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below a slab. Number 57 gradation or
similar.
1.1.2 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test
procedure presented in ASTM D 698, for general soil types, abbreviated as percent laboratory
maximum density.
1.1.3 Hard Materials
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials which are not included
in the definition of "rock" but which usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment,
ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.
1.1.4 Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, or foliated
masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling
and blasting, drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoemounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or
concrete other than pavement exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in volume. Removal of hard material
will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is
performed merely to increase production.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-06 Test Reports
Fill and backfill test
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 316 of 367
Select material test
Porous fill test for capillary water barrier
Density tests
Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.
1.4 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.
c. Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time
subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water
elevation at the time of construction.
d. Material character is indicated by the boring logs.
e. Hard materials will not be encountered except as noted on the boring logs.
f. Borrow material, Suitable backfill and bedding material in the quantities required is not
available at the project on Government property.
g. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFF SITE SOIL
Soils brought in from off site for use as backfill shall be tested for TPH, BTEX and full TCLP
including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain less than 100 parts per
million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and less than 10 ppm of the sum of
Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall not fail the TCPL test. TPH
concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. BTEX
concentrations shall be determined by using EPA 530/F-93/004 Method 5030/8020. TCLP shall
be performed in accordance with EPA 530/F-93/004 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing
for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at
least one test from each borrow site. Material shall not be brought on site until tests have been
approved by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 317 of 367
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1 Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction
shall be at the Contractor's risk. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted
within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work
immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction,
excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue
until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support
uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for
backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Report damage to
utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
2.1.1 Satisfactory Materials
As indicated on the plans.
2.1.2 Unsatisfactory Materials
Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory
materials also include man-made fills, trash, refuse, or backfills from previous construction.
Unsatisfactory material also includes material classified as satisfactory which contains root and
other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches. The Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative shall be notified of any contaminated materials.
2.1.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP.
Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials
classified as GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, SW-SM, SP-SM, and SM shall be identified as
cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic (plasticity index equals zero). Materials
classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity
index greater than zero.
2.1.4 Expansive Soils
Soils that have a plasticity index equal to or greater than 15 when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 4318.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 318 of 367
2.1.5 Common Fill
Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil
density specified for the intended location.
2.1.6 Backfill and Fill Material
As indicated on the plans.
2.1.7 Select Material
As indicated on the plans.
2.1.8 Topsoil
Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil,
stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material
detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7.
2.2 POROUS FILL FOR CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
ASTM C 33/C 33M fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing
ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77 and conforming to the
general soil material requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Satisfactory Materials."
2.3 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping
in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Backfill to top of pipe
shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density. Plastic piping shall have
bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D 2321 materials as follows:
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone, including a number of fill materials
that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed
shells.
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1.5 inches, including
various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally
granular and noncohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are
included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487.
2.4 BORROW
Obtain borrow materials from sources outside of Government property.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 319 of 367
2.5 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene
plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility
lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the
intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over
the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended
service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected
by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Yellow:
Blue:
Green:
Electric
Water Systems
Sewer Systems
2.5.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing
requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a
minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent
elongation.
2.5.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified
above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength
of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires,
foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3
feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means
of corrosion protection.
2.6 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper with a minimum of 12 AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting
Provide shoring bracing, cribbing, trench boxes, underpinning and sheeting as required. In
addition to Section 25 A and B of EM 385-1-1 and other requirements set forth in this contract,
include provisions in the shoring and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 320 of 367
a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.
3.1.2 Drainage and Dewatering
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during
construction.
3.1.2.1 Drainage
So that construction operations progress successfully, completely drain construction site during
periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall
establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site
development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface
water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, swales, and
other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils, prevent erosion and
undermining of foundations. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and
unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material
and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to
employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed. Excavated slopes and backfill
surfaces shall be protected to prevent erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so
that the site, the area immediately surrounding the site, and the area affecting operations at the
site shall be continually and effectively drained.
3.1.2.2 Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of
excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate
interference with orderly progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will
not be permitted within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written
approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have
been made. Control measures shall be taken by the time the excavation reaches the water level
in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, the water
level shall be maintained continuously, at least 2 feet below the working level.
3.1.3 Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify
the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction.
3.1.4 Machinery and Equipment
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 321 of 367
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at
the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed
pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, brush and vegetation and other
items that would interfere with construction operations within the clearing limits. Remove
stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches
below existing surface.
3.2.2 Stripping
Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately
from other excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be wasted. Locate
topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading. Where sufficient
existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site, provide borrow
materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed.
3.2.3 Unsuitable Material
Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved
areas or concrete slabs.
3.3 EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions indicated. Reuse excavated materials that meet
the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep
excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations,
soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather.
Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory
material. Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as
directed. Refill with satisfactory material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum
density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill
and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density. Satisfactory
material removed below the depths indicated, without specific direction of the Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative, shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated
excavation grade; except as specified for spread footings. Determination of elevations and
measurements of approved overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades
indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
3.3.1 Structures With Spread Footings
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 322 of 367
Ensure that footing subgrades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative prior to concrete placement. Fill over excavations with concrete
during foundation placement.
3.3.2 Pipe Trenches
Excavate to the dimension indicated. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support for
each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement. Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed.
Recesses shall be excavated to accommodate bells and joints so that pipe will be uniformly
supported for the entire length. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth of at
least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe.
3.3.3 Excavated Materials
Satisfactory excavated material required for fill or backfill shall be placed in the proper section
of the permanent work required or shall be separately stockpiled if it cannot be readily placed.
Satisfactory material in excess of that required for the permanent work and all unsatisfactory
material shall be disposed of as specified in Paragraph "DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS
MATERIAL."
3.3.4 Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete
Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed. Only
excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid and unshattered condition shall
be used. Approximately level surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as
indicated into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Shales shall be protected
from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion resulting from ponding or flow of
water.
3.4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and
replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started.
Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or
broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less
than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches,
pulverized, and compacted to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part
excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a
depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill. Material shall not be placed
on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Compaction shall be accomplished by
sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment
well suited to the soil being compacted. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to
provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with
the equipment used. Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 323 of 367
3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
Fill and backfill to contours, elevations, and dimensions indicated. Compact each lift before
placing overlaying lift.
3.5.1 Common Fill Placement
Provide for general site and under porous fill of pile-supported structures. Use satisfactory
materials. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with
mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory
moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.
3.5.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement
Provide for paved areas and under concrete slabs, except where select material is provided.
Place in 6 inch lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Place backfill material adjacent to
structures as the structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only
when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure.
3.5.3 Select Material Placement
Provide under structures. Place in 6 inch lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Backfill
adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill
against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or
against structure.
3.5.4 Backfill and Fill Material Placement Over Pipes and at Walls
Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved, underground
utilities systems have been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavation
cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to indicated finish grade. Where pipe is
coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion, the backfill material up to an elevation 2 feet
above sewer lines and 1 foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch
in any dimension. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated
closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the
top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 4 inches in
compacted thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted.
Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings, wrappings,
or tanks. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls prior to 7 days after completion of
the walls. As far as practicable, backfill shall be brought up evenly on each side of the wall and
sloped to drain away from the wall.
3.6 BORROW
Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations,
approved borrow materials shall be obtained as specified herein.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 324 of 367
3.7 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished
grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.
3.8 BURIED DETECTION WIRE
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches
above the top of pipe. The wire shall extend continuously and unbroken, from manhole to
manhole. The ends of the wire shall terminate inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with
a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. The wire shall
remain insulated over its entire length. The wire shall enter manholes between the top of the
corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the
chimney seal. For force mains, the wire shall terminate in the valve pit at the pump station end
of the pipe.
3.9 COMPACTION
Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of
existing subgrade will be required.
3.9.1 General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the
paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.9.2 Structures, Spread Footings, and Concrete Slabs
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698. Compact fill and backfill
material to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.9.3 Adjacent Area
Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.9.4 Paved Areas
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D 698. Compact fill and backfill
materials to 95 percent of ASTM D 698.
3.10 FINISH OPERATIONS
3.10.1 Grading
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 325 of 367
Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of one foot. Grade areas to drain water away from
structures. Maintain areas free of trash and debris. For existing grades that will remain but
which were disturbed by Contractor's operations, grade as directed.
3.10.2 Topsoil and Seed
Scarify existing subgrade. Provide 4 inches of topsoil for newly graded finish earth surfaces and
areas disturbed by the Contractor. Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen,
excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding, planting, or
proper grading. If there is insufficient on-site topsoil meeting specified requirements for topsoil,
provide topsoil required in excess of that available. Seed shall match existing vegetation.
Provide seed at 5 pounds per 1000 square feet. Provide CID A-A-1909, Type I, Class 2, 10-1010 analysis fertilizer at 25 pounds per 1000 square feet. Provide mulch and water to establish an
acceptable stand of grass.
3.10.3 Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly backfilled, graded, and topsoiled areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that
may occur. Repair or reestablish damaged grades, elevations, or slopes.
3.11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove from Government property surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for
filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.12.1 Sampling
Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.
3.12.2 Testing
Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional tests for
each source change.
3.12.2.1 Fill and Backfill Material Testing
Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D
2487 gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 4318
for liquid limit and for plastic limit; ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density
relations, as applicable.
3.12.2.2 Select Material Testing
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 326 of 367
Test select material in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487
gradation limits; ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 698 or
ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.12.2.3 Porous Fill Testing
Test porous fill in accordance with ASTM C 136 for conformance to gradation specified in
ASTM C 33/C 33M.
3.12.2.4 Density Tests
Test density in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. When
ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests are used, verify density test results by
performing an ASTM D 1556 density test at a location already ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D
3017 tested as specified herein. Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the start of the job, and
for every 10 ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 density tests thereafter. Test each lift at
randomly selected locations every 2000 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and
concrete slabs, and every 2500 square feet for other fill areas and every 2000 square feet of
pavement subgrade in cut. Include density test results in daily report.
a. Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 50 linear feet in each lift.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 23 00 Page 327 of 367
SECTION 31 31 16
SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL
08/08
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Termiticides
Manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for termiticides
proposed for use.
Verification of Measurement
Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate.
Application Equipment
A listing of equipment to be used.
Warranty
Copy of Contractor's warranty.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications
Qualifications and state license number of the termiticide applicator.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification, and
record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form
1532-1 and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer's Technical
Representative. These forms may be obtained from the main web site:
http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 328 of 367
Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532 identifying
target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation,
concentration or rate of application used.
1.2.1 Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor whose principal business is
pest control. The subcontractor shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to
be performed. Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control.
1.2.2 Safety Requirements
Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in accordance with label
directions. Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative, and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local
plumbing codes or standards. The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous
observation of a contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and related
materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper protective clothing and
equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application. Dispose of used
pesticide containers off Government property.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.3.1 Delivery
Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels
indicating the EPA registration number and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials,
to be used on site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or otherwise good
condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator.
1.3.2 Inspection
Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type and quality in accordance
with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall bear evidence of registration under the
Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate
regulations of the host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with specified
requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site.
1.3.3 Storage
Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Termiticides
and related materials shall be kept under lock and key when unattended.
1.3.4 Handling
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 329 of 367
Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be handled in accordance
with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and organic material.
Protect termiticides from sunlight as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
The following conditions will determine the time of application.
1.4.1 Soil Moisture
Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to a
minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture shall be as recommended by the termiticide
manufacturer. The termiticide will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's
recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils.
1.4.2 Runoff and Wind Drift
Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains. Applications shall not be
performed when conditions may cause runoff or create an environmental hazard. Applications
shall not be performed when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide
shall not be allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals.
1.4.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes
Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane.
1.4.2.2 Utilities and Vents
Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall be turned off and
blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide.
1.4.3 Placement of Concrete
Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration
into the soil. Time for maximum penetration shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a standard 5-year written warranty against infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this
contract. Warranty shall include annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If
live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the
warranty period, and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim, the
Contractor shall:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 330 of 367
a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of
subterranean termite infestation;
b. Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and
c. Re-inspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDES
Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such use by the appropriate
agency of the host county. Select non-repellant termiticide for maximum effectiveness and
duration after application. The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic
conditions at the project site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to determine the
remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used contents for the application shall
equal the established application rate for the project site conditions. Provide written verification
of the measurements.
3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE
The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the technical representative, shall
be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be
present during treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be contacted
prior to starting work.
3.3 SITE PREPARATION
Site preparation shall be in accordance with specification covering earthwork and landscaping.
Work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to
finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils, shall be coordinated with
this specification.
3.3.1 Ground Preparation
Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post
construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap lumber from the site,
before termiticide application begins.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 331 of 367
3.3.2 Verification
Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been
completed in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL. Soil particles shall
be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch and compacted to eliminate soil movement
to the greatest degree.
3.3.3 Foundation Exterior
Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting operations will not disturb
treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of foundation walls, grade beams, and similar
structures.
3.3.4 Utilities and Vents
Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts and vents, water and
sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.
3.3.5 Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and plenum air spaces have
been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.
3.3.6 Application Plan
Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the specified treatment.
3.4 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT
3.4.1 Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration tests shall be
conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank shall be measured to
determine the volume and contents. These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is
operating within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified requirements.
Provide written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing.
3.4.2 Mixing and Application
Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting
Officer’s Technical Representative. A closed system is recommended as it prevents the
termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating
shall only come from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow
preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be prevented during the
filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be
inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 332 of 367
3.4.3 Treatment Method
For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or horizontal soil poison
barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite
access to wood and wood related products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve
as crawl spaces or for use as a plenum air space.
3.4.3.1 Surface Application
Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface applicants shall be applied
as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall
penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching
Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers. Trenching shall be to the depth
of the foundation footing. Width of trench shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as
indicated. Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the
trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as
recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench shall commence. Backfilling shall
be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise shall be treated with termiticide.
3.4.4 Sampling
The Contracting Officer's Technical Representative may draw from stocks at the job site, at any
time and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to determine if the amount of
active ingredient specified on the label is being applied.
3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection of the site without
delay.
3.5.1 Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment measures, according to
label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed
off site.
3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide
Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property, and in accordance with
label instructions and EPA criteria.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 333 of 367
3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area
Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other use by erecting
barricades and providing signage as required or directed.
3.6 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT
3.6.1 Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory, retreatment will be required.
3.6.2 Testing
Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples of the applied
termiticide contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils
are treated to a depth less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required.
3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils
Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before placement of slabs or
other covering structures.
3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered during the warranty
period, re-treat the site.
3.7 RE-TREATMENT
Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in paragraph
WARRANTY.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 31 31 16 Page 334 of 367
SECTION 32 92 19
SEEDING
10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Wood cellulose fiber mulch
Fertilizer
Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.
SD-07 Certificates
State certification and approval for seed
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.1.1 Seed Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling.
1.4.1.2 Fertilizer and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis,
name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 335 of 367
of containers, fertilizer and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above
information.
1.4.2 Storage
1.4.2.1 Seed, Fertilizer and Lime Storage
Store in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.
1.4.2.2 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified
non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to
stockpiling topsoil.
1.4.2.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
1.5 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds
90 degrees Fahrenheit.
1.6 TIME LIMITATIONS
1.6.1 Seed
Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
Seed shall be provided in accordance with NCDOT SHS, Section 1660, subject to frequent
mowing.
2.1.1 Classification
Provide State-approved, Endophyte-enhanced seed of the latest season's crop delivered in
original sealed packages, bearing producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures,
purity, germination, weedseed content, and inert material. Label in conformance with AMS
Seed Act and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 336 of 367
rejected. Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the presence of
the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative.
2.1.2 Planting Dates and Rate
Planting dates shall be in accordance with the requirements of NCDOT SHS, Section 1660 and
the following table. Subject to frequent mowing.
Application Rate Per Acre
March1-August 31
25# Bermudagrass
6# Indiangrass
8# Little Bluestem
4# Switchgrass
25# Brownstop Millet
September 1-February 28
35# Bermudagrass
6# Indiangrass
8# Little Bluestem
4# Switchgrass
35# Rye Grain
2.1.3 Seed Purity
Seed purity shall be in accordance with requirements of NCDOT SHS, Section 1660.
2.1.4 Seed Mixture by Weight
Proportion seed mixtures by weight.
2.2 TOPSOIL
2.2.1 On-Site Topsoil
Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements
specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition." When available topsoil shall be
existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 23 00
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
2.2.2 Off-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall
be furnished by the Contractor.
2.2.3 Composition
Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of
the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum
particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other
debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 337 of 367
Silt
Clay
Sand
pH
Soluble Salts
25-50 percent
10-30 percent
20-35 percent
5.5 to 7.0
600 ppm maximum
2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS
Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with "composition" standard for
topsoil as specified herein.
2.3.1 Lime
Commercial grade hydrate or burnt limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.)
as specified in ASTM C 602 of not less than 110 percent.
2.4 FERTILIZER
2.4.1 Granular Fertilizer
Synthetic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages,
by weight, of plant food nutrients:
8 percent available nitrogen
8 percent available phosphorus
8 percent available potassium
2.4.2 Hydroseeding Fertilizer
Controlled release fertilizer, to use with hydroseeding and composed of pills coated with plastic
resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6 months and containing the
following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients.
8 percent available nitrogen
8 percent available phosphorus
8 percent available potassium
2.5 MULCH
Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds, mold, and other deleterious materials.
2.5.1 Straw
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 338 of 367
Stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice. Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper
consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment. Straw shall contain no
fertile seed.
2.5.2 Hay
Air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing
equipment. Hay shall be sterile, containing no fertile seed.
2.5.3 Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch
Use recovered materials of either paper-based (100 percent) or wood-based (100 percent)
hydraulic mulch. Processed to contain no growth or germination-inhibiting factors and dyed an
appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of materials application. Composition on air-dry
weight basis: 9 to 15 percent moisture, pH range from 5.5 to 8.2. Use with hydraulic application
of grass seed and fertilizer.
2.6 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer's Technical Representative and of
suitable quality for irrigation, containing no elements toxic to plant life.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners as required), fertilizing, seeding, and surface
topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all
areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.1.1 Topsoil
Provide 4 inches of on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After areas have been brought
to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer pH adjusters and soil conditioners into soil a
minimum depth of 4 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the
Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative. Remove debris and stones larger than 3/4 inch
in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish
surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or
pedestrian traffic.
3.1.1.2 Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job
site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 339 of 367
Lime, approximately 75 pounds per 1000 square feet.
3.1.1.3 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For
bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
Synthetic Fertilizer 1500 pounds per acre
Hydroseeding Fertilizer 800 pounds per acre
3.2 SEEDING
3.2.1 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions
Immediately before seeding, restore soil to proper grade. Do not seed when ground is muddy
frozen, snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding. If special conditions exist that
may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions, submit a written request to the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative stating the special conditions and proposed
variance. Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed by approved
sowing equipment. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right angles to
the first sowing.
3.2.2 Seed Application Method
Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding or hydroseeding.
3.2.2.1 Broadcast and Drop Seeding
Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate indicated in NCDOT SHS, pounds per 1000 square
feet. Use broadcast or drop seeders. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder
at right angles to the first sowing. Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1/4 inch in clay
soils and 1/2 inch in sandy soils by means of spike-tooth harrow, cultipacker, raking or other
approved devices.
3.2.2.2 Hydroseeding
First, mix water and fiber. Wood cellulose fiber, paper fiber, or recycled paper shall be applied
as part of the hydroseeding operation. Fiber shall be added at 1,000 pounds, dry weight, per
acre. Then add and mix seed and fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry. Seed shall be
mixed to ensure broadcasting at the rate of pounds per 1000 square feet. When hydraulically
sprayed on the ground, material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated uniformly with grass
seed. Spread with one application with no second application of mulch.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 340 of 367
3.2.3 Mulching
3.2.3.1 Hay or Straw Mulch
Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre. Mulch shall be
spread by hand, blower-type mulch spreader, or other approved method. Mulching shall be
started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes, and
continued uniformly until the area is covered. The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped.
Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface. All areas
installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding. Mulch shall be anchored
immediately following spreading.
3.2.3.2 Non-Asphaltic Tackifier
Hydrophilic colloid shall be applied at the rate recommended by the manufacturer, using
hydraulic equipment suitable for thoroughly mixing with water. A uniform mixture shall be
applied over the area.
3.2.4 Rolling
Immediately after seeding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not
exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. If seeding is performed with cultipacker-type
seeder or by hydroseeding, rolling may be eliminated.
3.2.5 Erosion Control Material
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where indicated or as directed by the
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative.
3.2.6 Watering
Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a
rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off. During
the germination process, seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out.
3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 32 92 19 Page 341 of 367
SECTION 33 11 00
WATER DISTRIBUTION
10/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Piping materials
Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling
Valve boxes
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings
and cuts for push-on and rubber-gasketed bell-and-spigot joints. Include information
concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings.
SD-06 Test Reports
Bacteriological Disinfection; G
Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection
SD-07 Certificates
Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Delivery, storage, and handling
Installation procedures for water piping
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.2.1 Delivery and Storage
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store
materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 342 of 367
materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly
on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.
1.2.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to
the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and
linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any
other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Carry, do not
drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be
permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be
thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean
during laying operations by plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe
shall be inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after laying shall be
replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber
gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight.
1.2.2.1 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Handle Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Store plastic piping and jointing materials that are not to be installed
immediately under cover out of direct sunlight.
Storage facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704, with
classification as indicated in NFPA 49 and NFPA 325.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS
2.1.1 Piping Materials
2.1.1.1 Plastic Piping
Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for
potable water service. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Screw Joints: ASTM D 1785, Schedule
40; or ASTM D 2241, with SDR as necessary to provide 150 psi minimum pressure
rating. Fittings, ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467. Pipe and fittings shall be of the
same PVC plastic material and shall be one of the following pipe/fitting combinations,
as marked on the pipe and fitting, respectively: PVC 2120/PVC II; PVC 2116/PVC II.
Solvent cement for jointing, ASTM D 2564. Pipe couplings, when used shall be tested
as required by ASTM D 2464.
b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Elastomeric-Gasket Joints:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 343 of 367
Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40, with
joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi hydrostatic test
pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified.
c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Solvent Cement Joints:
Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241
with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi
hydrostatic test pressure.
2.1.1.2 Insulating Joints
Joints between pipe of dissimilar metals shall have a rubber-gasketed or other suitable approved
type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling which will effectively prevent metal-to-metal
contact between adjacent sections of piping.
2.1.2 Water Service Line Appurtenances
2.1.2.1 Gate Valves Smaller Than 3 Inch Size in Valve Pits
MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, inside screw, rising stem. Valves shall have flanged or
threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve and a handwheel operator.
2.1.2.2 Curb Boxes
Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop. Curb boxes shall be of cast iron of a size
suitable for the stop on which it is to be used. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER"
on the lid. Each box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.1.2.3 Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron or
precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable.
Precast concrete boxes installed in locations subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed to
withstand the following HS 20 AASHTO load designation as outline in AASHTO HB-17.
Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the
box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.1.2.4 Disinfection
Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following:
Chlorine, Liquid: AWWA B301.
Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium: AWWA B300.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 344 of 367
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES
3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is
made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.
3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines
Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building.
Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not
lay water line closer horizontally than 10 feet from any sewer line. Where water lines cross
under gravity sewer lines, encase sewer line fully in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet on
each side of the crossing, unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber-gasketed joints
and no joint is located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Lay water lines which cross
sewer force mains at least 2 feet above these sewer lines; when joints in the sewer line are closer
than 3 feet horizontally from the water line, encase these joints in concrete.
Where water piping is required to be installed within 3 feet of existing structures, the water pipe
shall be sleeved as required in Paragraph "Casting Pipe". The Contractor shall install the water
pipe and sleeve ensuring that there will be no damage to the structures and no settlement or
movement of foundations or footings.
Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building.
Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines or electric wiring.
a. Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping
(1) Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer
or sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance edge-to-edge.
(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10
feet, the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that:
(a) The bottom (invert) of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top
(crown) of the sewer piping.
(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sewer piping shall be
constructed of AWWA-approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without
leakage prior to backfilling. Approved waste water disposal method shall be utilized.
(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 345 of 367
b. Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping
(1) Normal Conditions: Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to
provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and
the top of the sewer piping.
(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation
described above, use the following construction:
(a) Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWAapproved ductile iron water piping, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
(b) Water piping passing under sewer piping shall, in addition, be protected by
providing a vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer
piping and the top of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping
to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the
water piping; and that the length, minimum 20 feet, of the water piping be centered at
the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from
the sewer piping.
c. Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in
contact with any part of a sewer manhole.
3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL.
3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings,
valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering
sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings,
valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner
accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing.
Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for
proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not
be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying.
Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at
proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be
permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest
solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings.
Provide anchors and supports where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper
provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints
have been properly made. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 346 of 367
wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent
installation. Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 2 1/2 feet.
3.1.1.4 Installation of Tracer Wire
Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe.
Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction
operations.
3.1.1.5 Connections to Existing Water Lines
Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum
interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in
accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.
3.1.1.6 Penetrations
Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided with ductile-iron wall
sleeves. Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar.
Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic.
3.1.1.7 Flanged Pipe
Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in valve pits.
3.1.2 Installation of Water Service Piping
3.1.2.1 Location
Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been
installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines
approximately 5 feet from the building line at the points indicated; such water service lines shall
be closed with plugs or caps until tied to the buildings plumbing system.
3.1.3 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping
3.1.3.1 Installation of Plastic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for
Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable requirements of ASTM D 2774 and ASTM D
2855, unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in
accordance with ASTM F 402.
a. Jointing: Make solvent-cemented joints for PVC plastic piping using the solvent cement
previously specified for this material; assemble joints in accordance with ASTM D
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 347 of 367
2855. Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the
recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.
b. Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances: Connect plastic pipe service lines to
corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the
plastic pipe manufacturer.
3.1.4 Disinfection
Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer's Technical Representative’s approval of the
proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect new water
piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with AWWA
C651. Fill piping systems with solution containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available
chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems
with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 and 0.5
parts per million, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two
consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified
laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service.
Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections
Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer's Technical Representative’s approval of
the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The Contracting
Officer's Technical Representative will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified
in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and
incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any
item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2 Testing Procedure
Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard,
except for the special testing requirements given in paragraph entitled "Special Testing
Requirements." Test ductile-iron water mains and water service lines in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron
pipelines with mechanical-joints or push-on joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA
C600; no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method. Test PVC plastic water
mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the
requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on
pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA
UNI-B-3, except that at joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings, no leakage will be
allowed. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600
for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at plastic pipe joints, flanged joints and
screwed joints.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 348 of 367
3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements
For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure
of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in
diameter, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not less
than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for
a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less
than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same
time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.
3.3 CLEANUP
Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all debris and surplus
materials resulting from the work shall be removed.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 11 00 Page 349 of 367
SECTION 33 30 00
SANITARY SEWERS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1.1 Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline
Provide laterals 6 inch lines of ductile-iron pipe or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe at the
Contractor's option. Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping and
appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation. The exterior sanitary
gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship as specified
herein more than 5 feet outside of building walls.
1.1.2 Sanitary Sewer Pressure Lines
Provide pressure lines of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pressure pipe.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The construction required herein shall include appurtenant structures and building sewers to
points of connection with the building drains 5 feet outside the building to which the sewer
system is to be connected. The Contractor shall replace damaged material and redo unacceptable
work at no additional cost to the Government. Backfilling shall be accomplished after inspection
by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Before, during, and after installation,
plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or
deterioration to the material. The Contractor shall have a copy of the manufacturer's instructions
available at the construction site at all times and shall follow these instructions unless directed
otherwise by the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Solvents, solvent compounds,
lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install the plastic pipe shall
be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and shall be discarded if the
storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the
recommended pot life is exceeded.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Existing Conditions
Drawings of existing conditions, as specified.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 350 of 367
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings
Installation and As-Built drawings, as specified.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipeline materials
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.
SD-06 Test Reports
Reports
Test and inspection reports, as specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery and Storage
1.4.1.1 Piping
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials
on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials
and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the
ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.4.1.2 Metal Items
Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground
in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease
or other objectionable materials.
1.4.1.3 Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement
As specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
1.4.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in
sound undamaged condition. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 351 of 367
1.5 DRAWINGS
a. Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail, both plan and side view details
with proper layout and elevations.
b. Submit As-Built Drawings for the complete sanitary sewer system showing complete
detail with all dimensions, both above and below grade, including invert elevation.
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Submit drawings of existing conditions, after a thorough inspection of the area by the Contractor
in the presence of the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative. Details shall include the
environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas. Submit copies of the records for
verification before starting work.
1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor licensed for such work in
the state where the work is to be performed. Installing Contractor's License shall be current and
be state certified or state registered.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPELINE MATERIALS
Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below.
2.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping
2.1.1.1 PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, or ASTM F 949 with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket joints.
2.1.1.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material
Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.
2.1.2 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings
2.1.2.1 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings
a. Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inch Diameter: Pipe, couplings and fittings shall be
manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784, Class 12454B.
(1) Screw-Joint: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785,
Schedule 80, with joints meeting requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 352 of 367
hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Fittings for threaded
pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 2464, threaded to conform to the
requirements of ASME B1.20.1 for use with Schedule 80 pipe and fittings. Pipe
couplings when used, shall be tested as required by ASTM D 2464.
(2) Push-On Joint: ASTM D 3139, with ASTM F 477 gaskets. Fittings for push-on
joints shall be iron conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C111. Iron fittings and
specials shall be cement-mortar lined (standard thickness) in accordance with AWWA
C104.
(3) Solvent Cement Joint: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM
D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working
pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure. Fittings for solvent cement jointing
shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.
2.1.2.2 PVC Plastic Pressure Joints and Jointing Material
Joints for pipe, 4 inch to 12 inch diameter, shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139.
Joints between pipe and fittings shall be push-on joints as specified in ASTM D 3139 or shall be
compression-type joints/mechanical-joints as respectively specified in ASTM D 3139 and
AWWA C111. Each joint connection shall be provided with an elastomeric gasket suitable for
the bell or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe shall conform
to ASTM F 477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical-joints for
joint connections between pipe and fittings shall be as specified in AWWA C111, respectively,
for push-on joints and mechanical-joints.
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
2.2.1 Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M with Type II cement.
2.2.2 Portland Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type II for concrete used in concrete pipe, and
concrete pipe fittings, and type optional with the Contractor for cement used in concrete cradle,
concrete encasement, and thrust blocking.
2.2.3 Portland Cement Concrete
Portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C 94/C 94M, compressive strength of 4000 psi
at 28 days, except for concrete cradle and encasement or concrete blocks for manholes. Concrete
used for cradle and encasement shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi minimum at 28
days. Concrete in place shall be protected from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 353 of 367
2.3 REPORTS
Submit Test Reports. Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00
EXCAVATION AND FILL.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION
3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following
paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements."
3.1.1.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the
building. Where possible, do not lay sewer line closer horizontally than 10 feet to a water main
or service line. Install pressure sewer lines beneath water lines only, with the top of the sewer
line being at least 2 feet below bottom of water line. Where sanitary sewer lines pass above
water lines, encase sewer in concrete for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing.
Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines, lay pipe so that no joint in the sewer line will
be closer than 3 feet, horizontal distance, to the water line.
a. Sanitary piping installation parallel with water line:
(1) Normal conditions: Sanitary piping or manholes shall be laid at least 10 feet
horizontally from a water line whenever possible. The distance shall be measured
edge-to-edge.
(2) Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10
feet, the sanitary piping or manhole may be laid closer to a water line provided that:
(a) The top (crown) of the sanitary piping shall be at least 18 inches below the bottom
(invert) of the water main.
(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sanitary piping shall be
constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water pipe pressure tested in place
without leakage prior to backfilling.
(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.
b. Installation of sanitary piping crossing a water line:
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 354 of 367
(1) Normal conditions: Lay sanitary sewer piping by crossing under water lines to
provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the top of the sanitary piping and the
bottom of the water line whenever possible.
(2) Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation
described above, use the following construction:
(a) Sanitary piping passing over or under water lines shall be constructed of AWWAapproved ductile iron water pipe, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
(b) Sanitary piping passing over water lines shall, in addition, be protected by
providing:
1. A vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sanitary piping
and the top of the water line.
2. Adequate structural support for the sanitary piping to prevent excessive deflection
of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water line.
3. That the length, minimum 20 feet, of the sanitary piping be centered at the point of
the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the water
line.
c. Sanitary sewer manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with
any part of a sanitary sewer manhole.
3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 00.
3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and
remove from site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay
nonpressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a
uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted.
Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for
installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily
with wood blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for
checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be
used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of
regular fittings or solvent cemented saddles as approved. Saddles for PVC composite pipe shall
conform to Figure 2 of ASTM D 2680; and saddles for PVC pipe shall conform to Table 4 of
ASTM D 3034.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 355 of 367
3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative before making
connection to existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of service on
existing line.
3.1.2 Special Requirements
3.1.2.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for
Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying
and joining pipe and fittings. Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping
and assemble in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for assembly of joints.
Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe
manufacturer.
3.1.2.2 Installation of PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled
"General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section; with the requirements of
AWWA C605 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of
hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and
appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."
a. Pipe Less Than 4 Inch Diameter:
(1) Threaded joints shall be made by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by
applying an approved thread lubricant, then threading the joining members together.
The joints shall be tightened with strap wrenches which will not damage the pipe and
fittings. The joint shall be tightened no more than 2 threads past hand-tight.
(2) Push-On Joints: The ends of pipe for push-on joints shall be beveled to facilitate
assembly. Pipe shall be marked to indicate when the pipe is fully seated. The gasket
shall be lubricated to prevent displacement. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the
gasket remains in proper position in the bell or coupling while making the joint.
(3) Solvent-weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions.
b. Pipe anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage.
Size and position thrust blocks as indicated. Use concrete conforming to ASTM C
94/C 94M having a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi at 28 days; or use
concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel,
having the same minimum compressive strength.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 356 of 367
3.1.3 Concrete Work
Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The
pipe shall be supported on a concrete cradle, or encased in concrete where indicated or directed.
3.1.4 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation
3.1.4.1 Connecting to Existing Manholes or Concrete Structures
Pipe connections to existing manholes shall be made so that finish work will conform as nearly
as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including all necessary
concrete work, cutting, and shaping. The connection shall be centered on the manhole. Holes
for the new pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around the entire
periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the diameter of the pipe. Cutting the manhole
shall be done in a manner that will cause the least damage to the walls.
3.1.4.2 Metal Work
a. Workmanship and finish: Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be
equal to the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron to
shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean
true lines and surfaces are produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold
shuts, and blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed
surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide necessary
rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and support.
b. Field painting: After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not
buried in concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious
materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to
abrasion.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections
The Contracting Officer’s Technical Representative will conduct field inspections and witness
field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests and provide labor,
equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce evidence, when required, that
each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
3.2.2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall
show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of
line. When pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test this piping as
specified for nonpressure pipe.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 357 of 367
3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests, or by low-pressure air tests.
Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to
prevent pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to
prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit inspection. When leakage or pressure
drop exceeds the allowable amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline
section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results.
a. Infiltration tests and exfiltration tests: Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the
specified materials, not only concrete, in accordance with ASTM C 969. Make
calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 969.
b. Low-pressure air tests: Perform tests as follows:
(1) Ductile-iron pipelines: Test in accordance with the applicable requirements of
ASTM C 924. Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in ASTM C 924. Make
calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 924.
(2) PVC plastic pipelines: Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-6. Allowable
pressure drop shall be as given in UBPPA UNI-B-6. Make calculations in accordance
with the Appendix to UBPPA UNI-B-6.
3.2.3 Tests for Pressure Lines
Test pressure lines in accordance with the applicable standard specified in this paragraph, except
for test pressures. For hydrostatic pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi in excess of the
maximum working pressure of the system, but not less than 100 psi, holding the pressure for a
period of not less than one hour. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the
maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and
at the same test pressure as the pressure test. Test PVC plastic pressure lines in accordance with
the requirements of AWWA C605 for pressure and leakage tests, using the allowable leakage
given therein.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 30 00 Page 358 of 367
SECTION 33 32 16
GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATION
04/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work includes providing submersible sewage grinder pump station and related work.
Provide system complete and ready for operations. Grinder pump station system including
equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 30 00 SUBMITTALS.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe and fittings
Check valves
Gate valves; G
Submersible sewage grinder pumps; G
Pump motor; G
Flexible flanged coupling
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submersible Sewage Grinder Pumps Data Package 3; G
Submit in accordance with Section 01 73 00 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND
TRAINING.
Include pumps, alarms, and motors. Include all information on all equipment, alarm
panel and controls, pumps and pump performance curves, and station layout in data for
submersible sewage grinder pump station.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
1.3.1 Delivery and Storage
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 359 of 367
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store
materials in enclosures or under protective covering. Store rubber gaskets not to be installed
immediately under cover, out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground.
Keep interior of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.
1.3.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the
trench in sound, undamaged condition. Carry pipe to the trench; do not drag it.
1.4 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING
Provide in accordance with Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL, except as specified
herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
Provide pressure piping, air release valves, and related accessories for force main piping outside
the sewage wet well in accordance with Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS.
2.1.1 Ductile-Iron Pipe
AWWA C151, thickness Class 52.
2.1.1.1 Flanged Pipe
AWWA C115, ductile iron.
2.1.1.2 Fittings
AWWA C110, flanged. Provide flanged joint fittings within wet well and valve vault as
indicated. Provide mechanical joint fittings outside valve vault enclosure as indicated. Use
fittings with pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe.
2.1.1.3 Joints
AWWA C115 for flanged joints. Use bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections
recommended in the Appendix to AWWA C115. Flange for setscrewed flanges shall be of
ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, conforming to the applicable requirements of
ASME B16.1, Class 250. Setscrews for setscrewed flanges shall be 190,000 psi tensile strength,
heat treated, and zinc-coated steel. Gasket for setscrewed flanges shall conform to the applicable
requirements for mechanical-joint gaskets specified in AWWA C111. Use setscrewed gasket
designed to provide for confinement and compression of gasket when joint to adjoining flange is
made.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 360 of 367
2.1.2 PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Associated Fittings
2.1.2.1 Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inch Diameter
Use pipe, couplings and fittings manufactured of materials conforming to ASTM D 1784, Class
12454-B.
(1) Screw-Joint: Use pipe conforming to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785
Schedule 80, with joints meeting requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi
hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. Use threaded pipe
fittings conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2464, threaded to conform to the
requirements of ASME B1.20.1 for use with Schedule 80 pipe and fittings. Test pipe
couplings when used, as required by ASTM D 2464.
(2) Push-On Joint: ASTM D 3139, with ASTM F 477 gaskets. Fittings for push-on
joints: AWWA C110 or AWWA C111. Iron fittings and specials: cement-mortar lined
(standard thickness) in accordance with AWWA C104.
(3) Solvent Cement Joint: Use pipe conforming to dimensional requirements of ASTM D
1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working
pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure. Use fittings for solvent cement jointing
conforming to ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.
2.1.3 Insulating Joints
Provide between pipes of dissimilar metals a rubber gasket or other approved type of insulating
joint or dielectric coupling to effectively prevent metal-to-metal contact between adjacent
sections of piping.
2.1.4 Accessories
Provide flanges, connecting pieces, transition glands, transition sleeves, and other adapters as
required.
2.1.5 Flexible Flanged Coupling
Provide flexible flanged coupling applicable for sewage as indicated. Use flexible flanged
coupling designed for a working pressure of 350 psi.
2.2 VALVES AND OTHER PIPING ACCESSORIES
2.2.1 Gate Valves in Valve Vault
AWWA C500 and AWWA C509. Valves conforming to AWWA C500 shall be outside-screwand-yoke rising-stem type with double disc gates and flanged ends. Valves conforming to
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 361 of 367
AWWA C509 shall be outside-screw-and-yoke rising-stem type with flanged ends. Provide
valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Bolt and
construct stuffing boxes to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Use valves from one
manufacturer.
2.2.2 Check Valves Less Than 4 Inch Diameter
Neoprene ball check valve with integral hydraulic sealing flange, designed for a hydraulic
working pressure of 175 psi.
2.2.3 Identification Tags and Plates
Provide valves with tags or plates numbered and stamped for their usage. Use plates and tags of
brass or nonferrous material and mounted or attached to the valve.
2.2.4 Pipe Support
Use pipe support schedule 40 galvanized steel piping conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M.
Provide either ANSI B16.3 or ANSI B16.11 galvanized threaded fittings.
2.2.5 Miscellaneous Metals
Use stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers, anchors, and supports for installation of equipment.
2.2.6 Quick Disconnect System with Hydraulic Sealing Flange
Use quick disconnect system consisting of a steel base plate for supporting the pumps, a
hydraulic sealing flange, pump guide rails and the discharge pipe supports. Use two guide rails
of galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide a steel lifting chain for
raising and lowering the pump in the basin. Build guides onto pump housing to fit the guide post
to assure perfect alignment between pump and guide rails.
2.2.7 Wet Well Vent
Galvanized ASTM A 53/A 53M pipe with insect screening.
2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE GRINDER PUMPS
Provide submersible sewage pumps with grinder units as shown on the drawings. Provide
submersible, centrifugal sewage pumps of the non-clogging type with passageways designed to
pass 3 inch diameter spheres without clogging and grinder units capable of grinding all materials
found in normal domestic sewage, including plastics, rubber, sanitary napkins, disposable
diapers, and wooden articles into a finely ground slurry with particle dimensions no greater than
1/4 inch. Pump capacity and motor characteristics as indicated. Design pump to operate in a
submerged or partially submerged condition. Provide an integral sliding guide bracket and two
guide bars capable of supporting the entire weight of the pumping unit.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 362 of 367
2.3.1 Casing
Provide hard, close-grained cast iron casing which is free from blow holes, porosity, hard spots,
shrinkage defects, cracks, and other injurious defects. Design casings to permit replacement of
wearing parts. Design passageways to permit smooth flow of sewage and to be free of sharp
turns and projections.
2.3.2 Impeller
Provide non-clogging type cast-iron impeller. Make impeller with smooth surfaces, free flowing
with the necessary clearance to permit objects in the sewage to pass. Fit and key, spline, or
thread impeller on shaft, and lock in such manner that lateral movement will be prevented and
reverse rotation will not cause loosening.
2.3.3 Shaft and Shaft Seals
Provide shaft of stainless steel. Provide mechanical seal of double carbon and ceramic
construction with mating surfaces lapped to a flatness tolerance of one light band. Hold rotating
ceramics in mating position with stationary carbons by a stainless steel spring. Oil lubricate
bearings.
2.3.4 Bearings
Provide heavy duty ball thrust bearing or roller type bearing of adequate size to withstand
imposed loads. Oil lubricate bearings.
2.3.5 Pump and Motor
Use pump and motor assembled on a single stainless steel shaft in a heavy duty cast-iron shell.
Use free standing pump support legs of cast-iron providing enough clearance for the solids to get
into the grinder.
2.4 PUMP MOTOR
Provide submersible sewage pumps in wet well NEMA MG 1, 3450 RPM, 208 volt, 3 phase, and
60 Hz cycle and for submersible pumps. Motor horsepower shall be not less than pump
horsepower at any point on the pump performance curve. Fit motors with lifting "eyes" capable
of supporting entire weight of pump and motor.
2.5 PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM
Provide a sealed mercury float switch control system as indicated. Automatically alternate
operation from one pump to the other and start second pump in the event first pump cannot
handle incoming flow. Provide manual "on-off" switch for each pump. Provide independent
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 363 of 367
adjustable high and low water level switches. Provide floats, supports, and alarm. Metal parts, if
used, shall be of bronze or equivalent corrosion resistant material.
2.5.1 Float Assembly Description
Use a direct acting float switch consisting of a normally-open mercury switch enclosed in a float.
Use pipe mounted float assembly. Use float molded of rigid high-density polyurethane foam,
color-coded and coated with a durable, water and corrosion-resistant jacket of clear urethane.
Provide connecting cable and support pole in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Provide a cast aluminum NEMA Type 4 junction box to connect float assembly. Use box with a
gasketed cover with tapped float fitting and conduit entrance pipe threaded opening. Mount
floats at fixed elevations as shown. Use floats designed to tilt and operate their switches causing
sequential turn-on turn-off of the pump, when the liquid level being sensed rises or falls past the
float.
2.5.2 Alternator
Provide an alternator control switch to operate in connection with each float. Use alternator
control switch to alternate the operation of the pumps and operate both pumps if the water level
rises above the second high water level. Incorporate time delay function and devices in the
alternator controls such that both sewage pumps cannot be started simultaneously for an
adjustable period of 10 to 120 seconds after shutdown. Use delay function designed to operate in
any condition of start-up in either normal or emergency operational mode.
2.5.3 Sewage Pump Alarm and Control Panel
Enclose alarm panel in NEMA IV enclosure and with a flashing red light with long life bulb in
guarded enclosure and 6 inch diameter horn. Horn shall emit 120 DB at 10 feet. Power alarm
horn and light from 12V DC power supply with battery backup. Provide a rechargeable battery
rated to power both the horn and light for a minimum of two hours upon loss of main power.
Provide circuitry to automatically recharge the battery after main power is restored. Full charge
of battery shall take no more than 20 hours. Use panels with power on light, push to test button
for horn and light and push to silence button for horn and light with automatic reset for next
alarm. Use alarm designed to activate under the following conditions:
a. High liquid level as sensed by float switch
b. Loss of main power
c. No flow light as sensed by limit switch on the check valve
2.5.4 Electrical Requirements
Furnish motors with their respective pieces of equipment. Motors, controllers, contactors, and
disconnects shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 364 of 367
Furnish internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the
equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment.
2.5.5 Electric Motor
Use hermetically sealed electric motor. The power cable shall be sealed inside the motor end
bell. The cable shall be neoprene covered with a flexible metal cover over it for its full length.
2.6 UNDERGROUND EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
2.6.1 Access Hatch Cover
Provide aluminum access hatch cover as indicated. The access hatch shall include lifting
mechanism, automatic hold open arm, slam lock with handle, and flush lift handle with red vinyl
grip. Use automatic hold open arm that locks in the 90 degree position. Use cover that is 1/4
inch diamond plate with 1/4 inch channel frame and continuous anchor flange. Use access hatch
cover capable of withstanding a live load of 300 lbs./sq. ft. Provide stainless steel cylinder lock
with two keys per lock. Key all the locks the same.
2.6.2 Wet Well
Provide concrete wet well with inside diameter as indicated. Precast structures may be provided
in lieu of cast-in-place structures.
2.6.2.1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Provide wet well with a compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days as specified in Section 03 30
00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
2.6.2.2 Precast Concrete Structures
ASTM C 478/C 478M, except as specified herein. Provide precast concrete structures with a
compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days and an air entrainment of 6 percent, plus, or minus 2
percent and a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. ASTM A 615/A 615M reinforcing bars.
ASTM C 443/C 443M or AASHTO M 198, Type B gaskets for joint connections. Use
monolithic base and first riser.
2.6.3 Wet Well Base Material
Provide crushed stone as indicated and specified in Section 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND
FILL. Provide polyethylene vapor barrier as indicated and specified in Section 03 30 00 CASTIN-PLACE CONCRETE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 365 of 367
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide pump station in accordance with drawings and requirements of the respective equipment
manufacturers. Dampen and isolate equipment vibration.
3.1.1 Installation of PVC Plastic Pressure Pipe and Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled
"General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the
recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter
7, "Installation."
a. Pipe Less than 4 Inch Diameter:
(1) Make threaded joints by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by applying
an approved thread lubricant, than threading the joining members together. Tighten
joints with strap wrenches that will not damage the pipe and fittings. Do not tighten
joint more than 2 threads past hand-tight.
(2) Push-On Joints: Bevel ends of pipe for push-on joints to facilitate assembly.
Mark pipe to indicate when the pipe is fully seated. Lubricate gasket to prevent
displacement. Exercise care to ensure that the gasket remains in proper position in the
bell or coupling while making the joint.
(3) Solvent-weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.2 Valves
Installation of Valves: Install gate valves conforming to AWWA C500 in accordance with
AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix
("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate
valves conforming to AWWA C509 in accordance with AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting
installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Install check valves in accordance with the
applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation.
3.1.3 Steel Piping
Install steel piping in accordance with ANSI B31.3. Use PTFE pipe thread paste or PTFE
powder and oil for jointing compound for pipe threads.
3.1.4 Force Main
Provide in accordance with Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS.
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 366 of 367
3.1.5 Equipment Installation
Install equipment in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's installation
instructions. Grout equipment mounted on concrete foundations before installing piping. Install
piping to avoid imposing stress on any equipment. Match flanges accurately before securing
bolts.
3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing,
except that water and electric power needed for field tests will be furnished as set forth in
Division 01. Produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in
accordance with contract requirements. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 5 days before
testing any section of piping where concrete thrust blocks have been provided.
3.2.1 Testing Procedure
Test piping in accordance with the Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS. Test in operation
all equipment to demonstrate compliance with the contract requirements.
3.2.2 Sewage Grinder Pump Lift Station
Test pumps and controls, in operation, under design conditions to insure proper operation of all
equipment. Provide all appliances, materials, water, and equipment for testing, and bear all
expenses in connection with the testing. Conduct testing after all equipment is properly installed,
electrical services and piping are installed, liquid is flowing, and the pump station is ready for
operation. Correct all defects discovered to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer's
Technical Representative, and all tests repeated, at the expense of the Contractor, until the
equipment is in proper working order.
-- End of Section --
P/N 05-C05124
Section 33 32 16 Page 367 of 367
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement